Omega Vehicle Security OMB CHARTSCAN 1400 User Manual

OMB-CHARTSCAN-1400

Portable Data Recorder

^p/nOMB-483-0901 ^Rev3.1

August 2002

How To Use This Manual

Chapter 1: ChartScan  Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial provides information to get your ChartScan system

up and running. The chapter includes installation steps, basic concepts regarding the ChartView software

program, and a ChartView tutorial to quickly familiarize you with the software.

Chapter 2: General Information gives a general description of ChartScan and related hardware including

ChartScan’s expansion module and available signal conditioning cards.

Chapter 3: Hardware provides detailed information pertaining to ChartScan’s front and rear panels, voltage selector

switch, memory expansion, communication interfaces, digital I/O lines, external TTL connectors, signal

conditioning modules, CSN/Exp expansion chassis (option), and high current CSN/relay card (option).

Chapter 4: ChartView Software Reference explains the ready-to-use ChartView software that comes with every

ChartScan unit. Topics include detailed explanations of the program’s pull-down menus, toolbar icons, and

keypad control options. Additional features available through ChartView Plus are included.

Chapter 5: eZ-PostView and ViewXL - eZ-PostView is a time-domain post-acquisition data viewing application.

ViewXL is a Microsoft Excel Add-In. This chapter provides a brief overview of both applications and

references the actual user documentation that is included on your installation CD.

Chapter 6: Calibration explains how to use ScanCal, a software-automated method of calibration, as well as how to

manually calibrate the master chassis and option cards.

Appendices

The Appendices provide programming-related information that is not necessary for ChartView users. Appendices

are as follows:

Appendix A: API Commands describes the entire command set for ChartScan. Syntax, parameters, interpretation,

and error codes are explained. Sections on the individual commands include their parameters, types, typical use,

related information, and a sample program excerpt.

Appendix B: Configuration Aspects for Programmers provides information on memory allocation, channel and

scan configuration, triggers, alarms, and digital I/O operation.

Appendix C: Registers, Data Formats, & Queries provides information regarding registers, data formats, status and

event reporting, and other operation-related factors.

Appendix D: ChartScan Program Examples explains the program examples which are supplied on the release disk.

Typical tasks are covered including various kinds of data acquisition and alarm control.

Appendix E: Bus States, Bus Lines, and Data Transfer Aspects provides reference material regarding bus states,

bus lines and data transfer (DIO) lines in relation to IEEE 488 and Serial Interfaces.

Appendix F: ASCII Code Summary summarizes ASCCII control codes and character codes.

Appendix G: ChartScan Error Messages lists and describes error codes pertaining to ChartScan.

Appendix H: Abbreviations

CAUTION

If equipment is used in any manner not specified in this manual, or if specification limits are

exceeded, the function of the equipment, as well as the protection provided by it, may be

impaired.

ChartScan User’s Manual

Table of Contents

1 ChartScan-

CSN/Relay Card

(for High-Current Digital-Output) ……3-19

CSN/Relay Card Specifications……3-20

Unit Startup & ChartView Tutorial

Overview…… 1-1

Unit Startup……1-2

Expansion Chassis, CSN/Exp (Option) ……3-20

Connecting the Expansion Chassis ……3-20

Automatic Channel Assignment ……3-22

Inspect Your System……1-2

Install Software……1-2

Check and Install Hardware……1-3

Verify Voltage Setting……1-3

4 ChartView Software Reference

Overview ……4-1

Verify DIP Switch Setting……1-3

Install Signal Conditioning Card(s)……1-3

Install Interface Communications Card (option)… 1-4

Connect Expansion Chassis (option)……1-4

Connect ChartScan to your computer……1-4

Apply power to ChartScan…… 1-5

Connect Channel Signal Inputs……1-5

Start ChartView, Configure System, and Collect

Data……1-7

Groups, Charts, & Channels ……4-2

Three Ways of Using ChartView ……4-2

What ChartView and ChartView Plus Provide …4-3

Main Window ……4-4

Channel Information Region ……4-6

Status Indicator Region ……4-7

Main Window Toolbar ……4-8

Group Select ……4-8

ChartView, Basic Concepts……1-10

Configuration Files……1-10

Start, Pause, and Stop Charts ……4-8

Scroll Faster & Scroll Slower ……4-8

Display Configuration ……4-9

Channel Configuration ……4-15

PostView post-acq data viewer ……4-15

Arm Acquisition ……4-15

Understanding Groups, Charts, and

Channels……1-10

Three Ways of Using ChartView……1-11

ChartView Tutorial……1-11

Disarm ……4-15

Print Charts ……4-16

2 General Information

General Description……2-1

Main Window Pull-Down Menus ……4-16

Operational Aspects……2-2

Data Handling and Triggering……2-2

Software and Hardware……2-3

ChartScan Specifications……2-3

Bar Graph, Analog, and Digital Meters ……4-27

Overview ……4-27

Bar Graph Meters ……4-28

Analog Meters ……4-29

Digital Meters ……4-30

Meter Toolbars ……4-31

Meter Pull-Down Menus ……4-31

Meters Configuration Menu ……4-32

3 Hardware

Overview ……3-1

Front Panel ……3-1

Rear Panel ……3-2

Setup Window ……4-33

Channel & Alarm Setup Dialog Box ……4-33

Channel Configuration Columns ……4-35

Alarm Configuration Columns ……4-36

Acquisition Setup Dialog Box ……4-36

Burst Mode, Operational Issues ……4-39

Measuring AC Voltage, or AC RMS Voltage……4-40

Data Destination Dialog Box ……4-42

Data Destination ……4-42

Power Aspects ……3-3

Changing the Voltage Setting ……3-3

Replacing the AC Power Supply Fuse ……3-4

Memory Configuration ……3-4

Expanded Memory Options ……3-4

Calibration Memory Write Enable/Disable ……3-6

Auto Re-arm (ChartView Plus only) ……4-42

Why use Auto Re-arm? ……4-43

Disabling Auto Re-arm ……4-43

RS-232/422 Interface Configuration ……3-6

Configuring RS-322/422 Parameters …… 3-6

Serial Port Pin Connectors ……3-8

Chart Setup Wizard ……4-44

Introduction ……4-44

Ethernet Interface Configuration ……3-9

IEEE 488 Configuration (Option) ……3-11

Automatic Chart Setup with Wizard ……4-45

Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup ……4-46

Digital I/O Lines ……3-13

Logic Levels ……3-13

Digital I/O Port Pinout ……3-13

External TTL BNC Connectors ……3-14

Signal Conditioning Cards ……3-14

CSN14/TC/P Thermocouple and Low Volts Card

with Subminiature Plugs ……3-15

CSN14/LV/ (T, B, & S) Low Voltage Cards …3-17

CSN14/HV/S High Voltage Card with Safety Jack

Connectors ……3-18

ChartScan User’s Manual

5 eZ-PostView and ViewXL

Appendices

Appendix A  API Commands

Appendix B  Configuration Aspects for

6 Calibration

Programmers

Introduction ……6-1

Appendix C  Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Calibration Setup ……6-1

Non-Volatile Storage of

Appendix D  ChartScan Program Examples

Appendix E  Bus States, Bus Lines, and Data

Calibration Constants ……6-1

Hardware Protected RAM ……6-2

Transfer Aspects

Appendix F  ASCII Code Summary

Appendix G  ChartScan Error Messages

Appendix H  Abbreviations

ScanCal Software Application ……6-3

ScanCal’s Main Window ……6-3

Using ScanCal ……6-3

Interface Parameters

System Inventory

Calibration

Calibration Without ScanCal ……6-5

Password ……6-5

Calibration Mode Indicator ……6-5

Command Active Indicators ……6-5

Manual Calibration of Main Unit ……6-6

Offset Calibration of Main Unit ……6-6

Gain Calibration of Main Unit ……6-8

Manual Calibration of

Signal Conditioning Cards ……6-10

Offset Calibration of Cards ……6-10

Gain Calibration of Low Volts Cards ……6-12

Gain Calibration of High Volts Card ……6-15

Cold Junction Calibration ……6-17

ChartScan User’s Manual

08-09-02

iii

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartScan  Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial

Connect ChartScan to your computer……1-4

Apply power to ChartScan…… 1-5

Connect Channel Signal Inputs……1-5

Start ChartView, Configure System, and Collect Data……1-7

Overview…… 1-1

Unit Startup……1-2

Inspect Your System……1-2

Install Software……1-2

Check and Install Hardware……1-3

Verify Voltage Setting……1-3

Verify DIP Switch Setting……1-3

ChartView, Basic Concepts……1-10

Configuration Files……1-10

Understanding Groups, Charts, and Channels……1-10

Three Ways of Using ChartView……1-11

Install Signal Conditioning Card(s)……1-3

Install Interface Communications Card (option)…… 1-4

Connect Expansion Chassis (option)……1-4

ChartView Tutorial……1-11

Power Switch

LED Indicators

Interface

Card Slot

TRIGGER

SCAN

SEND RECEIVE

SERIAL

ERROR

POWER

ALARM

DIP Switch

TRIGGER

TTL

OUTPUT

ALARMS AND DIGITAL I/O

RS-232

TTL Output

Power

Connector Holder

Fuse

RS-232 (DB9)

Connector

Chassis Calibration

Enable/Disable*

Alarms & Digital I/O

(DB50) Connector

Trigger In

Ground

ChartScan Rear Panel

*Note: Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton; but

make use of a micro switch as discussed elsewhere in this manual.

Overview

Note: If you used the ChartScan Quick Start document (483-0940) to startup your unit, you may choose to

skip this chapter; or you may wish to run through the ChartView tutorial which begins on page 1-11.

Note: Chapter 3, Hardware Setup, contains detailed information pertaining to hardware issues.

This chapter provides the steps to connect, power up, and run ChartScan. Although there are many ways to

configure ChartScan, this Startup is intended for a simple setup. In addition to the following steps, this chapter

includes a section on basic concepts and a ChartView tutorial. These are provided to help you gain a better

understanding of the ChartView program.

Reference Note: If you plan to connect your ChartScan to a network through a Net232

Ethernet/RS-232 converter, refer to the Net232 User’s Guide, part no. 1037-0901.

ChartScan User’s Manual, ^1-5-99

1-1

The basic Startup Steps are:

1. Inspect Your System

2. Install Software

3. Check and Install Hardware

a. Verify Correct Voltage Setting

b. Verify Correct DIP Switch Setting

c. Install Signal Conditioning Card(s)

d. Install Interface Communications Card (option)

e. Connect Expansion Chassis (option)

4. Connect ChartScan to Your Computer

5. Apply power to ChartScan

6. Connect Channel Inputs

7. Start ChartView, Configure System, and Collect Data

Unit Startup

1. Inspect Your System

If you have not already done so, carefully unpack your shipping carton and check all contents for

damage that may have occurred during shipment. Immediately report all damage to the shipping agent

and your sales representative. Retain all shipping materials in case the unit must be returned to the

factory.

Each ChartScan is shipped with the following:

ChartScan

------------------

483-0940

483-0901

483-0601

CN-18-50

CA-1

Portable Data Recorder

Signal Conditioning Card(s) pre-installed per customer order

ChartScan Quick Start Sheet

ChartScan User’s Manual

Disks (or CD-ROM) in IBM format, includes ChartView Software

DB50 Digital I/O Mating Connector

Power Cable

FU-1-.5

FU-1-.25

1/2A, 250V, Slo Blo, 3AG for 105 - 125V power line or

1/4A, 250V, Slo Blo, 3AG for 210 - 250V power line

2. Install Software

For successful operation your computer should conform to the following, as a minimum:

•

PC system with Pentium processor is required

Windows 3.1+, Windows 95, or Windows 98

8 Mbytes of RAM for Windows 3.1+ (16 Mbytes recommended)

16 Mbytes of Ram for Win95/98 (32 Mbytes recommended)

For Net232 users, the PC requires a 10BASE-T ethernet card.

Use Microsoft Windows Run dialog box to install ChartView. Direct Windows to run the

SETUP.EXE file found on Installation Diskette 1,or Installation CD, as applicable. Follow the on-

screen dialog boxes to complete a successful installation.

If you ordered ChartViewNET or ChartViewPlus, have your registration ID sheets at

hand so you can enter your registration numbers when prompted by the installation

utility.

The ChartView program group includes the following:

PostView

Readme

ChartView

PostView Help

ScanCal

Uninstall ChartView Version x.x

Note: Once the software has been installed, you can run through the ChartView tutorial. The tutorial

makes use of a Simulated Instrument Mode and does not require any hardware hook-up.

1-2 ChartScan – Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial

ChartScan User’s Manual

3. Check and Install Hardware

Depending on your order, your ChartScan unit may not require all the steps under this heading. If a

step does not apply to your unit, simply go on to the next one.

a) Verify Voltage Setting

Based on your order, your ChartScan system was set at the voltage indicated on the sticker (located on

the rear of the unit, near the power switch). Verify that the voltage value indicated on the sticker

matches the voltage of your intended AC power supply. If you need to change the voltage selection for

any reason, refer to Chapter 3, Power Aspects, Changing the Voltage Setting.

b) Verify DIP Switch Setting

The DIP switch is located on the lower right corner of ChartScan’s rear panel. Default settings are

indicated in the following figures and table. Refer to Chapter 3 if you desire to change the RS-232

parameters from their default values, or if you wish to use the IEEE 488 interface option. For ethernet

use of ChartScan, make sure the unit is configured for RS-232 serial communications, then refer to the

Net232 User’s Guide (p/n 1037-0901).

Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable/Disable

Pushbutton. If you have an early production unit, refer to the right-hand DIP switch

illustration.

Dip Switch Default Settings

DIP Switch Default Settings

(Early Production Units Only)

Selection

Micro-

Switch #

Setting

Selection

Micro-

Switch #

Setting

COMM SELECT

0 – Serial

COMM SELECT

1- RS-232

Communication

HANDSHAKE

(H/S)

2,3

1,0 - Hardware

Handshake

HANDSHAKE

(H/S)

2,3

1,0 - Hardware

Handshake

PARITY

BAUD RATE

RS-232 or RS-422

4,5

6,7,8

0,0 - No Parity

PARITY

4,5

6,7,8

0,0 - No Parity

1,0,1 - 9600 Baud

0 - Disabled

1,1,0 – 19200 Baud BAUD RATE¹

0 – RS-232

CALIBRATION

¹It is recommended that you do not exceed 9600 Baud

unless you have firmware version 1.3 or greater. The

firmware version can be read in ChartView’s title bar.

c) Install Signal Conditioning Card(s)

Signal conditioning cards are pre-installed per customer order. However, if you need to install a signal

conditioning card, or CSN/Relay card, perform the following steps. Repeat the steps for additional

cards, and for placing cards into the optional CSN/Exp expansion chassis, if applicable.

CAUTION

Ensure ChartScan is powered down and not connected to any power source prior to

installing or removing a card. Failure to do so could cause equipment damage.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartScan - Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1-3

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,

when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause

equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION

Only one CSN/Relay card can be used in a ChartScan system. Attempts to install the

CSN/Relay card in a slot other than slot #1 of ChartScan’s main unit can cause equipment

damage.

The CSN/Relay card, if used, must be installed in the bottom slot of the main unit. Aside

from this requirement, cards may be installed in any slot.

1. Ensure ChartScan is powered down and not connected to any power source.

2. With channel labels oriented upright, carefully slide the card into the unit, and along the card

support grooves. Gently force the card to engage its edge connector with ChartScan’s internal

mating connector.

3. Tighten the external screws snug, at each end of the card.

d) Install IEEE 488 Interface Communications Card (option)

If you ordered an optional IEEE 488 Interface Card (CSN14/488), please refer to the

IEEE 488 Configuration (Option) section of Chapter 3 for installation instructions.

e) Connect Expansion Chassis (option)

If you ordered a expansion chassis (CSN/Exp), please refer to the Expansion Chassis, CSN/Exp

(Option) section of Chapter 3 for installation instructions.

4. Connect ChartScan to Your Computer

Reference Note: ChartScan is default configured for serial port connection to a PC. For

IEEE 488 connection, please refer to the Chapter 3 section, IEEE 488 Configuration (Option).

Reference Note: For ethernet operation refer to the Net232 User’s Guide, p/n 1037-0901.

Use a CA-47 cable (or equivalent) to connect the ChartScan to your computer. The ChartScan end of

the CA-47 cable has a DB-9P connector, while the computer end has 2 connectors (DB9 and DB25).

Other crossover-type cables can be used if wired as shown in the following figure.

1-4 ChartScan – Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial

ChartScan User’s Manual

5. Apply Power to ChartScan

ChartScan can be powered from a standard AC outlet. Use the following steps to connect power to

your unit.

1. Make sure ChartScan’s power switch is in the “0” (OFF) position.

2. Plug power cord CA-1 into ChartScan’s power connector, located on the rear panel. Plug the other

end of the cord into an appropriate receptacle.

3. Turn ChartScan’s power switch to the “1” (ON) position. The Power LED should light up.

At initial power-up ChartScan performs automatic self-tests to ensure that it is fully functional. The

rear panel LEDs indicate errors, if they occur. Possible error conditions and their corresponding

indicator light patterns are shown in the following table. Any pattern not shown is an internal error that

is not field-serviceable; in this case, contact the factory. When only the POWER and ERROR LEDs

are on, a configuration error exists as a result of the setup information in NV-RAM.

Error Condition

LED Indicators

SCAN

ALARM

TRIGGER

ERROR

-Flash-

POWER

General Hardware Failure

ROM Invalid for U22, COMM2

ROM Checksum Error for

U21 Comm1

ROM Checksum Error for

U22 COMM2

-Flash-

Non-Volatile RAM Error

Dynamic RAM Error

Interprocessor COM Error

Configuration Error

-Flash-

If you observe a configuration error, perform an error status query (see E? in Appendix A). If you

observe any other type of error condition, make note of the error and contact your service

representative.

If no problems are found ChartScan will begin its power-up initialization. This self-test is performed

each time the unit is powered up regardless of whether power-on was caused by the power switch or the

Power-On Reset (*R) command.

During initialization, ChartScan self test performs the following steps:

•

Checks for errors at power-up.

Checks the flag in the NV-RAM to determine if it should power-up with factory default

settings or a user-defined configuration.

•

Loads appropriate registers with corresponding values in NV-RAM.

Checks a flag to see if alarms should be enabled at power-up, and if so, enables them.

Loads channel configuration registers.

Loads program sequencer with appropriate channel configurations.

Resets computations processor to begin acquiring scans.

The self-test takes approximately 5 seconds to complete; after which, ChartScan is ready for normal

operation.

6. Connect Channel Signal Inputs

Connect channel inputs to your signal conditioning cards. Each signal conditioning card can support

up to 16 Channels. With use of the expansion chassis, you can have up to 8 signal conditioning cards.

Depending on the type(s) of cards used, your connections will be made via one or more of the

following: screw terminal, mini-plug, BNC, or safety jack type input connector.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartScan - Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1-5

ChartScan has eight digital input lines and thirty-two digital output lines available on the rear panel

DB-50 connector.

CAUTION

Do not exceed the 0.0 to 5.3 volts levels described above. Exceeding these levels

may damage the ChartScan unit in a way not covered by the warranty.

Each digital output line will drive five (5) standard TTL loads. All digital input lines are one-eighth

(0.125) TTL loads. All inputs are protected against damage from high static voltage. Normal

precautions should be taken to limit the input voltages to the range of 0.0 to 5.3 volts. All digital I/O

lines are referenced to the connector’s ground pins.

The following figure and table identify pin locations for outputs, inputs, and grounds associated with

the DB50 connector. Outputs 1 through 32 are typically used for alarms 1 through 32, respectively.

As mentioned above, outputs 1 through 16 can be used with a relay card option (see note 1).

DB50 Pin Descriptions

Output

Signal

No.

Output

Signal

Pin No.

Input

Signal

Pin No.

Ground Pins

12, 13, 14,

28, 29, 30, 31,

45, 46, 47

Note 1: A CSN/Relay is available for high current alarm output applications. If used, this card must

be installed in the bottom slot of ChartScan’s main chassis. See page 1-3 for installation

instructions. For more detailed information regarding the card, refer to CSN/Relay Card (for

High-Current Digital Output), in Chapter 3.

1-6 ChartScan – Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial

ChartScan User’s Manual

7. Start ChartView, Configure System, and Collect Data

Note: First time users should skip this step and return to it after reviewing ChartView, Basic

Concepts and completing the ChartView Tutorial.

Note: The configuration file, discussed in this section, will not be present during your first start of

the program.

Use the ChartView icon in Windows to start the ChartView program. ChartView will run using the

latest configuration file. This is a file which is automatically saved upon exiting the program. The

configuration file contains all setup information, including that pertaining to channels, alarms, and

acquisition configuration.

When ChartView opens using a configuration file, the program’s main window appears on the screen,

as indicated in the following figure.

Note:

Item 24, Status LEDs and labels, does not appear when using Windows 3.1. However, when

using Windows 3.1, text will appear in region 24 to inform you of the status. This is in

addition to the text in the Status Message Box (Item 22).

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartScan - Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1-7

ChartView Main Window

ChartView Main Window Control Options

ꢀ = Mouse, Ú= Arrow Keypads , ꢁ = PageUp/PageDown Keypads

Group Select

Channel Selection

Ctrl+G, ^orÚ, ^orꢁ

ꢀ ^or,Ú

Start Charts &

Indicators

Multiply (x2)

ꢀ ^{or,[Tab to and hit}

ꢀ^or,F5

Spacebar]

Pause Charts

Stop Charts

Present Value of Selected Channel

Center (Value at Chart Mid-Line)

N/A

ꢀ^or,F7

ꢀ ^or,F6

ꢀ ^or,Ú^{, or type-in}

Scroll Faster

Scroll Slower

Units/Division

ꢀ^or,Ctrl+Z

(Vertical increment per one grid box)

Chart Min. Scale Value (Grid Limit

Line)

From Chart Pull-down

menu or Chart Setup

Dialog Box

ꢀ^or,Ctrl+X

Display Configuration

Divide (÷2)

ꢀ ^{or, [Tab to and hit}

ꢀ^{or, Pointer over chart}

and “right-click”

Current group will be

selected.

Spacebar]

Channel Configuration

Time Scroll (hr:min:sec)

Status Message Box

Thru Pull-Down Menus

only

ꢀ

PostView post-acq

data viewer

N/A

ꢀ^{or, Windows Pull-}

down menu

Arm Acquisition

Time/Division (Chart Speed),

the Horizontal increment per grid box

Status LEDs

Ctrl+Z (Faster)

Ctrl+X (Slower)

ꢀ^or,Ctrl+T

Disarm …

N/A

ꢀ^or,Ctrl+Y

Print Charts

Chart Display

ꢀ^or,Ctrl+P

ꢀ

Chart Max. Scale

Value (Grid Limit Line)

From Chart Pull-down

menu or Chart Setup

Dialog Box

Double-click left mouse button in selected chart to zoom in or zoom

back out. Right-click to bring up Chart Setup Dialog Box with the

current group and target chart selected.

1-8 ChartScan – Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial

ChartScan User’s Manual

Once ChartView has a configuration file, you can start the program quickly using the Windows Run

dialog box. Before executing this command [by clicking on the OK box] specify a configuration file as

a command line parameter. In the following example, the user has specified a configuration file which

he had previously saved as Test1.cvw.

Note: The file name can be manually entered, or can be accessed using the pull-down arrow and

scrolling the list of available file names.

Example of Using Windows’ Run Dialog Box to Open a File

After executing the command, ChartView’s Main Window opens. At this point review the following

configurable items prior to Data Acquisition. Make changes, or load a different configuration file if

desired.

;

Device Interface

Check the Interface and Status via the Device pull-down menu.

;

Channel Configuration

Check channel and alarm configuration settings via the Channel Configuration Window. Access this

window through the Setup pull-down menu.

;

Acquisition Parameters

Check the acquisition parameters via the Acquisition Configuration window. This window can be accessed

through the Setup pull-down menu.

;

Data File Parameters

Check Data File Parameters. These parameters can be set from the Data Destination window

(accessible from the Setup pull-down menu), and from the Data File Parameters selection accessible

from the Data pull-down menu.

Using the Run Dialog box to specify a configuration file is very efficient. By using this method and

various configuration files, you should find that managing systems with more than one acquisition

device is relatively simple. With the use of a portable PC, you can quickly interface with a specific

acquisition system.

The pull-down menus and numbered areas represented in the previous figure and table are detailed in

the Chapter 4, ChartView and ChartView Plus.

To start the charts scrolling, push the “Start Charts and Indicators” button (item 2). More detailed

information pertaining to the charts and the ChartView Main Window appear in Chapter 4. In addition

to viewing the data as charts, you can select the Windows pull-down menu to select one or all of the

following:

•

ChartView Analog Meters

ChartView Digital Meters

ChartView Bar Graph Meters

The meter-type data displays, along with the charts, can be on your computer screen at the same time.

They can be re-sized and repositioned as desired. Analog, Digital, and Bar Graph meters are detailed

in Chapter 4.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartScan - Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1-9

ChartView, Basic Concepts

An understanding of the following basic concepts will help you master ChartView more quickly, and

should be understood before proceeding with the tutorial.

Configuration Files

ChartView makes use of one or more “user transparent” configuration files. Configuration files

maintain information regarding various aspects of your setup, serving as an initialization file for

subsequent ChartView startups. These files can be recognized by their .cvw extensions.

When you run ChartView for the very first time there will be no configuration file.

However, a configuration file will be generated and be saved, automatically, after

each use of the program.

ChartView uses Chartvw.cvw as a default configuration file. This file maintains a location for

ChartView configuration information including:

•

Device Interface Mode

Hardware Configuration

Channel Settings:

⇒

Channel Enable/Disable (On/Off)

Type

Label

Units

Alarm Settings (Limits)

Hysteresis Setting

•

Acquisition Configuration

Data Storage Settings

The configuration file ensures that when you restart ChartView, it will be in the same state upon your

last exit. This means that the Chartvw.cvw file will be an updated copy of the configuration file you

are using at the time you exit ChartView.

It is not catastrophic if a configuration file is deleted, since it is a simple task to start ChartView when

no configuration file exists. This is described in the tutorial.

Understanding Groups, Charts, & Channels

When starting the program with no configuration file present, a feature called Chart Setup Wizard is

automatically activated to assist you with your setup. To make the best use of Chart Setup Wizard you

need to understand the relationship of Groups, Charts, and Channels.

Note: ChartView, ChartView Plus, and Chart Setup Wizard are detailed in Chapter 4 of this manual.

Group. “Group” refers to a group of charts. ChartView makes use of one

chart group. ChartView Plus allows up to 64 groups, depending on the

capabilities of your PC, but only displays data from one chart group at a

time.

Chart. “Chart” refers to display area which reflects real-time channel data

values and can be scrolled at various rates. One chart can display data from

up to four channels. In addition, each chart will display real-time

information for a selected channel. You can assign up to 16 charts per

group.

Channel. “Channel” refers to a signal channel. You can have up to 4

channels assigned to one chart. Channels will be displayed in units of °C,

°F, °K, °R, mV, V, or in user-defined units, depending on the configuration

and type of signal conditioning card used. ChartScan’s signal conditioning

card options are detailed in Chapter 3.

1-10 ChartScan – Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial

ChartScan User’s Manual

Three Ways of Using ChartView

You can use ChartView to:

•

chart and monitor specific channels with no acquisition of data to disk

acquire data with no charting or meter use

use charting and/or meters while acquiring data to disk

Chart channels (and/or monitor with meters) with no acquisition of data to disk

Prior to charting channels on ChartView’s Main Window, you need to configure a display in regard to

groups, charts, and channels. This aspect of configuration is performed through Chart Setup Wizard

(discussed in the following text), or through a Display Setup dialog box which is accessed through the

Display Configuration Setup button (item 7, page 1-8) on ChartView’s Main Window.

In addition to charting channels, you can monitor selected channels via digital, analog, and/or bar graph

meters. Meters are discussed in Chapter 4.

Note: For ChartView Plus users, up to four channels will overlap on their assigned Chart, and will

be visible when the applicable Group is selected.

Acquiring Data with no charting or meter use

Prior to acquiring data (for saving to disk) you need to configure the acquisition using the Acquisition

dialog box (accessed through the Setup pull-down menu of ChartView’s Main Window, or through use

of the related icon button). You can enable the desired channels, assign high and low alarm values

from the channel configuration dialog box.

Chart channels and/or use meters while acquiring data to disk

Prior to using ChartView for charting (and/or meter use) while simultaneously acquiring data to disk,

you need to configure a display and/or meter; as well as configure the acquisition. Note that the

channels from the display setup are automatically enabled. You can enable additional channels from

the channel configuration dialog box (for the data acquisition) to acquire more data; however, these

additional channels will not change your display setup, or the channels being monitored. In other

words, you can acquire data from channels which you do not monitor.

ChartView Tutorial

This tutorial is intended to help you gain a good understanding of ChartView. The tutorial is based on

^{an initial startup with no configuration file present}.

ChartView allows you to operate in one of four Device Interface modes (IEEE 488, RS-232/422,

NetWork or Simulated Instrument). The tutorial makes use of the Simulated Instrument mode. This

mode provides a means of running ChartView and inspecting its features without hardware concern.

Note that you can change the interface mode at anytime during a configuration setup.

The tutorial makes use of the Simulated Instrument mode. Note that both the

IEEE 488 and Network modes require the use of additional hardware, as discussed

elsewhere in this manual.

^{The arrow symbol}◊^{, followed by a number, is used throughout the tutorial to indicate an action you}

are to complete. Text without the arrow is for information content, and does not require you to take

any action.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartScan - Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1-11

1. Select Interface Device

◊ ^{(1) From Windows, start ChartView by double-clicking on the}

ChartView icon. The ChartView Startup dialog box

appears.

ChartView Setup Dialog Box

◊ ^{(2) Choose the Select Device button. The Select Interface Dialog Box appears, as indicated in the following}

figure.

Note: The Load File button is for loading a previously saved configuration file.

◊ ^{(3) Select Simulated Instrument. In an actual application you would select}

IEEE 488, RS-232/422, or Network, whichever you configured your

acquisition system for. Network users should refer to the Net232 User’s

Guide, p/n 1037-0901.

Select Interface

2. Configure Chart Setup

◊ ^{(4) On the Select Interface box, shown in step 1, click “OK.” A Chart Setup Wizard window appears.}

Chart Setup Wizard Window

Note: ChartView Plus has Chart Setup Wizard options including Moderate and Advanced Automatic

Chart Creation, as well as the ability to create multiple groups. ChartView Plus features can

be unlocked by use of an authorized registration ID number as an unlock code. Contact your

service representative for more detailed information.

The chart setup determines how your ChartView Main Window will appear in regard to the number of

groups available for viewing, the number of charts shown for each selected group, and the number of

overlapping channels in each chart (not to exceed 4). As stated in the previous note, only

ChartView Plus allows the use of multiple groups and overlapping channels.

You can choose to manually create a configuration, or have one created automatically. In addition, you

can use Chart Setup Wizard to make a rough display configuration, and then manually fine tune it. The

automatic setup method offers three choices: Simple, Moderate, and Advanced.

The “Manual Chart Creation” option provides you with the same capabilities as the Advanced

Automatic Setup selection, but allows you to vary the number of assigned channels per chart, as well as

vary the number of charts per group.

1-12 ChartScan – Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial

ChartScan User’s Manual

Chart Setup Wizard, Automatic Options

Setup Type

Simple

Moderate*

Advanced*

Group Setup

1 group only

Up to 64 groups

Chart Setup

Up to 16 charts

Up to 16 charts per group

Channel Setup

1 channel per chart

Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart

*Moderate and Advanced modes are only available with activation of ChartView Plus.

Note: Once your chart setup is complete you can always go

back and edit the setup.

For the purpose of our tutorial, complete the following steps. Note that

these steps are catered to ChartView Plus. Comments regarding

standard ChartView are presented in brackets [ ].

◊ ^{(5) Verify that the Advanced tab (under Automatic Chart Creation) is}

selected. [Simple must be used for standard program].

◊ ^{(6) Choose “2” for the number of groups. [Standard program is}

limited to 1 group].

◊ ^{(7) Choose “3” for the number of charts.}

◊ ^{(8) Choose “4” for the number of channels.}

◊ ^{(9) Click Automatic Chart Creations/Create Charts. At this point}

your chart appears on the Main Window.

◊ ^{(10) Click on the Display Configuration button (item 7, see figure on}

page 1-8). Though you usually won’t do this at this point, this

act permits you to see a representation of your configuration,

and permits you to make changes.

You should end up with a configuration display of two groups, each with 3 charts, and each chart with 4

channels [for standard ChartView users the display will be for 1 group only].

Because Automatic Chart Creation was chosen (starting with Channel 1) for ChartView Plus users, the Channel

arrangement was automatically assigned as follows:

Group 1

Chart 1

Chart 2

Chart 3

Group 2

Chart 1

Chart 2

Chart 3

CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4

CH5, CH6, CH7, CH8

CH9, CH10, CH11, CH12

CH13, CH14, CH15, CH16

CH17, CH18, CH19, CH20

CH21, CH22, CH23, CH24

By using the mouse arrow and clicking on a Group, Chart, or Channel you will alter the appearance of the

display, but not alter its actual configuration. For example, in the previous Display tree figure we see channels 1

through 4 assigned to Chart 1 of the first Group.

◊ ^{(11) ChartView Plus users: click on the word/number “Group 2.”}

◊ ^{(12) ChartView Plus users: click on the word/number “Chart 3” (of Group 2). You should now see channels}

21 through 24 listed at that location.

The channels in the setup you just created will be automatically enabled and will appear in chart form on

ChartView’s Main Window. The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart, and will be visible when the

applicable Group is selected. Note that only one group of charts can be viewed at a time, even if you are using

ChartView Plus.

You can enable additional channels from the Channel Configuration window. This allows you to acquire more

data; however, it will not change your display on ChartView’s Main Window. In other words, you can acquire

data from channels which you do not monitor.

◊ ^{(13) Click “Okay” to exit the dialog box.}

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartScan - Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1-13

3. Configure Channels & Alarms

Configure channels and alarms as follows.

◊ ^{(14) On ChartView’s Main Window, click on Setup in the pull-down menu row. The}^{Setup pull-down}

menu appears, allowing you to make more specific selections.

◊ ^{(15) Click on the Channels & Alarms selection. The Channel and Alarm Setup dialog box appears, similar}

to that shown in the following figure.

◊ ⁽¹⁶⁾Enable the desired channels. You can enable channels by double-clicking on the applicable channel’s

“On” column, obtaining “On” indicating enabled or “Off” indicating disabled. You can also use a

pull-down list which appears for enable/disable. See Chapter 4 if more detail is needed.

Note:

Channels set up for your display will be automatically enabled. You can enable additional channels

for data acquisition. These additional channels will not appear on ChartView’s Main Window, but

data from them will still be acquired.

◊ ^{(17) Click on the “Enable SpreadSheet Reading” button (see previous figure). This activates the display}

scanned data in the reading column. Since we are in the Simulated Instrument mode, the Reading

column of the Analog Input SpreadSheet will now display simulated data. Selecting the Enable

SpreadSheet Reading button again will freeze the Reading column’s display.

4. Configure Acquisition.

◊ ^{(18) Click on the Acquisition Setup tab (see previous figure). An Acquisition Configuration dialog box}

appears. The box can be in either of two modes – (1) Normal, or (2) High-speed, single channel.

Note that you can also access the Acquisition Configuration dialog box from the Setup pull-down

menu or the Channel Configuration button (item 8, page 1-8).

The information entered in the Acquisition window is used by the Arm Acquisition command to set up

the acquisition of data to disk. When the trigger is satisfied, the scans are collected at the selected scan

frequency and stored to disk in the designated file.

1-14 ChartScan – Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial

ChartScan User’s Manual

Acquisition Dialog Box, Normal Mode

◊ ^{(19) Click “Okay” to exit the Acquisition dialog box. Note that we are using the Acquisition default settings,}

and the Data Destination default settings in this tutorial (as shown in the above figure).

Note: The following table provides a brief description of various acquisition setup parameters.

Acquisition Setup

Parameter

Options

Event Configuration

Trigger: Set a trigger scan in the Acquisition by using one of the following:

Keyboard - Use Console Trigger dialog box to start trigger scan.

Note: If the Keyboard Trigger is selected the use of Pre-trigger is disabled.

External TTL - Use an external signal to start the trigger scan.

Channel Value - Use specified value of a given channel.

Alarm - Use an Alarm value to start the trigger scan.

Absolute Time - Use a time of day to start the trigger scan.

Note: If Absolute Time is selected, the use of Auto Re-arm is disabled.

Stop:

Set a stop scan in the Acquisition by using one of the above selections or Count (as

specified below). Keyboard isn’t applicable. If a MultiScan or ChartScan is connected

and High-Speed Single-Channel (Burst Mode) is selected, then “Count from trigger” is

the only Stop available for the event configuration.

Count: Specify a number of scans to be read before a stop scan is set.

Acquisition Parameters

Scan Counts:

Specify the number of scans in an acquisition

Pre-trigger

Post Stop

Average weight: Average weight can be specified only when in the Normal Mode. The value for

the average weight determines the number of samples to be averaged when in

Normal Mode. Values of 1, 2, 4, and 8 are for high-speed multiple channel

applications for thermocouples and DC voltages where noise filtering is not an

issue.

Values of 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 are recommended for AC noise rejection.

Scan Intervals: Time between scans (frequency of scans)

Pre-trigger and Post Stop

Post-trigger

Use one Interval

High Speed Setup:

Allows for channel and scan rate entries for high-speed, single channel mode.

Note: These parameters cannot be altered while an acquisition is in progress.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartScan - Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1-15

5. Review Configuration.

Reviewing the configuration prior to data acquisition is optional; however, you should complete a

review at this time (in the tutorial) to help with your familiarization of ChartView. In an actual

application, a review such as this provides you with a chance to correct configuration errors.

◊ ⁽²⁰⁾Device Interface

Check the Interface and Status via the Device pull-down menu.

◊ ⁽²¹⁾Channel Configuration

Check channel and alarm configuration settings via the Channel Configuration Dialog Box. Access this box

through the Setup pull-down menu.

◊ ⁽²²⁾Acquisition Parameters

Check the acquisition parameters via the Acquisition Configuration Dialog Box. This box can be accessed

through the Setup pull-down menu.

◊ ⁽²³⁾Data File Parameters

Check Data File Parameters. These parameters can be set from the Data Destination Dialog Box (accessible from

the Setup pull-down menu), and from the Data File Parameters selection accessible from the Data pull-down

menu.

6. [Optional]. Save Configuration File.

Although the updated Chartvw.cvw file will automatically save upon Exit, there may be times when

you want to manually initiate a save. This will help you save time if an error occurs that may corrupt

your configuration. You may create a new configuration file by using an existing one and making the

necessary changes. In actual applications, use the File pull-down menu to manually save configuration

files, if this option is desired.

Note: The .cvw file contains all setup information. Setup information includes channel information, alarm

configurations, and acquisition configuration information.

7. [Optional]. Check the System Inventory and Device System Time.

Check the System Inventory and Device System Time via the Status selection from the Device pull-

down menu.

In an actual application, if the System Inventory and Device System Time configurations were

acceptable, you would proceed to Arm an Acquisition by clicking the Arm Acquisition button (item 10,

page 1-8), or by using the Arm Acquisition selection in the Acquire pull-down menu.

8. Start Charts.

◊ ^{(24) Push the Start Charts and Indicators button (item 2, page 1-8). Charts will begin scrolling. More}

detailed information pertaining to the charts and the ChartView Main Window appear in Chapter 4’s

ChartView Main Window section. In addition to viewing the data as charts, you can select the

Windows pull-down menu to select one or all of the following:

•

ChartView Analog Meters

ChartView Digital Meters

ChartView Bar Graph Meters

◊ ^{(25) Select the Windows pull-down menu and try each meter option. Push the triangular play button of each}

meter’s specific toolbar to activate that meter.

Meters and charts can be on your computer screen at the same time. They can be re-sized and

repositioned as desired. Analog, Digital, and Bar Graph meters are detailed in Chapter 4.

Note that a PostView Post Acquisition viewing program is also selectable from the Windows menu.

PostView is discussed in Chapter 5.

1-16 ChartScan – Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial

ChartScan User’s Manual

A Note In Closing.

This completes the tutorial. You may continue running ChartView in the simulated instrument mode

and try various options to get a better feel for the program. Remember, while in the simulated

instrument mode there are no ChartScan hardware concerns.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartScan - Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1-17

ChartScan User’s Manual

General Information

CAUTION

If equipment is used in any manner not specified in this manual, or if specification limits

are exceeded, the function of the equipment, as well as the protection provided by it, may

be impaired.

General Description……2-1

Operational Aspects……2-2

Data Handling and Triggering……2-2

Software and Hardware……2-2

ChartScan Specifications……2-3

General Description

ChartScan is an easy to use, advanced hybrid data recorder that combines the desirable features of common

paper-based strip-chart recorders with the latest PC-based data acquisition technology. In addition to chart

displays, ChartScan allows you to display digital, analog, and bar graph meters.

ChartScan requires no external signal conditioning or use of multiplexers. The unit can measure up to 64

differential input channels; and can easily be expanded up to 128 channels with the use of an expansion module.

ChartScan is well suited for temperature and voltage measurements requiring channel-to-channel isolation. This

isolation is made possible by the use of individual relays on each of the 64 channels. The unit provides 500 V

isolation for voltage inputs and 200 V isolation for thermocouples. The instrument scans at a rate of up to 147

channels per second and includes a single-channel burst mode for digitizing waveforms at rates up to 20 kHz.

Measurements include:

•

isolated temperature from thermocouples

DC volts

AC volts

waveforms

ChartScan includes ChartView, a software program which provides a Windows-based graphical-user-interface

approach to obtaining data collection and display; PostView, a post-acquisition data review program; and

ScanCal, a software application that automates instrument calibration.

Although ChartScan can acquire temperature readings at a rate of 147 channels/sec, you may also program the

unit to acquire data at specified time intervals using the hh:mm:ss.tformat. For the ultimate in flexibility, you

may also program separate pre-trigger and post-trigger sample rates. As an example, ChartScan can be

programmed to sample data once per hour and then sample once per second when channel 2 reaches 70°C.

An interface card can be plugged into ChartScan unit through a slot on the unit’s rear panel. When the only

interface desired is RS-232, no interface card is needed and the card interface port is shielded with a removable

protective cover.

Statistics such as High, Low, and Last are available for each channel for data reduction. In addition, up to

32 alarms may be programmed using the programmable high and low limits for each channel.

Optional software, shipped with separate documentation, includes the following:

CIMScan^is a HMI/SCADA application. A single screen can display data from [and control outputs of]

several acquisition devices connected through a network. With CIMScan, users can customized applications

accessing thousands of channels from network-connected devices. CIMScan does not require programming

knowledge.

ScanServer is a driver that permits access to multiple acquisition devices from popular HMI/SCADA

applications (including those from Wonderware^and Intellution^.) ScanServer supports OPC/DDE-compliant

environments, such as Microsoft Excel.

ChartScan User’s Manual 12-28-98

2-1

In addition to the features of ChartScan described thus far, the unit includes:

•

Thirty-two TTL (Transistor-to-Transistor Logic) digital alarm outputs and 8 TTL-compatible

digital inputs.

Two programmable scan rates: (1) a programmable scan rate for pre-trigger and post-trigger

sampling, and (2) a programmable scan rate for accelerated sampling on-event detection.

A built in real-time clock that synchronizes the acquisition to the time of day, and provides time

and date stamping for trend analysis. Time stamping may be in relative or absolute time.

Standard RS-232 interface and optional IEEE 488 interface. Connection to computer can also be

made via a Hayes-compatible modem.

256 Kbytes of memory, expandable up to 8 Mbytes. If your application must gather large amounts

of data, options are available for expanding the standard 256 kB of memory to 1 MB, 4 MB, or

8 MB. Readings may then be transferred at greater than 300 Kbytes per second over the IEEE 488

bus or up to 9,600 baud using its standard RS-232 serial port. Though the RS-232 serial interface

is always available with ChartScan, an interface card must be used for IEEE 488 applications.

•

Capable of channel expansion up to 128 channels with the use of a CSN/Exp expansion chassis.

Operational Aspects

Data Handling and Triggering

Note: Also see Software & Hardware table and ChartScan Specifications.

Data Handling

Built-in memory

RS-232 interface

Time & date stamping

Digital inputs

256 Kbyte

Programmable alarm

outputs

Triggering

Digital trigger input

Analog trigger input

Trigger on “time of day”

Pre-trigger scan rate

Post-trigger scan rate

Programmable

Software and Hardware

Software

ChartView

PostView

ScanCal

CIMScan

ScanServer

(optional)

2-2 General Information

ChartScan User’s Manual

16-Channel Signal Conditioning Cards (Optional)

(CSN14/LV/T)

(CSN14/LV/B)

(CSN14/LV/S)

(CSN14/TC/P)

(CSN14/HV/S)

Low-voltage with removable

terminal block input module

Low-voltage with BNC input

module

Low-voltage with safety jack

input module

Isolated TC/voltage with

plug type input module

Isolated high-voltage with

safety jack input module

Cables

CA-7-3, Shielded IEEE 488 cable, 6 ft.

CA-47, Computer-to-ChartScan Cable

PC/AT/XT serial port (9- & 25-pin sub D) to ChartScan (9-pin sub D)

RS-232/422 cable, 6 ft.

Note: A 10BASE-T cable and 10BASE-T crossover adapter are included

with the optional Net232 Ethernet/RS-232 converter.

Additional Hardware Options

4-slot expansion chassis

Memory expansion options:

1 Mbyte, 4 Mbyte, or 8 Mbyte

IEEE 488 interface card (see important notice, below)

16 output CSN/Relay card

Net232, Ethernet/RS-232 Converter

An IOtech Personal488 product is required for

IEEE 488 operation with ChartView. A device

named WAVE must be configured in IOtech

Driver 488/W31, /W95, or /WNT (when available).

ChartScan Specifications

CAUTION

If equipment is used in any manner not specified in this manual, or if specification limits

are exceeded, the function of the equipment, as well as the protection provided by it,

may be impaired.

NOTE: Specifications for signal conditioning cards and for the ChartScan Expansion Chassis appear in their

respective sections of this manual.

Measurement Parameters

A/D resolution

Accuracy (with type J TC)

TCs supported

DCV

16 bit w/over sampling

± 0.5°C

J,K,T,E,R,S,B,N

ACV

Ch-to-ch isolation

Ch-to-system isolation

AC line rejection

500 V or 200 V

500 V

Scanning Parameters

Switching Technology

Max scan rate

mechanical relays

147 chs. per sec.

20 Khz

Max single-ch scan rate

Min channel configuration

Max channel configuration

16 channels

128 channels

General Information

ChartScan User’s Manual 2-3

General

Installation Category:

•

CE: Category 2 for Line Voltage Input terminal.

All other terminals are Category 1.

Warm Up:

•

1 hour to rated accuracy.

Expansion Connector:

•

40-conductor connector for connecting expansion chassis via ribbon cable.

ChartScan’s expansion connector (PH401) is located on the analog backplane.

Chassis Ground Connection:

Screw terminal.

Dimensions:

•

330 mm wide × 241 mm deep × 152 mm high (13” × 9.5” × 6”).

Weight:

•

≈ 6.75 kg (15 lbs.) with 4 signal conditioning cards installed

Operating Environment:

•

Standard: Indoor use, 0 to 50°C;

0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) to

35°C; linearly derate 3% RH/°C

from 35 to 50°C.

•

CE: Indoor use at altitudes below 2000 m,

5 to 40°C; 0 to 80% RH up to 31°C

decreasing linearly to 50% RH at 40°C.

Control:

•

Power Switch, RS-232 or IEEE 488 option, handshake, parity, baud rate,

calibration memory write enable/disable.

Rear Panel LED Indicators:

•

ALARM, TRIGGER and SCAN; SEND and RECEIVE (for standard serial

interface); ERROR and POWER.

•

TALK, LISTEN and SRQ (on optional IEEE 488 interface card)

Power:

105-125V, or 210-250V, 50/60 Hz; 20 VA maximum. Set via internal,

two-position slide switch.

Transient Overvoltage according to Installation Categories:

•

Overvoltage Category II for mains supply. The minimum and normal

category is II.

Pollution Degree:

I − in accordance with IEC 664

•

Channels

Number of Option Card Slots:

•

Number of Channels:

•

up to 64 channels, expandable to 128 with ChartScan expansion chassis

16 channels per card

up to 4 cards installed in ChartScan

(up to 4 additional cards with use of ChartScan expansion chassis)

Channel Attributes:

High and low set points; hysteresis values for high and low set points.

Scan Sequence:

Any combination of temperature and voltage channels may be scanned, but

channels are scanned in ascending numerical order.

Scan Interval:

Absolute time between scans (hh:mm:ss.t); min = 00:00:00.0,

•

max = 99:59:59.9. Note: Specifying a value of 00:00:00.0 results in no delay

between channel scans.

2-4 General Information

ChartScan User’s Manual

Triggers

Installation Category:

•

CE: Category 1

Programmable Triggering:

•

Temperature or Voltage level (above or below), absolute time of day, alarm

condition (on or off), IEEE GET, IEEE TALK, external TTL trigger (rising or

falling), specified number of readings.

Temperature-Level Trigger:

Programmable value for any one channel. Not available in Burst mode.

•

TTL Trigger:

•

Programmable for rising or falling edges.

Pre-Trigger Count and Post-Trigger Count:

•

Programmable integer (< memory size -1); and programmable integer..

Digital Filtering:

•

Average 16 samples at 50/60 Hz for line cycle noise.

TC Reference:

•

TC reference tables based on the IPTS-68 standard as listed with the US

Department of Commerce (NTIS). International Electrotechnical

Commission (IEC) 43 760.

Trigger Input Connector:

Trigger Output Connector:

External BNC connector

Data Storage & Format

Storage:

•

128 K reading (256 Kbyte) standard; optional 500 K reading (1 Mbyte), 2 M

reading (4 Mbyte), 4 M reading (8 Mbyte).

Data Formats:

ASCII and binary; binary format returns a 16-bit compensated and linearized

•

temperature value (0.1°C/bit); user-programmable for hi/low byte or low/hi

byte. Note: High speed DMA transfers are binary format only.

Statistical Parameters:

•

High, Low, and Last available per channel (during acquisition only). Not

available in single channel burst mode.

Time Stamp:

Available for each scan group and for each channel’s high, low, and last

parameters.

Time Format:

Relative time (hh:mm:ss.mil), absolute time (hh:mm:ss.mil) or absolute

•

date and time (dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss.mil). Not available in single channel

burst mode.

Alarm Stamp:

•

Available for each scan group. Not available in single channel burst mode.

General Information

ChartScan User’s Manual 2-5

Digital I/O Interface & Alarms

Installation Category:

•

CE: Category 1

Number of Digital Inputs:

8 bits, LS-TTL compatible.

Number of Digital Outputs:

•

32 bits, TTL level compatible. Can be programmed as alarms.

Note: The 32 TTL outputs can be set or cleared via program control.

Alarm Conditions:

May be detected by SRQor by software query (SPOLLor Ucommand).

Alarm Update Rate:

Alarms are updated whenever a channel assigned to an alarm is measured.

Connector:

Female DB50 50-pin (32 Alarms, 8 digital inputs, 10 ground pins), mating

connector supplied.

•

Note: See chapter 3 for information regarding External TTL BNC Connectors.

WARNING

Service must be performed by qualified personnel. All electrical connections to device,

including the AC line and analog inputs, must be disconnected prior to opening ChartScan

main unit or expansion chassis casing. Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause

bodily injury or death!

WARNING

ChartScan’s ground (on the AC power connector) must be connected to an external earth

ground. Failure to make such a connection could present an electric shock hazard, causing

bodily injury or death!

Fuse:

1/2A, 250V, Slo Blo, 3AG for 100-140V power line, or

1/4A, 250V, Slo Blo, 3AG for 200-240V power line

CAUTION

Fuse failure indicates a possible problem within the device circuitry. If a fuse blows, contact

a qualified service representative. Replacement fuses are to be installed by qualified service

personnel with the unit disconnected from the power source and with all other terminals

disconnected. If the line voltage selector is changed, then the fuse designated for that line

voltage must be used.

2-6 General Information

ChartScan User’s Manual

Calibration

Calibration must be completed periodically to ensure equipment is accurate, and

can be performed manually, or with the use of ScanCal. Chapter 6 contains

instructions, including calibration equipment requirements, for the following:

ChartScan main unit calibration for offset and gain

Offset calibration for all card types

Gain calibration for low volts cards

Gain calibration for high volts cards

Cold junction calibration for TC cards

Note: ChartScan main unit constants are stored in NV-RAM.

Signal Conditioning Card constants stored in each card’s EEPROM.

Note: Industry standard calibration period is once every year.

General Information

ChartScan User’s Manual 2-7

−

Notes

2-8 General Information

ChartScan User’s Manual

Hardware

Overview ……3-1

Front Panel ……3-1

Rear Panel ……3-2

External TTL BNC Connectors ……3-14

Signal Conditioning Cards ……3-14

CSN14/TC/P Thermocouple and Low Volts Card

with Subminiature Plugs ……3-15

Power Aspects ……3-3

CSN14/LV/ (T, B, & S) Low Voltage Cards ……3-17

CSN14/HV/S High Voltage Card with Safety Jack

Connectors ……3-18

Changing the Voltage Setting ……3-3

Replacing the AC Power Supply Fuse ……3-4

Memory Configuration ……3-4

CSN/Relay Card (for High-Current Digital-

Output) ……3-19

Expanded Memory Options ……3-4

Calibration Memory Write Enable/Disable ……3-6

CSN/Relay Card Specifications ……3-20

RS-232/422 Interface Configuration ……3-6

Configuring RS-322/422 Parameters …… 3-6

Serial Port Pin Connectors ……3-8

Expansion Chassis, CSN/Exp (Option) ……3-20

Connecting the Expansion Chassis ……3-20

Automatic Channel Assignment ……3-22

Ethernet Interface Configuration ……3-9

IEEE 488 Configuration (Option) ……3-11

Digital I/O Lines ……3-13

Logic Levels ……3-13

Digital I/O Port Pinout ……3-13

Overview

This section provides information regarding ChartScan hardware. The chapter begins with brief discussions and

illustrations regarding the unit’s front and rear panels. The text is divided into sub-sections which include material

on voltage settings, fuse replacement, memory expansion, and serial interface configuration (RS-232/422). Ethernet

configuration is detailed in the Net232 User’s Guide, p/n 1037-0901.

Additional hardware-related topics are included, such as signal conditioning cards and the optional ChartScan

Expansion Chassis.

Front Panel

ChartScan’s front panel reveals up to four sets of connectors, one set for each signal-conditioning card used. The

front panel contains no switches or other types of control. Each connector row is dependent upon the type of signal

conditioning card used. With different combinations of cards, a variety of setups is possible.

ChartScan Front Panel, One of Many Possible Set-ups

ChartScan User’s Manual, ^12-28-98

3-1

Rear Panel

ChartScan’s rear panel contains several items, including a set of LEDs for status indication. The LED indicators are

described in the following table. Other rear panel items are listed in a separate table following the illustration.

LED Indicators, Chassis

ALARM

ON when an alarm has occurred. The indicator remains ON until the alarm condition clears.

OFF when no alarm condition exists.

TRIGGER

Flashes when ARMed (waiting for a trigger), is ON continuous when triggered; is OFF when

data collection is finished. Trigger is also turned OFF by IEEE DCL or SDC.

ON when ChartScan is storing a channel scan in its internal buffer.

ON when transmitting data to the serial interface (for RS-232 operation only).

ON when receiving data from the controlling computer (for RS-232 operation only).

ON when an error has occurred, OFF when no error condition exists. See the Error Query (E?)

command for more information.

SCAN

SEND

RECEIVE

ERROR

POWER

ON when power is applied to ChartScan and the power switch on the back panel is in the ON

position (depressed). OFF if power is not present.

ChartScan Rear Panel

Item

Description

Provides a means for connecting ChartScan to one of two voltage supplies:

105 - 125V, or 210 - 250V. The connected power supply must agree with that selected by

ChartScan’s internal slide switch (described later in this chapter).

Turns power ON or OFF.

A single point grounding node for, but not limited to, thermocouple shield termination.

Pushbutton used to enable/disable the hardware protected portion of NVRAM during ChartScan

main unit calibration. Note that this pushbutton does not exist on early production units.

Early production units use micro-switch #9 (on the DIP switch) instead of a calibration

pushbutton.

Power

Connector

Power Switch

Chassis Ground

Calibration

Enable/Disable

Refer to Chapter 6 for detailed information regarding calibration.

BNC Trigger input for initiating and/or stopping acquisition with TTL input signal

BNC TTL Scan output signal occurs for each channel scan; used for synchronizing other

equipment with ChartScan acquisition.

Trigger In

TTL Output

DB50 connector offers easy access to Alarms and Digital I/O (32 digital outputs and 8 digital

inputs)

Alarms & Digital I/O

(DB50) Connector

RS-232/422 (DB9)

Connector

Serial port for operation at remote distances from controlling computer. Supports various baud

rates using RTS/CTS or XON/XOFF handshaking. When ChartScan is configured for

RS-232 serial communications, this port can be used to connect ChartScan to a Net232

ethernet/RS-232 converter for ethernet operations. Refer to the Net232 User’s Guide for

ethernet-related information.

Used for selecting RS-232 or RS-422 and respective communication parameters, i.e.,

handshaking, parity and Baud Rate. Also allows for section of IEEE 488 and address

settings. An IEEE 488 interface card is required for IEEE 488 operations.

For installing the optional IEEE 488 interface card. Note that RS-232 serial interface is the

default and is possible with or without an interface card.

DIP Switch

Interface Card Slot

LED Indicators

See previous table, LED Indicators, Chassis.

3-2

ChartScan User’s Manual

Power Aspects

Changing the Voltage Setting

Based on your order, your ChartScan system was set at the voltage indicated by a sticker or tag (located on the rear

of the unit, near the power switch). If you need to change the voltage selection, complete the following steps.

WARNING

Never disassemble ChartScan’s case while it is connected to the AC power line! Internal

voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death!

Prior to disassembly:

(1) turn off power

(2) disconnect analog lines

(3) disconnect AC power line

(4) disconnect all additional lines

WARNING

Never disconnect the AC power line from ChartScan while analog connections to an

external device exist! Common mode voltage potentials exceeding 60 VDC or 30 Vrms may

exist which could cause bodily injury or death!

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,

when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause

equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

1. Ensure the ChartScan is not connected to any power source.

2. Remove two upper side screws (near front of unit, and on side of unit) and slide top cover plate free of

ChartScan unit.

3. Locate the two-position slide on the power supply board. You will notice the switch above the AC

power inlet. The number visible (115 or 230) indicates the selected power setting.

4. As indicated in the figure, press down on the switch to change the setting from 115VAC to 230VAC;

or, to change the setting from 230 to 115VAC, you press up on the switch.

5. Replace ChartScan’s cover plate and secure with screws.

6. Add a new sticker, or tag, stating the newly selected voltage.

Hardware

3-3

Replacing the AC Power Supply Fuse

Fuse: 1/2A, 250V, Slo Blo, 3AG for 105-125V power line, or

1/4A, 250V, Slo Blo, 3AG for 210-250V power line

CAUTION

Fuse failure indicates a possible problem within the device circuitry. If a fuse blows, contact

a qualified service representative. Replacement fuses are to be installed by qualified service

personnel with the unit disconnected from the power source and with all other terminals

disconnected. If the line voltage selector is changed, then the fuse designated for that line

voltage must be used.

Replace the AC power supply fuse as follows:

1. Turn ChartScan’s power to “OFF.”

2. Open the fuse drawer on the rear panel.

3. Remove the fuse.

4. Ensure correct rating of replacement fuse.

5. Install replacement fuse.

6. If you changed the value of the fuse due to a new voltage selection, replace the spare fuse with a fuse of

the new value.

7. Close the fuse drawer until it snaps into place.

Memory Configuration

Memory configuration of ChartScan consists of installing expanded memory boards (optional), and selecting write-

enable or write-disable for calibration memory.

Expanded Memory Options

ChartScan can accommodate up to 8 MBytes of memory, which is ideal for both high-speed and long-term data

logging. Measurements can be stored in memory and read out by a controlling computer as time permits.

ChartScan provides three options for expanding the standard 256 KB of memory to 1 MB (CSN/MEM1),

4 MB (CSN/MEM4), or 8 MB (CSN/MEM8). To install a memory option into the unit, perform the following steps:

3-4

ChartScan User’s Manual

WARNING

Never disassemble ChartScan’s case while it is connected to the AC power line! Internal

voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death!

Prior to disassembly:

(1) turn off power

(2) disconnect analog lines

(3) disconnect AC power line

(4) disconnect all additional lines

WARNING

Never disconnect the AC power line from ChartScan while analog connections to an

external device exist! Common mode voltage potentials exceeding 60 VDC or 30 Vrms may

exist which could cause bodily injury or death!

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,

when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause

equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

1. Turn off the power, disconnect the analog cables, the power line cord, and then all other test cables from the

interface.

2. Remove two upper side screws (near front of unit) and slide top cover plate free of ChartScan unit. Remove the

expansion chassis, if applicable.

3. Locate memory SIMM sockets JP201 and JP202 on the microprocessor board. This board is mounted vertically

near the center of the ChartScan unit.

4. Remove the 256 KB module from JP201.

5. Install the applicable memory option according to the following table.

Memory Option

JP201

JP202

CSN/MEM1 (1 MB)

CSN/MEM4 (4 MB)

CSN/MEM8 (8 MB)

Insert a 1 MB module.

Insert a 4 MB module.

Remains unoccupied.

Insert a 4 MB module.

Note: For re-assembly, first reconnect the AC power line, next reconnect the analog terminals, and then any

other cables, prior to reapplying power to the entire system.

6. Carefully reassemble the ChartScan unit.

Hardware

3-5

Calibration Memory Write Enable/Disable

ChartScan’s constants for chassis calibration and the calibration password are stored by ChartScan in Non-Volatile

RAM (NV-RAM). The password is a safety feature used to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering

calibration mode and altering the calibration constants.

As a safeguard, the calibration password and chassis calibration constants are hardware protected by use of a

Calibration Enable/Disable switch (pushbutton, or micro-switch, as described in the following notices).

Calibration mode disabled is the factory default setting. This setting should not be changed, unless you want to

change the password or chassis calibration constants.

CAUTION

Ensure calibration mode is “disabled” during normal ChartScan operation. Otherwise, the

calibration password and calibration constants may become corrupt and normal operation may

be disrupted.

Standard ChartScan units have a Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton.

If it is necessary to change the calibration password (via the *K command) or to calibrate the

chassis, the calibration mode can be enabled by indenting the pushbutton. For details on

calibration, refer to Chapter 6, ChartScan Calibration.

Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton. These

units enable and disable the calibration mode using micro-switch number 9 (on the DIP switch).

If it is necessary to change the calibration password (via the *K command) or to calibrate the

chassis, the calibration mode can be enabled by setting micro-switch 9 to the “up” (1 position).

For details on calibration, refer to Chapter 6, ChartScan Calibration.

RS-232/422 Interface Configurations

Configuring RS-232/422 Parameters

CAUTION

The RS-232/422 interface is only to be used for serial communications. Cable length should not

exceed 50 feet (15 meters).

•

The DIP switch is only read when power is first applied to ChartScan, and for that reason

must be set before applying power to the unit.

RS-232 configuration is required when using a Net232 ethernet/RS-232 converter.

Note: Unless an interface option is used, ChartScan’s serial port operation will be with RS-232 electrical

characteristics. For serial port use, ChartScan’s rear panel DIP switch settings determine the baud rate, stop

bits, parity, and handshake.

Use the following steps when you desire to change RS-232/RS-422 serial port parameters. Note that there are

separate steps for early production units.

3-6

ChartScan User’s Manual

Steps for RS-232/422 Configuration

Early Production Units, Only

Standard Units, Only

1. Turn the ChartScan system’s power “OFF.”

2. Ensure the COMM SELECT micro-switch (on the

rear-panel DIP switch) is in the “0” (down)

position.

2. Ensure the COMM SELECT micro-switch (on the

rear-panel DIP switch) is in the “1” (up) position.

3. Adjust micro-switches 2 through 9 (for parameter

preferences), according to the following table for

standard units.

3. Adjust micro-switches 2 through 8 (for parameter

preferences), according to the following table for

early production units.

Note: Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton. If you have an

early production unit, refer to the right-hand DIP switch illustration, above.

RS-232/422 Serial Settings (Standard Units)

RS-232/422 Serial Settings (Early Production Units)

Selection

Micro-

Switch

Setting

Selection

Micro-

Switch

Setting

COMM

SELECT

0 – Serial Communication; RS-232 or

RS-422 depending on switch 9.

1- Selects IEEE 488.

COMM

SELECT

0- selects IEEE 488 interface card.

1- Selects RS-232/422.

HANDSHAKE

(H/S)

2,3

0, 0- No Handshake

0, 1- Software Handshake Only¹

(XON/XOFF)

HANDSHAKE

(H/S)

2,3

0, 0- No Handshake

0, 1- Software Handshake Only¹

(XON/XOFF)

1, 0- Hardware Handshake Only

(RTS/CTS)

1, 0- Hardware Handshake Only

(RTS/CTS)

1, 1- Both Hardware and Software

Handshake

1, 1- Both Hardware and Software

Handshake

PARITY

4,5

0, 0 - No Parity

0, 1- Odd Parity

1, 0- Even Parity

1, 1- N/A

PARITY

4,5

0, 0 - No Parity

0, 1- Odd Parity

1, 0- Even Parity

1, 1- N/A

SERIAL

6,7,8

0,0,0- 300 Baud

0,0,1- 600 Baud

0,1,0- 1200 Baud

0,1,1- 2400 Baud

1,0,0- 4800 Baud

1,0,1- 9600 Baud³

1,1,0- 19200 Baud³

1,1,1- N/A

SERIAL

6,7,8

0,0,0- 300 Baud

0,0,1- 600 Baud

0,1,0- 1200 Baud

0,1,1- 2400 Baud

1,0,0- 4800 Baud

1,0,1- 9600 Baud³

1,1,0- 19200 Baud^2,3

1,1,1- N/A

BAUD RATE²

RS-232 or

RS-422

0- Selects RS-232 serial*

1- Selects RS-422 serial*

* (switch #1 must be in the “0” position)

CALIBRATION

MODE

0- Calibration Mode Disabled

1- Calibration Mode Enabled

(normal position is “0”)

¹ChartView software will not run when Handshake is set for “Software Handshake Only,” (0, 1).

²It is recommended that you do not exceed 9600 Baud unless you have firmware version 1.3 or greater. The firmware version can be read in

ChartView’s title bar.

³At 9600 and 19200 Baud Rates, Hardware Handshake should be set to “Hardware Handshake Only” (1, 0). We recommend that you do not

exceed 9600 Baud unless you have firmware version 1.3 or greater. The firmware version can be read in ChartView’s title bar.

Hardware

3-7

Serial Port Pin Connectors

An optional CA-47 cable (or equivalent) connects ChartScan to the computer. The ChartScan side of the cable has a

male DB9 connector for use with the RS-232/422 serial port. The cable’s computer side has 2 connectors: one for

DB9, and the other for DB25. Other crossover-type cables can be used if wired as shown in the figure. The

following table lists the RS-232 and RS-422 pin connections for a DB9.

Pin #

RS-232

Signal

Pin Description

Computer

DB25

NetScan

DB9

Computer

DB9

NetScan

DB9

No connection

Receive Data (RxD-)

N/A

Input

DB25

DB9

2 3

TXD 2

RXD 3

CTS 5

GND 7

RTS 4

2 RXD

3 TXD

5 GND

7 RTS

8 CTS

RXD 2

TXD 3

GND 5

RTS 7

CTS 8

2 RXD

3 TXD

5 GND

7 RTS

2 3 4

Transmit Data (TxD-)

Output

No connection

Ground

No connection

Request to send (RTS-)

N/A

Ground

N/A

7 8

8 CTS

Interface Wiring Diagram

Output

Clear to send (CTS-)

No connection

Input

N/A

ChartScan to PC Connection (RS-232)

DB9 Male

Cable

Wiring

DB9 Female

Pin & Signal

RxD-

TxD-

GND

RTS-

CTS-

TxD-

RxD-

GND

CTS-

RTS-

⇐

⇒

⇔

⇒

⇐

ChartScan Connection (RS-422)

DB9 Male

Cable Wiring

Pin & Signal

RxD+

RxD-

TxD-

TxD+

GND

RTS+

RTS-

CTS-

CTS+

⇐

⇒

⇔

⇒

⇐

3-8

ChartScan User’s Manual

Serial Port Pin Connector Signals for RS-232/422 Applications

RxD- (Receive Data Negative) Input: This pin accepts serial data sent by an RS-232 or RS-422 device. The serial data

received is expected to match the word length, baud rate, stop bits, and parity configuration of the particular port. The signal is

low true.

RxD+ (Receive Data Positive) Input: This pin accepts serial data sent by an RS-422 device only. The signal is high true.

TxD- (Transmit Data Negative) Output: This pin transmits serial data to an RS-232 or RS-422 device. The serial data

received is sent with the word length, baud rate, stop bits, and parity configured for the particular port. The signal is low true.

TxD+ (Transmit Data Positive) Output: This pin transmits serial data to an RS-422 device only. The signal is high true.

CTS- (Clear To Send Negative) Input: CTS- input is used as a hardware handshake line to prevent ChartScan from

transmitting serial data to an RS-232 or RS-422 device when it is not able to accept it. When RTS/CTS handshaking is selected,

ChartScan will not transmit data out TxD- while this signal is un-asserted (low). If XON/XOFF or no handshaking is selected,

the CTS- line is ignored when transmitting data. The signal is low true.

CTS+ (Clear To Send Positive) Input: CTS+ input is used as a hardware handshake line to prevent ChartScan from

transmitting serial data to an RS-422 device when it is not able to accept it. The signal is high true.

RTS- (Request To Send Negative) Output: RTS- output is used as a hardware handshake line to prevent an RS-232 or RS-422

device from transmitting serial data to ChartScan when it is not able to accept it. When automatic RTS/CTS handshaking is

selected, ChartScan will assert (high) the RTS- signal when greater than 4096 memory locations are available in its internal

buffers. If available memory drops below 4096 bytes, ChartScan unasserts (low) the RTS- signal. The signal is low true.

RTS+ (Request To Send Positive) Output: RTS+ output is used as a hardware handshake line for an RS-422 device. The

signal is high true.

GND (Ground): This signal sets the ground reference point for the other RS-232/RS-422 input and output signals.

Ethernet Interface Configuration

Your ChartScan unit can be operated over the ethernet provided it is configured for RS-232 serial communications

and it is properly connected to a network via a Net232 ethernet/RS-232 converter. For detailed instructions refer to

Net232 User’s Guide, part number 1037-0901.

Hardware

3-9

IEEE 488 Interface Configuration (Option)

The IEEE 488 interface option is intended for digital communication with IEEE 488 compliant computer platforms,

as well as IEEE 488 compliant platform-independent configurations. Data is transmitted parallel, as opposed to

serial. The IEEE 488 option allows for up to 15 devices to be connected to one bus; with a total bus length of up to

20 meters. Allowable cable distance between devices is up to 2 meters. Message transactions are hardware

handshaked.

This section describes the configuration for ChartScan that will be commanded through the IEEE 488 bus when

using ChartScan’s IEEE 488 interface option. To use this option, an IEEE 488 interface card must be installed in

ChartScan’s interface slot and the rear panel DIP switch must be properly configured for IEEE 488. Note that all

IEEE 488 bus devices, including ChartScan (when the IEEE 488 interface option is used) must have an IEEE 488

bus address. The micro-switches 4 through 8 (on the rear panel DIP switch) can be used to assign an IEEE 488

address. Switch setting are discussed in, IEEE 488 Configuration, presented shortly.

IEEE 488 Pinout

Eight lines (D1 through D8) used to transfer data and commands between devices on the bus.

Data Lines

Used to handshake the transfer of information across the data lines.

DAV: Data Valid

Handshake Lines

DAV

NDAC: Not Data Accepted

NDAC

NRFD: Not Ready for Data

NRFD

Five bus management lines are used to control bus activities.

Bus Management

Lines

ATN

IFC

ATN: Attention

IFC: Interface Clear

REN: Remote Enable

SRQ: Service Request

EOI: End or Identity

REN

SRQ

EOI

Eight ground lines used as follows: one for shield, one for general signal ground, and six logic

ground lines (one for each of the following: DAV, NDAC, NRFD, ATN, IFC, and SRQ).

Ground Lines

Specifications

Compliance Note:

The IEEE 488 interface card is compliant with IEEE 488.2 specifications.

Installation Category:

CE: Category 1

Implementation:

SH1, AH1, T6, TE4, L4, LE4, SR1, PP0, RL0, DC1, DT1, C0, E1

Programmable Parameters:

•

Alarm set points, thermocouple type, temperature units, trigger level, pre-trigger and post-trigger scan interval,

trigger mode, SRQ mask, scan count, pre-trigger count, digital input, digital output, real time settings, data

output format, and terminators.

Data Transfer Speed:

Up to 1Mbyte/s

Connector:

Standard IEEE 488 connector with metric studs

•

3-10

ChartScan User’s Manual

IEEE 488 Configuration

WARNING

Never remove or install an interface card while ChartScan/1400 is connected to the AC

power line! Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death!

WARNING

Never disconnect the AC power line from ChartScan/1400 while its analog lines are

connected to an external device! Common mode voltage potentials exceeding 60 VDC or

30 Vrms may exist which could cause bodily injury or death!

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,

when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause

equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

In order to use the IEEE 488 bus address, you must first turn off the ChartScan unit and install the optional IEEE 488

Interface Card. Also note that on ChartScan’s rear panel DIP switch, the COMM SELECT micro-switch (switch 1)

must be in the down (“0” position) to select the interface card option. The IEEE 488 Bus Address settings are then

made using the DIP switch on ChartScan’s rear panel.

Note: When using ChartView with IEEE 488 applications, you must make use of an

IOtech Driver 488/W31, /W95, W98, or /WNT when made available. In addition, the device

must be configured in the Driver 488 and be named WAVE.

The bus address can be set from 0 through 30 and is read only at power on or reset. The address is selected by

simple binary weighting. The switch labeled IEEE Address “1” (micro-switch number 8) is the least significant bit;

16 (micro-switch 4) is the most significant bit. The following figure shows an example IEEE 488 bus address setting

of 7.

Note: If address 31 is selected, the address defaults to 30 because the IEEE 488 standard has reserved the IEEE

Address 31.

Note: The DIP switch is only read when power is first applied to ChartScan, and for that reason must be set before

applying power to the unit.

Hardware

3-11

IEEE 488 Configuration Settings

Early Production Units, Only

Standard Units, Only

1. Ensure IEEE 488 Interface is installed.

2. Turn the ChartScan system’s power “OFF.”

1. Ensure IEEE 488 Interface is installed.

2. Turn the ChartScan system’s power “OFF.”

3. Ensure the COMM SELECT micro-switch (on the

rear-panel DIP switch) is in the “1” (up) position.

This selects IEEE 488.

3. Ensure the COMM SELECT micro-switch (on the

rear-panel DIP switch) is in the “0” (down) position.

This selects IEEE 488.

4. Adjust micro-switches 4 through 8 (for address

4. Adjust micro-switches 4 through 8 (for parameter

preferences), see following table for early production

units.

setting), see following table for standard units.

Note: Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton. If you have an

early production unit, refer to the right-hand DIP switch illustration, above.

IEEE 488 Settings (Standard Units)

IEEE 488 Settings (Early Production Units)

Selection

Micro-

Switch

Setting

Selection

Micro-

Switch

Setting

COMM

SELECT

0 – Serial Communication; RS-232 or

RS-422 depending on switch 9.

1- Selects IEEE 488.

COMM

SELECT

0- selects IEEE 488 interface card.

1- Selects RS-232/422.

HANDSHAKE

(H/S)

2,3

4,5

No effect when switch 1 is set to “1”.

HANDSHAKE

(H/S)

2,3

4,5

No effect when switch 1 is set to “0”.

IEEE 488

0, 0 - 0

IEEE 488

0, 0 - 0

ADDRESS

0, 1-

ADDRESS

0, 1-

Decimal Values

1, 0- 16

1, 1- 24

Decimal Values

1, 0- 16

1, 1- 24

6,7,8

0,0,0- 0

0,0,1- 1

0,1,0- 2

0,1,1- 3

1,0,0- 4

1,0,1- 5

1,1,0- 6

1,1,1- 7

6,7,8

0,0,0- 0

0,0,1- 1

0,1,0- 2

0,1,1- 3

1,0,0- 4

1,0,1- 5

1,1,0- 6

1,1,1- 7

RS-232 or

RS-422

No effect when switch 1 is set to “1”.

CALIBRATION

MODE

0- Calibration Mode Disabled

1- Calibration Mode Enabled (normal

position is “0” disabled)

3-12

ChartScan User’s Manual

Digital I/O Lines

ChartScan has eight digital input lines and thirty-two digital output lines available on a rear panel DB-50 connector.

These lines can be output and/or input using ChartScan commands.

Note: The first 16 output lines are available for use with relays via the high current CSN/Relay card option. If

used, the relay card must be installed in slot 1 (bottom slot) of the ChartScan main unit. The CSN/Relay

card is discussed at the end of this chapter.

Logic Levels

Each digital output line will drive five (5) standard TTL loads. All digital input lines are one-eighth (0.125) TTL

loads. All inputs are protected against damage from high static voltage. Normal precautions should be taken to limit

the input voltages to the range of 0.0 to 5.3 volts. All digital I/O lines are referenced to digital ground pins (see

following table, DB50 Pinout).

CAUTION

Do not exceed the 0.0 to 5.3 volt levels described above. Exceeding these levels may

damaged the unit in a way not covered by the warranty.

Digital I/O Port Pinout

The following figure and table identify pin locations for outputs, inputs, and grounds associated with the DB50

connector. Outputs 1 through 32 are typically used for alarms 1 through 32, respectively. As mentioned above,

outputs 1 through 16 can be used with a relay card option.

DB50 Pin Descriptions

Output

Signal

No.

Output

Signal

No.

Input

Signal

Pin No.

Ground Pins

12, 13, 14,

28, 29, 30, 31,

45, 46, 47

Hardware

3-13

External TTL BNC Connectors

ChartScan’s rear panel provides two external trigger BNC connectors. The BNC TTL Scan output is used for

synchronizing equipment with ChartScan. ChartScan can be programmed to trigger on a rising or falling TTL level.

Any TTL level signal (> 2.2V = Hi, < 0.8V = Lo) may be used as a trigger pulse. A trigger pulse may also be used

to generate a Service Request. Note that the TTL Out is a LS-TTL compatible output, 0.4 mA sourcing, 8 mA

sinking. When a scan is logged into the acquisition buffer (after the actual scan), the TTL output signal is pulsed for

100 ms. Refer to the following trigger timing diagram.

Signal Conditioning Cards

ChartScan and its expansion chassis can each house a quantity of 4 signal conditioning cards (8 total, for a possible

128 channels). The signal conditioning cards can be varied using any combination of the following 5 types.

•

CSN/14/TC/P

CSN/14/LV/T

CSN/14/LV/B

CSN/14/LV/S

Thermocouple and low volts card for units with subminiature-plugs

Low volts card with removable screw terminals

Low volts card with BNCs

Low volts card with safety jacks

CSN/14/HV/S High volts card with safety jacks

Each scanning module fits into the metal, shielded chassis. The chassis insulates the cards from noise and maintains

a constant internal temperature.

3-14

ChartScan User’s Manual

CSN14/TC/P Thermocouple and Low Volts Card with Subminiature Plugs

The CSN14/TC/P card contains 16 differential input channels, each of which may be configured as any

thermocouple type or as a milli-volt input. Temperature values may be returned in units of °C, °F, °K, °R, or mV.

This signal conditioning card contains “subminiature plug type” connectors. There are no user configuration switches

or jumpers on the CSN14/TC/P card.

Number of Channels:

•

16 differential; programmable by channel for specific thermocouple type or voltage.

Input Types:

•

J, K, T, E, R, S, B, N; and ±10V, ±5V, ±1V, ±100mV

Input Connector:

•

Subminiature-plug

Temperature Range, Accuracy, and Resolution¹

•

Type J:

Type K:

Type T:

Type E:

-100° to +760°C

-200° to -100°C

-100° to +1372°C

-200°C to -100°C

-100° to +400°C

-200° to -100°C

-100° to +1000°C

-200°C to -100°C

0.0° to +1780°C

+350° to +1820°C

-100° to +1300°C

-200° to -100°C

0.5°C

± 0.8°C

0.6°C

0.10°C

0.20°C

0.10°C

0.20°C

0.15°C

0.25°C

0.10°C

0.20°C

0.40°C

0.50°C

0.15°C

0.20°C

± 0.8°C

0.5°C

± 0.8°C

0.7°C

0.9°C

•

Type R:

Type S:

Type B:

Type N:

2.0°C

0.6°C

± 0.9°C

Temperature Units:

°C, °F, °K, °R, mV and volts.

Fault Detection:

Open T/C may be detected by a software query.

Cold Junction Sensors:

One for every 4 input channels.

Input Impedance and Input Bias Current:

1M Ohm typical; and 20 nA maximum

Maximum Common Mode Voltage⁴:

200 VAC, or 200 VDC peak

Maximum Normal Mode Voltage:

10 VDC or 10VAC peak

Common Mode Rejection:

100 dB typical

Maximum Allowable Input:

25V rms

•

Channel-to-Power Ground

Isolation:

•

± 200V peak

Channel-to-Channel Isolation:

200V peak.

Temperature Coefficient:

< (0.1 x rated accuracy)%/°C

•

Hardware

3-15

Digital Filtering:

•

Averages 32 samples at 50/60 Hz for line cycle noise rejection (VDC measurements)

Voltage Range², Accuracy³and Resolution:

•

±100 mV

±1 V

±5 V

0.02%

3.05 µV/bit

30.5 µV/bit

153 µV/bit

306 µV/bit

±10 V

Note 1: Accuracy is based on 18 to 28°C, 1 year; includes cold junction compensation; excludes thermocouple errors;

thermocouple readings based on NIST Monograph 175. Resolution given is the typical value. Add ±5°C for common

mode voltages greater than 25 VAC.

Note 2: Voltage range is maximum peak-to-peak signal for AC volts.

Note 3: For AC voltages where the frequency of the input signal is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle ±1%; with line cycle

integration enabled.

Note 4: Specified for coupling impedance >30 MΩ and common mode frequency < 60 Hz. 300 VDC or 300 VAC peak before

equipment damage occurs.

Note 5: There is a 4700 pico-farad, polypropylene capacitor connected across the input terminals of each channel. This

capacitor filters input noise when measuring signals from thermocouples. When the circuit card is set to the ±100 mV

range, the capacitor reacts with user source impedance to form a low pass filter. The filter pole frequency is:

1/(2*pi*(RSHI + RSLO)*4700 * 10^-12), where RSHI and RSLO are the source resistance of the input leads.

3-16

ChartScan User’s Manual

CSN14/LV/ (T, B, & S) Low Voltage Cards

There are three versions of low voltage signal conditioning cards for use with ChartScan. Each card supports 16

differential input channels and is capable of measuring analog input signals on any of four programmable ranges:

±100 mV, ±1 volt, ±5 volt and ±10 volt. The cards share the same signal conditioning characteristics, but differ in

their style of input connector, i.e., terminal strip, BNC, and safety jack (CSN14/LV/T, CSN14/LV/B and

CSN14/LV/S, respectively).

Number of Inputs: 16 differential; programmable by channel for input range

Input Types: ±10V, ±5V, ±1V, and ±100mV

Input Connectors: Removable screw terminal blocks, BNC, or Safety Jacks

Voltage Range, Accuracy¹and Resolution:

•

100 mV;

1 V;

5 V;

0.02%;

3.05 µV/bit

30.5 µV/bit

153 µV/bit

306 µV/bit

10 V;

Digital Filtering:

Used for AC line cycle noise rejection.

Selectable off, 1-256 samples in a binary count.

Temperature Coefficient:

< (0.1 x rated accuracy)%/°C

Input Impedance: 1MΩ typical

Input Bias Current: 20 nA maximum

Common Mode Rejection: 100 dB typical

Maximum Common Mode Voltage:²200 VDC, or 200 VAC peak

Maximum Allowable Input: 25V rms

Channel-to-Power Ground Isolation: 200 V peak

Channel-to-Channel Isolation: 200V peak

Hardware

3-17

CSN14/HV/S High Voltage Card with Safety Jack Connectors

The CSN14/HV/S card contains 16 differential input channels and is for use with “safety jack” type connectors. Each

CSN14/HV/S card is capable of measuring analog input signals on any of the following three programmable ranges:

±2.5 volt, ±25 volt and ±250 volt.

CSN14/HV/S, High Voltage Card with Safety Jack Connectors

Number of Inputs:

16 differential; programmable by channel for input range

Input Connectors:

Safety Jack

Voltage Range, Accuracy and Resolution:

•

2.5V;

25 V;

250 V;

0.02%;

78.14 µV/bit

781.4 µV/bit

7.81 mV/bit

Digital Filtering:

Used for AC line cycle noise rejection.

Selectable off, 1-256 samples in a binary count.

Temperature Coefficient: < 0.01%/°C

Input Impedance: 10 MΩ typical

Input Bias Current: 20 pA maximum.

Maximum Common Mode Voltage:¹500 VDC or 500 VAC peak

Maximum Normal Mode Voltage: 500 VDC or 500 VAC peak

Common Mode Rejection: 100 dB typical.

Maximum Allowable Input: 500 VDC or 500 VAC peak

Channel-to-Channel Isolation:

500 VDC or 500VAC peak

Channel-to-Power Ground Isolation:²

500VDC or 500 VAC peak

Note 1: Specified for coupling impedance >30 MΩ and common mode frequency < 60 Hz. 700 VDC or 700 VAC peak ; 325 VDC

or 325 VAC peak if used in the same system with a MTC/24 scanning module, before equipment damage occurs.

Note 2: 325 VDC or 325 VAC peak if used in the same system with a MTC/24 scanning module.

3-18

ChartScan User’s Manual

CSN/Relay Card ^{(for High-Current Digital-Output)}

CSN/Relay Card

The high-current digital-output CSN/Relay Card allows you to add relay functions to the first 16 digital outputs. The

CSN/Relay card installs into ChartScan’s slot 1 (bottom card slot). Only one relay card can be used per ChartScan

unit, and a relay card can not be installed in a ChartScan expansion chassis.

The CSN/Relay Card uses 16 dual-coil latch relays and associated circuitry to minimize load on ChartScan’s

internal power supply. Note that the relays are contained in two groups, with 8 relays per group. Current is briefly

drawn following a change in digital logic output level. In event of a power failure, it is possible for a relay to remain

in a “set” state until power is restored.

CAUTION

Do not exceed specified current limits on relay group commons. Exceeding specified limits

can damage the printed circuit board.

There is a common feed to all 8 relays in each of the two groups. It is important to stay within the group total current

limitation, regardless of the current ratings of the relay contacts or the plug-in terminal blocks; otherwise the circuit

board may be damaged. Note that ratings of relay contacts exceed the current carrying capacity of the printed circuit

board.

When the Alarm/Relay Card option is used, it is not possible to install more than 7 signal conditioning cards (3 in the

main unit), since the relay card occupies one card slot. This means you can have no more than 112 channels instead

of 128, when using this option.

Note: The relay output card option, if used, must be inserted into slot 1 (the bottom slot) of the main ChartScan

unit. The channel assignments are then automatically bumped as shown in the following table.

Device

Channel Assignments (when relay option is used)

Slot 1

-------------

48-64

Slot 2

1 - 16

65 - 80

Slot 3

13-32

81 - 96

Slot 4

33-48

93-112

ChartScan

Expansion Chassis

(option)

CAUTION

Only one CSN/Relay card can be used in a ChartScan system. Attempts to install the

CSN/Relay card in a slot other than slot #1 of ChartScan’s main unit could possibly cause

equipment damage.

Hardware

3-19

CSN/Relay Card Specifications

Number of Channels:

•

16 (2 groups of 8 channels)

Relay Contacts (Manufacturer’s Ratings):*

•

8 Amps, 125-250 VAC Resistive

5 Amps, 30 VDC Resistive

Card Contact Ratings:

8 Amps maximum on group commons

•

Contact-to-System Isolation:

500 Volts (AC or DC)

•

*Manufacturer’s ratings for the relays used on the CSN/Relay Card.

Expansion Chassis, CSN/Exp (Option)

You can add up to 64 additional analog channels to ChartScan by using a CSN/Exp expansion chassis. The

expansion chassis accepts the same types of signal conditioning cards as the ChartScan unit, and is powered and

controlled by the ChartScan unit.

Expansion channels are accessed in the same way as channels in the master ChartScan unit. When the main unit

detects the presence of the expansion chassis (during its power-on sequence), the system makes the additional

channels available to the user. The U8 command is available to query ChartScan for the total number of channels in

the system.

Note: Only one expansion chassis can be connected to a ChartScan unit.

Note: The rear panel of the expansion chassis contains no controls, indicators, input or output connections.

Connecting the Expansion Chassis

A ribbon cable electronically connects the expansion chassis to the main unit. No additional power or interface

cables are required. A set of mounting blocks and machine screws is used to physically connect the expansion

chassis to ChartScan. Perform the following steps to install an expansion chassis.

WARNING

Before connecting an expansion chassis to ChartScan, power down ChartScan and

disconnect the unit from power. In addition, power down and disconnect all devices from

the system. Failure to do so could lead to personal injury or death.

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,

when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause

equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

Note: Only one expansion chassis can be connected to a ChartScan unit

1. Ensure the ChartScan is not connected to any power source.

2. Remove two upper side screws (near front of unit, and on side of unit) and slide top cover plate free of ChartScan.

Note that this plate will be reused as the cover plate for the expansion chassis.

3. Using machine screws (A) provided, install two mounting blocks to the inner sides of the ChartScan unit, as

indicated by the following figure.

3-20

ChartScan User’s Manual

Cover Plate

Screw (1 of 2)

Cover Plate

Expansion

Chassis

Mounting Block

(1 of 4)

Ribbon Cable

CA-154 (Included)

Connector PH401

(on back side of

Analog Backplane Board)

Cross Section of Mounting Block

ChartScan

Connecting the Expansion Chassis to ChartScan

4. Insert one end of the included 40-conductor ribbon cable (CA-154) into ChartScan’s connector PH401. PH401 is

located above the uppermost signal conditioning connector on the top edge of the analog backplane card. See the

following figure, Connecting the Backplane Cards.

Expansion Backplane Card, Partial

Located In Expansion Chassis

PH501

CA-154

Connects to

PH401 and PH501

PH401

C352 C353

Analog Backplane Card, Partial

Located In ChartScan Main Chassis

Connecting the Backplane Cards

Note: Ribbon cable (CA-154) is “keyed” for proper installation.

5. Using the same front/back orientation, position the expansion chassis on top of the ChartScan unit, then insert the

remaining end (of cable CA-154) into expansion chassis connector PH501, on rear of PC board.

6. Secure the expansion chassis to the ChartScan unit with two machine screws (B) for each of the four mounting

blocks installed in step 3.

7. Install the cover plate (removed in step 2) onto the expansion chassis, and secure with two screws.

Hardware

3-21

Automatic Channel Assignment

Unless the CSN/Relay card is used, Channels 1 through 64 are automatically assigned to ChartScan, while extended

channels 65 through 128 are assigned to the expansion chassis. Even if a card slot is left empty in the ChartScan or

the expansion chassis, the channel assignments are as shown in the table, with slot 1 being at the bottom of the unit,

and slot 4 being at the top.

Device

Channel Assignments

Slot 1

1 - 16

65 - 80

Slot 2

13-32

81 - 96

Slot 3

33-48

93-112

Slot 4

48-64

113-128

ChartScan

Expansion Chassis

The relay card, if used, must go in slot 1 of the main ChartScan unit. When the relay card is used, there are only 112

channels available. The channel assignments are automatically bumped as shown in the following table.

Device

Channel Assignments (when relay option is used)

Slot 1

-------------

48-64

Slot 2

1 - 16

65 - 80

Slot 3

13-32

81 - 96

Slot 4

33-48

93-112

ChartScan

Expansion Chassis

CAUTION

Only one CSN/Relay card can be used in a ChartScan system. Attempts to install the

CSN/Relay card in a slot other than slot #1 of ChartScan’s main unit could possibly cause

equipment damage.

3-22

ChartScan User’s Manual

Expansion Chassis Specifications

WARNING

Service must be performed by qualified personnel. All terminals, including the AC line and

analog inputs, must be disconnected prior to opening ChartScan main unit or expansion

chassis casing. Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death!

CAUTION

The Expansion Chassis contains no fuses; However, fuse failure in ChartScan’s main chassis

indicates a possible problem with device circuitry. If a fuse blows, contact a qualified

service representative. Replacement fuses are to be installed by qualified service personnel

with the unit disconnected from the ChartScan unit and with all other terminals

disconnected. If the line voltage selector is changed, then the fuse designated for that line

voltage must be used.

Installation Category:

•

CE: Category 2 for Line Voltage Input terminal.

All other terminals are Category 1.

Number of Slots: Four (4).

Channel-to-Channel Isolation: 200 V peak, with CSN14/HV/S 500 V peak

Channel-to-System Isolation:

Dimensions:

500 V peak

•

330 mm wide x 241 mm deep × 152 mm high (13” × 9.5” × 6”).

Weight:

•

≈ 1.8 kg. (4 lbs.) empty

Operating Environment:

•

Standard: Indoor use, 0 to 50°C;

•

CE: Indoor use at altitudes below

2000 m, 5 to 40°C; 0 to 80% RH

up to 31°C decreasing linearly to

50% RH at 40°C.

0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) to

35°C; linearly derate 3% RH/°C

from 35 to 50°C.

Power:

Receives power from ChartScan chassis.

Hardware

3-23

−

Notes

3-24

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference

ChartView, ChartView Plus, ChartViewNET, and ChartViewNET Plus

Digital Meters ……4-30

Meter Toolbars ……4-31

Meter Pull-Down Menus ……4-31

Meters Configuration Menu ……4-32

Overview ……4-1

Groups, Charts, & Channels ……4-2

Three Ways of Using ChartView ……4-2

What ChartView and ChartView Plus Provide

Setup Window ……4-33

……4-3

Channel & Alarm Setup Dialog Box ……4-33

Channel Configuration Columns ……4-35

Alarm Configuration Columns ……4-36

Acquisition Setup Dialog Box ……4-36

Burst Mode, Operational Issues ……4-39

Measuring AC Voltage, or AC RMS Voltage……4-40

Data Destination Dialog Box ……4-42

Data Destination ……4-42

Main Window ……4-4

Channel Information Region ……4-6

Status Indicator Region ……4-7

Main Window Toolbar ……4-8

Group Select ……4-8

Start, Pause, and Stop Charts ……4-8

Scroll Faster & Scroll Slower ……4-8

Display Configuration ……4-9

Channel Configuration ……4-15

PostView post-acq data viewer ……4-15

Arm Acquisition ……4-15

Auto Re-arm (ChartView Plus only) ……4-42

Why use Auto Re-arm? ……4-43

Disabling Auto Re-arm ……4-43

Chart Setup Wizard ……4-44

Introduction ……4-44

Disarm ……4-15

Print Charts ……4-16

Automatic Chart Setup with Wizard ……4-45

Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup ……4-46

Main Window Pull-Down Menus ……4-16

Bar Graph, Analog, and Digital Meters …4-27

Overview ……4-27

Bar Graph Meters ……4-28

Analog Meters ……4-29

Reference Note: This chapter serves as a reference for ChartView, ChartView Plus, ChartViewNET,

ChartViewNET Plus, and Chart Setup Wizard. For very first time start-up of a ChartView application,

or to run through the program tutorial, refer to Chapter 1.

ChartScan can operate on the ethernet providing it is configured for RS-232 serial communications and

properly connected to A Net232 ethernet/RS-232 converter. If you will be connecting your ChartScan unit

to a Net232, please refer to the Net232 User’s Guide, part number 1037-0901.

ChartViewNET refers to a ChartView program that has the network feature of the program activated (for

ethernet operation), much like ChartView Plus refers to a ChartView program that has the enhanced chart

feature of the program activated. The NET and Plus features are each activated by separate registration ID

codes; thus it is possible to have ChartViewNET Plus (when both codes are used). For ease of discussion,

this chapter’s use of the term ChartView also refers to ChartViewNET; and ChartView Plus refers to

ChartViewNET Plus.

Overview

ChartView is a graphic Microsoft Windows-based program that can be used for various data acquisition applications.

The program was designed for ease-of-use with no need for programming or expertise in configuration.

ChartView Plus permits multiple groups and up to four overlapping channels (per chart). These enhanced

features are activated by use of a registration ID code. Please consult your service representative if more

information is desired.

ChartScan User’s Manual ^1-12-99

ChartView Software Reference 4-1

Groups, Charts, & Channels

When starting the program with no configuration file present (see Chapter 1 if necessary), a feature called Chart Setup

Wizard is automatically activated to assist you with your display setup. To make the best use of Chart Setup Wizard you

need to understand the relationship of Groups, Charts, and Channels.

Group. “Group” refers to a group of charts. ChartView makes use of one chart group.

ChartView Plus allows up to 64 groups, depending on the capabilities of your PC, but

can only display one group at a time.

Chart. “Chart” refers to display area that reflects real-time channel data values for a

selected channel and can be scrolled at various rates. You can assign up to 16 charts per

group. ChartView Plus enables each chart to display up to four overlapping channels.

Channel. “Channel” refers to a signal channel. Channels will be displayed in units of

°C, °F, °K, °R, mV, V, or in user-defined units, depending on the configuration and type

of signal conditioning card used. With ChartView Plus you can have up to 4

overlapping channels assigned to one chart.

Three Ways of Using ChartView

You can use ChartView to:

•

chart and monitor specific channels with no acquisition of data to disk

acquire data with no charting or meter use

use charting and/or meters while acquiring data to disk

Chart channels (and/or monitor with meters) with no acquisition of data to disk (Acquisition State:

Waiting for Trigger) Prior to charting channels on ChartView’s Main Window, you need to configure

a display in regard to groups, charts, and channels. This aspect of configuration is performed through

Chart Setup Wizard (discussed in the following text), or through a Chart Setup window accessed

through the “Channel Configuration” button on ChartView’s Main Window.

In addition to charting channels, you can monitor selected channels via digital, analog, and/or bar graph

meters. Meter discussion begins on page 4-27 of this manual. A detailed discussion of configuring

Meters begins on page 4-32.

Note: Only one group of charts can be viewed at a time.

Acquire data with no charting or meter use (Possible Acquisition Scenarios: Acquiring and Uploading

Acquisition, Buffering Acquisition in Instrument, and Uploading Data from Instrument Buffer). Prior

to acquiring data (for saving to disk) you need to configure the acquisition using the Acquisition

window (accessed through the Setup pull-down menu of ChartView’s Main Window, or through use of

the related icon button). You can enable the desired channels and assign high and low alarm values

from the configuration window.

Chart channels and/or use meters while acquiring data to disk (Possible Acquisition States: Acquiring

and Uploading Acquisition, Buffering Acquisition in Instrument, and Uploading Data from Instrument

Buffer). Prior to using ChartView for charting (and/or meter use) while simultaneously acquiring data

to disk, you need to configure a display and/or meter; as well as configure the acquisition. Channels

from the display setup are automatically enabled. You can enable additional channels from the

Channel Configuration window (for the data acquisition) to acquire more data; however, these

additional channels will not change your display setup, or the channels being monitored. In other

words, you can acquire data from channels you do not chart or monitor.

4-2

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Some of the data acquisition scenarios pertaining to ChartView are as follows:

2) Acquiring & Uploading Acquisition

1) Waiting for Trigger

Hard Disk

Sensor

Buffer

Acquisiton Device

Computer System

Acquisiton Device

Computer System

Data is received by acquisition device, but not stored. Selected

channels can be viewed graphically in scrolling charts, as well

as in one or more meters (analog, digital, or bar graph).

Device has been triggered. Data is temporarily stored in device

buffer prior to being uploaded to PC system hard disk. As in the first

scenario, selected display channels can be viewed.

4) Uploading Data from Instrument Buffer

3) Buffering Acquisition in Instrument

Hard Disk

Sensor

Hard Disk

Sensor

Buffer

Computer System

Acquisiton Device

Computer System

Acquired data (from point of trigger) is received by acquisition device

and temporarily stored in device buffer. As in the previous scenarios,

selected display channels can be viewed.

Acquired data is uploaded to the PC hard disk from the device buffer.

As in the previous scenarios, selected display channels can be

viewed.

Four Basic Data Acquisition Scenarios

What ChartView and ChartView Plus Provide

ChartView and ChartView Plus provide you with the capability to connect to, and control any member of the

ChartScan, NetScan, MultiScan, or TempScan family of data acquisition instruments, as well as:

Create and edit chart display setups ……………………………… See Display Configuration, beginning on page 4-9 and

Chart Setup Wizard, beginning on page 4-44.

Set up analog input parameters (selecting: Channels, …………

TC types, Units) to acquire data.

See Setup Window, beginning on page 4-33.

Configure alarms, log alarms……………………………………….

See pages 4-24, 4-33, and 4-36.

Configure and arm an acquisition………………………………….. See Acquisition Setup Dialog Box, page 4-36.

View real-time display of channel data via the Main Window….

See Main Window, beginning on page 4-4.

Save data to disk…………………………………………………….. See File, page 4-16 and Data Destination, page 4-42.

Transmit data to Microsoft Excel via DDE (Dynamic Data ……..

Exchange).

See Data, beginning on page 4-20.

Start PostView, an independent application that allows you to…

See Chapter 5, PostView.

graphically view data channels from a file.

Use remote RS-232 communications by attaching the …………. See Device, page 4-23.

acquisition device to a modem configured for Auto Answer

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-3

Main Window

While using this chapter, refer to the Main Window figure and its associated control option table as

needed. Because of the graphic aspect of the window, you should be able to develop a good

understanding of the program’s capabilities and associated operating techniques within a very short

time.

The following comments apply to the figure and table on the following page.

•

In regard to the control option table presented on the facing page, the symbols: ꢀ (mouse), Ú

(arrow keypads), ꢁ (Page Up/Page Down keypads), and [spacebar] are control options that allow

you to tab to a field and make changes with the specified control.

•

Channel Selection (14) can also be made by tabbing to the Center Control (17) or Units/Div

Control (18) and using PageUp or PageDown (ꢁ).

The min and max scale values (13) and (19) are automatically generated, but can also be set from

the Chart Setup Dialog.

You can use the Chart pull-down menu to turn grid limit lines Off, or On. Limit lines can be solid

or dots.

In regard to the time stamp (region 21), if you stop the chart the time stamp will begin at 00:00:00

upon restarting the chart (if using relative time), or at the real clock time (if using absolute time).

More detailed information regarding the pull-down menus and toolbar buttons is provided

throughout the chapter.

4-4

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Main Window and Control Options

ꢀ = Mouse, Ú= Arrow Keypads , ꢁ = PageUp/PageDown Keypads

Note: The bulleted list on page 4-4 relates to this table.

Group Select

Channel Selection

Multiply (x2)

Ctrl+G, ^orÚ, ^orꢁ

ꢀ ^or,Ú

ꢀ ^{or, Tab-to/Spacebar}

Start Charts and

Indicators

ꢀ ^or,F5

N/A

Pause Charts

Stop Charts

Scroll Faster

Present Value of Selected

Channel

ꢀ ^or,F7

Center (Value at Chart Mid-

Line)

ꢀ ^or,F6

ꢀ ^or,Ú^{, or type-in}

Units/Division

(Vertical increment per one grid

box)

ꢀ ^or,Ctrl+Z

From Chart Pull-down

menu or Chart Setup

Dialog Box

Scroll Slower

Chart Min. Scale Value (Grid

Limit Line)

ꢀ ^or,Ctrl+X

ꢀ ^{or, Tab-to/Spacebar}

Display Configuration

Divide (÷2)

ꢀ^{or, Pointer over chart}

and “right-click” Current

group will be selected.

Thru Pull-Down Menus

only

ꢀ

Channel

Configuration

Time Stamp (hr:min:sec)

Status Message Box

N/A

PostView post-acq

data viewer

ꢀ ^{or, Windows Pull-}

down menu

Time/Division (Chart Speed),

the Horizontal increment per

grid box

Ctrl+Z (Faster)

Ctrl+X (Slower)

Arm Acquisition

ꢀ ^or,Ctrl+T

N/A; For Windows3.1

see note on page 4-7.

Disarm …

Status LEDs

ꢀ ^or,Ctrl+Y

Print Charts

Chart Display

ꢀ ^or,Ctrl+P

ꢀ

From Chart Pull-down

menu or Chart Setup

Dialog Box

Double-click left mouse button in selected chart to zoom in or

zoom back out. Right-click to bring up Chart Setup Dialog Box

with the current group and target chart selected.

Chart Max. Scale

Value (Grid Limit

Line)

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-5

Channel Information Region

Channels can return values in units of °C, °F, °K, °R, mV, V, or user

defined units (if the mX + b option is used). With exception of mX + b

user defined-units, units depend on the configuration and type of signal

conditioning card used. Signal conditioning cards are detailed in the

user’s manual for you data acquisition device. The Channel

Information Region is located on the right-hand side of ChartView’s

main window. The values displayed in this region are the real-time

values of the selected channel.

By clicking on the up or down arrows (σ, or τ) by the channel selection

box (item 14), you can select one (of a maximum of 4 channels) that

were assigned to a chart. You could then observe the chart-related

information of the chosen channel.

You can also select a new channel for the information region by placing the cursor in (or tabbing over

to) the “Center” or “Units/Div” fields and then pressing PageUp or PageDown. This is particularly

useful when your main window has been re-sized such that the channel selection boxes are not visible.

The following list identifies the various areas of the region.

Chart Max. Scale Value

(Grid Limit Line)

Channel Selection

(Of chart’s available channels)

Multiply (x2)

Center

(Value at chart mid-line)

Units/Division

(Provides the vertical increment of one grid box.)

Chart Min. Scale Value (Grid Limit Line)

Divide (÷2)

Present Value

Note: The basic ChartView program does not permit overlapping channels or having more than

one chart group. Multiple group applications (ChartView Plus) can be activated by use of a

special code, allowing up to four overlapping channels per chart. Regardless of whether you

are using the basic ChartView program, or ChartView Plus, there is a maximum limit of 16

charts per group.

Multiply and Divide Buttons - In addition to reading channel values, you can increase or decrease the

size of the selected channel’s chart. This is accomplished with the Multiply (15) and Divide (20)

push-buttons. The Multiply push-button effectively increases the size of the selected channel’s chart by

a factor of two, while automatically adjusting the chart’s high and low values (items 13 and 19). Aside

from “clicking” on the Multiply/Divide controls, you can use your keyboard spacebar to control this

feature once the button (15 or 20) is selected. Selection may be with mouse, or by tabbing over to the

control.

Making changes to a channel’s chart parameters does not affect the parameters of the other channels,

with the following exception: Holding the keyboard’s control key down while adjusting either spinner

(σ/τ) for center (item 17), or spinner for units/div (item 18) causes the parameter change to apply to all

channels displayed for the chart, not just the currently selected channel display. This feature applies to

the spinners and keyboard up and down arrow keys, but not to the text input.

Center Control - The Center control (item 17) changes the value of the selected channel’s chart

centerline. Changing the value of center results in an automatic change of the chart’s high and low end

values (items 13 and 19), and possibly an automatic change of the units/div (item 18). Aside from

using the center spinner controls to change center, you can change the center value by placing the

mouse cursor in (or tabbing over to) the field and then either typing in the desired value, or using the

PC keyboard up and down arrow control keys.

4-6

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Units/div - The units in units/div (18) can be °C, °F, °K, °R, mV, or V. The division referenced is one

vertical grid. In the example above for Channel 1, each vertical grid increment represents 10.58°C per

division. Changing the units/division spinner controls (σ/τ) will result in an automatic adjustment of the

max scale and min scale values (items 13 and 19). Aside from using the units/div triangular controls to

change the value, you can change units/div by placing the mouse cursor in (or tabbing over to) the field

and then either typing in the desired value, or using the PC keyboard arrow control keys.

Status Indicator Region

The status indicator region of the Main Window, located along the bottom of the window, consists of

the following items:

21 Scrolling Time

22 Status Message Box

23 Chart Speed (Time/Div)

24 Status LEDs¹

Scrolling Time - Scrolling Time (21) is turned On or Off from the View pull-down menu. Time Stamp

can be “absolute” (real time) or “relative.” Absolute time is based on your computer clock, whereas

relative time starts at 00:00:00 hours/minutes/seconds, and then continues timing in increments relative

to the Chart Speed (23). The Absolute or Relative time stamp style is selected from the Chart

pull-down file.

Status Message Box - The Status Message Box (22) informs you of the status of the data acquisition

device. Several sample messages appear below:

Sample Status Messages

Attaching to device …

Trigger device. Setting acquisition parameters.

Acquisition active. Updating active.

Acquisition active. No updating.

Waiting for trigger …

Setting channel configuration …

Setting the acquisition parameters.

Charting …

Chart Speed - Chart Speed (23) consists of a “time per division” value that can be changed using the

“faster” (rabbit) button or “slower” (turtle) button. Fourteen possible chart speeds are as follows:

0.1 sec/div

0.2 sec/div

0.5 sec/div

1 sec/div

2 sec/div

5 sec/div

10 sec/div

30 sec/div

1 min/div

2 min/div

5 min/div

10 min/div

30 min/div

1 hr/div

Status LEDs¹- ChartView’s Main Window contains five virtual LEDs (item 24) for conveying the

state of the system. Each of the five indicators is labeled on the main window. These indicators are:

Initializing:

Charting:

Indicates ChartView is configuring the data acquisition instrument.

Indicates charting is in progress. This indicator is useful when charts are scrolling at a very

slow speed.

Disk:

Indicates ChartView is writing to disk.

Indicates the data acquisition instrument is storing scans that are not being saved to disk.

Buffering in

Instrument:

Indicates data in the instrument is being uploaded to the PC.

Uploading:

Note 1: The Status LEDs and their labels (listed above) do not appear when using Windows 3.1.

However, when using Windows 3.1, the labels will appear at the time the function is active,

e.g., when uploading, the text “[Uploading]” shows in region 24. This text message is in

addition to the text in the Status Message Box (Item 22).

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-7

Main Window Toolbar

Each item in the toolbar, with exception of Group Select (1), is represented by an individual button

icon. Toolbar-related functions can also be activated from pull-down menus (discussed later). Placing

the cursor on the button and clicking the mouse button enables the tool, or opens a corresponding

dialog box. Each Toolbar button has a pop-up label that appears when the mouse is placed over the

button.

Note: The toolbar represented below is for ChartView’s Main Window. Separate toolbars exist for

Bar Graph, Digital Meters, and Analog Meters options (selectable from the Windows pull-down

menu.) These other toolbars are discussed later in the chapter.

Group Select

Start Charts and Indicators

Pause Charts

Stop Charts

Scroll Faster

Display Configuration

Channel Configuration

PostView post-acq data viewer

10 Arm Acquisition

11 Disarm …

12 Print Charts

Scroll Slower

Group Select

This feature indicates the chart group being charted. Clicking on the down arrow (τ) reveals other chart

groups configured by the user. The standard ChartView program allows the use of only one chart

group, while ChartView Plus can be configured to display up to 64 groups (one group at a time). To

select a different chart group, simply pull down the group list and select the desired group. The group

list can be obtained by any of the control options provided in the table on page 4-5. These are: a)

clicking the down arrow (τ)), b) using Ctrl + G on the keyboard, c) using the keyboard up or down

arrow key, d) using the page up or page down key. If using a control option other than “a,” you may

need to select the group select box by repeatable pressing the keyboard’s Tab key until the group select

box is selected. The name of the currently selected group appears in white on a dark background.

Start, Pause, and

Stop Charts

As their names imply, these three buttons are used to start, pause, or stop the charts. Pressing “pause”

suspends chart scrolling, but does not stop the “charting” process. While “pause” is pressed, the

channel region of the main window will continue to display real time values. Pressing “pause” a

second time restarts the scrolling action. Pressing “stop” causes the charting process to stop and

instantly freezes the channel region at its present values. This does not affect the acquisition.

Scroll Faster &

Scroll Slower

These buttons provide a means of speeding up and slowing the chart’s scrolling rate, also referred to as

chart speed. These two buttons do not affect the scan rates of the acquisition device. The chart speed

(item 23) is indicated in the lower right-hand corner of the main window as time/div. There are 14

possible chart speeds, as follows:

0.1 sec/div

0.2 sec/div

0.5 sec/div

1 sec/div

2 sec/div

5 sec/div

10 sec/div

30 sec/div

1 min/div

2 min/div

5 min/div

10 min/div

30 min/div

1 hr/div

4-8

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Display

Configuration

The Display Configuration button accesses a Display Configuration Setup dialog box. This box will

also be displayed if: a) Create Charts Manually is selected during use of the Wizard Chart Setup

program, b) you select Setup from the Chart pull-down menu, c) you right-click on the chart region in

ChartView’s Main Window.

Note: If multiple chart groups are present in the display configuration, the current group will be

selected in the display configuration tree.

When you first click on the Display Configuration button, a Display Configuration Setup box appears.

A display region shows the configured structure of the groups, charts, and channels. From this box,

you can select the number of charts to be assigned to a specific group. With the use of the mouse

cursor, you can also select a chart or channel for additional editing. In addition to the text presented in

the following sub-sections: Normal Edit and Manually Creating a Display, you can refer to the

following for related information:

•

The chapter 1 tutorial walks through a display setup from beginning to end.

In this chapter, Chart Setup Wizard provides information on the use of Chart Setup Wizard for the

set up of groups, charts, and channels.

Reference Note: For the very first display setup, or when the configuration file has been

deleted, you will need to use Chart Setup Wizard. First time use is discussed in the

ChartView tutorial of Chapter 1. Additional Chart Setup Wizard information begins on

page 4-44.

The method you use to access the Display Configuration Setup window makes a difference. When you

use the toolbar button or the pull-down menu’s Setup selection, the Display Configuration Setup

window appears with the current chart display configuration intact. With this type of access you

would simply edit your existing chart display. Channel and alarm configurations do not change, with

exception that newly displayed channels will be enabled.

When you access the Display Configuration Setup from the Chart Setup Wizard, the Display

Configuration Setup window appears with no existing display. This allows for a “clean slate” approach

to creating a chart display, as opposed to an “editing” approach. Channel and alarm configurations do

not change, with exception that newly displayed channels will be enabled.

Normal Edit

To explain editing a configuration, we make use of an example where changes are desired for Chart 1.

In the following figure, Chart 1 was highlighted by clicking on it with the mouse cursor. The Display

Configuration Setup box then changed, allowing you to see specific channel types (such as volts only)

or to “Show all Types,” as in the example. From this setup box you can add or delete charts and

channels. You can:

•

hold down the Shift key and use the cursor to select several consecutive channels for addition or deletion

hold down the Ctrl key and use the cursor to select several non-consecutive channels for addition or deletion

double-click on an available channel to add it to the selected channels

double-click on a selected channel to remove it from the selected channels list

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-9

Display Configuration Setup Dialog Box with an Existing Configuration

Note: When a chart contains overlapping channels [and the channels share values such that their traces

reside on top of each other], then the channels listed lower in the display list (the most recently added

channels) will obscure the channels higher in the list (those that were added first).

Adding Channel 2 to Chart 1

Another variation of the Display Configuration Setup box appears when you highlight a channel. In the

following figure, Channel 1 (of Chart 1, Group 1) was selected, resulting in a new screen image. From

this screen, you can edit the channel setup.

4-10

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Adjusting Channel Setup for Channel 1

ChartView and ChartView Plus data channels can operate in one of two modes: Units Full Scale or,

Units/Div. The mode is selected by radio button.

Units Full Scale. When Units Full Scale is selected, as depicted in the above figure, you can alter

Y Max and Y Min. These are the upper and lower limits of the Channel as they will appear on the

chart when the channel is selected. When you change either parameter, Y Center and Units/Division

are automatically adjusted. You can not directly adjust Y Center or Units/Division while “Units Full

Scale” is selected. You can change Y Max and Y Min by using the up and down arrows, or by

highlighting the existing value, typing in the new value, the pressing “Enter” on your PC keyboard.

Note: If the window size is changed, a chart operating in the Units Full Scale mode will maintain its

full scale setting across the chart.

Units/Div. When Units/Div. is selected, you can alter Y Center and Units/Div. Y Center is the

centerline value of the chart when the channel is selected. Units/Div. is the vertical value of on chart

grid increment. When you change Y Center or Units/Div. Y Max and Y Min are automatically

adjusted. You can not directly adjust Y Max or Y Min while “Units/Div” is selected. You can change

Y Center and Units/Div. by using the up and down arrows, or by highlighting the existing value, typing

in the new value, the pressing “Enter” on your PC keyboard.

Note: If the window size is changed, a chart operating in the Units/Div. Mode will maintain its

units per division scale setting across the chart.

The channels (in the display) will be enabled, and will appear in ChartView’s Main Window. The

Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart (for ChartView Plus applications), and will be visible

when the applicable Group is selected. Only one group of charts can be viewed at a time.

It is important to understand that other channels (those not in the display setup) maintain their existing

configuration status. They are not affected by the edit of the configuration display.

You can enable additional channels from the Channel and Alarm Setup window. Enabling additional

channels allows you to acquire more data; however, it will not change your display on ChartView’s

Main Window. In other words, you can acquire data from channels you do not monitor.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-11

Manually Creating a Display

For ChartView Plus users, if you plan to have a chart setup that is not weighted evenly, i.e., different

numbers of channels per chart and different numbers of charts per group, you may want to manually

setup your chart display from scratch, i.e., without beginning from a pre-existing display configuration.

This method is arrived at from the Chart Setup Wizard window by selecting “Manual Chart Creation.”

When this button is clicked, the program exits the Chart Setup Wizard and enters the manual method of

Display Configuration Setup. Although this method is referred to as “manual,” it still contains some

automatic elements, such as Automatically Add Groups to the Setup (available with ChartView Plus).

Note: Even if an unevenly distributed chart display is desired, you can always edit a pre-existing

chart setup, or create a new setup by one of the Chart Setup Wizard’s automatic methods, and

then edit the setup.

To manually setup your chart display, using the “clean slate” approach (as opposed to “editing an

existing display”) perform the following steps.

1. Select Wizard from the Chart pull-down menu of ChartView’s main window. The New Display

Setup dialog box appears.

2. Click OK on the New Display Setup dialog box. The Wizard setup window appears (see following

figure)

3. Click on the Manual Chart Creation button. The Display Configuration Setup box appears. Since

the previous display configuration was reset, no groups or charts are seen in the display area on the

left side of the screen.

Note: If you have ChartView Plus, you will be allowed to have more than one group, as well as

overlapping channels (up to four per chart). If you have the basic ChartView program, you

will be limited to one group, and only one channel per chart.

Display Configuration Setup, The “Clean Slate” Approach

4. As seen in the previous figure for the “Clean Slate” approach, you have two options at this point.

Perform (4a) or (4b) as appropriate. With ChartView Plus, option (4a) is typically used.

4-12

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

(4a) Automatically add groups to the setup. Enter the number of groups and charts desired by using the cursor

and typing in the value, or by using the pull-down arrows (τ) and making the appropriate selections; then click

on the Create Groups button.

(4b) Manually add groups to the setup. Type in the name of the chart group; then click on the Add Display

Group button.

The Display Configuration Setup screen changes to show chart groups, and the number of charts

for the selected (black highlighted) chart group. From this screen you can change the number of

charts in a group, as well as change the group name.

Adding a Chart to Group 1

5. Change the number of charts per group if desired.

6. Change the group name if desired.

7. Click on a group to see the chart(s) assigned to the group. In the above example there is one group

with one chart.

8. Click on a chart to assign channels to the chart. A screen similar to the following will appear.

Assigning Channels to Chart 1 of Group 1

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-13

9. Choose channels for the selected chart. With ChartView Plus, you can select up to four

overlapping channels per chart. With the basic ChartView program, you are limited to one channel

per chart. There are four methods of adding channels. These are as follows:

•

Highlight an available channel using the cursor and left-hand mouse button; then click the Add button.

Repeat for each channel to be added.

•

Double-click on the channel (in the available channels list to add; in the selected channels list to remove)

Hold down the keyboard’s Shift Key and use the left-hand mouse button to select a block of consecutive

available channels (up to 4); then click the Add button. Example: CH3, CH4, CH5,CH6.

•

Hold down the keyboard’s Ctrl button and use the left-hand mouse button to select up to 4 available

channels (these can be non-consecutive); then click the Add button.

Example: CH1, CH3, CH5, CH7, as in the previous figure.

Note: You can also remove channels in a similar manner by highlighting a channel(s) in the Select

Channels box, and then clicking on the Remove button. In the previous figure, CH7 (in the

select box) is highlighted. Clicking the Remove button would delete the channel from

Chart1.

Note: When a chart contains overlapping channels [and the channels share values such that their

traces reside on top of each other], then the channels that are listed lower in the display list

(the most recently added channels) will obscure the channels higher in the list (those that

were added first).

10. In the display area (on the left-hand side of the screen) click on a channel to check the channel’s

configuration and to re-configure the channel, if desired. The Display Configuration Setup

Window will appear similar to the following figure.

Note: Changing the display configuration does not change the existing channel and alarm

configuration. It only changes how the chart groups, charts, and channels will be displayed.

This screen contains two “radio buttons” for selecting the method of adjusting the display mode

and channel setup. It is the same screen discussed in the sub-section, Editing an Existing Display

Configuration. From this screen you need to choose Units Full Scale or Units/Div. Each method

was previously discussed (see page 4-11).

Adjusting Channel Setup for Channel 1

Remember, you can enable additional channels from the Channel and Alarm Setup window. Enabling

additional channels allows you to acquire more data; however, it will not change your display on

ChartView’s Main Window. In other words, you can acquire data from channels you do not monitor.

4-14

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Channel Configuration

The “Channel Configuration” button brings up the Setup Window with one of three “tabbed” dialog

boxes displayed: Acquisition Setup (page 4-33), Channel & Alarm Setup (page 4-33), or Data

Destination (page 4-39). The information entered in the Acquisition Setup dialog box is used by the

Arm Acquisition command to set up the acquisition of data to disk. When the trigger is satisfied, the

scans are collected at the selected scan frequency and stored to disk in the designated file. The

Channels & Alarms dialog box is used to configure channels and alarms; the Data Destination dialog

box is used to assign a filename and folder location for data, select an Excel or binary format (.TXT or

.IOT respectively), and to select optional Time/Date and/or Alarm Stamps (to be included in the data)

if desired. You can tab back and forth from each one of these dialog boxes to the other.

PostView post-acq data viewer

The “PostView post acquisition data viewer” button accesses the PostView program. This independent

program allows you to view waveforms recorded by data acquisition programs such as ChartView,

ChartView Plus, and TempView. PostView is detailed in Chapter 5 of this manual.

Arm Acquisition

You can use the Arm Acquisition button to activate an acquisition. When you click on this button the system is

“armed” to begin collecting data by a recognized trigger (as set in the acquisition setup dialog box.) Three cases

are as follows:

1) If there is no Pre-trigger defined, the Trigger option under the Event Configuration portion of the

Acquisition Setup dialog box will determine when the Arm process is initiated.

2) When a Pre-trigger is defined, the Arm process is initiated as soon as the Arm Acquisition is selected.

3) If a keystroke is chosen as the trigger, the Console Trigger dialog box will appear when the Arm

Acquisition is selected.

Disarm...

Use the “Disarm…” button to deactivate the data acquisition process at any point during an active acquisition.

The following confirmation dialog box will appear when this item is selected.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-15

Print Charts

The Print Charts button activates a screen print of ChartView’s main window.

Main Window Pull-Down Menus

The ChartView main window features several pull-down menus. As an alternative to the menus, you

can enable several menu items by using Toolbar buttons, previously discussed. The common items (for

the pull-down menus and toolbar) are described in more detail in the Toolbar section.

File

(see File Menu Note, immediately following this text)

Sets all channel parameters to their startup (factory default) setting.

New

(Ctrl + N)

Sets all channel parameters as directed by a specified configuration file (.cvw). The Load

ChartView Setup window prompts you to select from a list of previously saved configuration

files.

Open…

(Ctrl +O)

Saves the existing all-inclusive channel configuration settings for later recall. The Save

command overwrites the existing version if the versions are named the same.

Save

(Ctrl + S)

Saves the existing configuration for later recall; asks whether to overwrite the original version or

save under a new filename.

Save As…

The Print Charts button activates a screen print of ChartView’s main window. When a chart

contains overlapping channels [and the channels share values such that their traces reside on

top of each other], then the channels listed lower in the display list (the most recently added

channels) will obscure the channels higher in the list (those that were added first).

Print…

(Ctrl + P)

Clicking About will display a “ChartView” or “ChartView Plus” dialog box, as well as the software

version number. ChartView Plus can be activated from the ChartView dialog box, upon

entering a valid Registration ID Number and clicking the OK button. Your program can be

registered through your service representative.

About…

Dialog Boxes for ChartView and ChartView Plus

Exit

Exits the ChartView program.

4-16

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

File Menu Note

When ChartView is started for the very first time there is no default channel configuration file. In this

case a ChartView Startup dialog box appears, providing you with the following four choices: Retry,

Select Device, Load File, and Exit Program. After choosing Select Device a Select Interface dialog

box appears, allowing you to choose IEEE 488, RS-232/422, Network, or Simulated Instrument.

For ethernet operation, “Network” must be selected as the device interface.

Note: NetScan devices can not make use of the IEEE 488 selection.

After the selection has been made, when ChartView is shutdown, the selected interface device and all

channel configuration settings will be automatically saved in a default configuration file. Upon the

next start of ChartView, the default configuration is automatically loaded.

If the default configuration becomes corrupt, or if you would like to bypass the default configuration

when starting ChartView, you can hold down the Shift Key when starting ChartView. This causes the

program to ignore the default channel configuration settings and causes the ChartView Startup dialog

box to appear. This allows you to select Load File to make use of a specified channel configuration

file from a previously saved configuration.

Chart

Accesses Chart Setup Wizard feature for automated chart configuration.

Wizard Ctrl+W

Accesses Chart Setup window, allowing you to edit your display configuration.

Setup

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-17

Allows you to: Open a previously saved display configuration file, save the current

display configuration file, or save the current display configuration file in a different

location (or under a different file name). (See following note).

Display config.

Note: There will be no default Display Configuration file present the first time ChartView is

started. In this case, Chart Setup Wizard activates, allowing you to create a display

setup. When ChartView is shutdown, the display configuration is automatically saved in

a default configuration file that will load upon the next startup of ChartView.

If the default display configuration becomes corrupt, or if you would like to bypass this

configuration when starting ChartView, you can hold down the Control Key when

starting ChartView. This causes the program to ignore the default display configuration

and await your creation of a new display.

Starts, stops, or pauses chart scrolling.

Start

Stop

Pause

Selects the next chart group in the display configuration.

Next Group Ctrl+G

Used to alter the chart scrolling speed. There are fourteen possible chart speeds. The

range of speeds is from 0.1 sec/div to 1.0 hr/div.

Faster

Slower

Ctrl+Z

Ctrl+X

Zoom causes the Main Window to display one chart only. For example, if you were

viewing 3 charts and desired to get a better view of Chart 2, you could use Zoom to

view Chart 2 using the full chart viewing area, as compared to using one third of the

area. The zoom feature can also be invoked by double-clicking in the chart region of

the chart you want to apply the zoom to.

Zoom

[ Restore ]

Once you have zoomed in on a chart, the pull-down menu Zoom option is replaced by a

Restore option. Selecting Restore from the menu will return the main window to its

previous multiple chart viewing status. The restore feature can also be invoked by

again double-clicking in the chart region.

Allows you to turn the chart’s grid limit lines (items 13 & 19) on or off. If “on”, you can

have the grid lines appear as solid or dots.

Grid limit lines

Off

Ctrl+F1

Solid Ctrl+F2

Dots Ctrl+F3

Allows you to select an Absolute or Relative style of timestamp.

Timestamp

Absolute Ctrl+F4

Relative Ctrl+F5

View

A 9 by Toolbar indicates the toolbar will be visible. The absence of the 9 indicates the

visible toolbar option is not chosen, and in this case will not appear on the Main Window.

Use the mouse to select or de-select the toolbar option.

Toolbar

A 9 by Timestamps & Chartspeed indicates the options are selectable and visible. The

absence of the 9 indicates the timestamp/chartspeed option is not chosen, and therefor

not visible on the Main Window. Use the mouse to select or de-select this option.

A 9 by Statusbar indicates the Status Message Box and Status LEDs are visible (items

22 and 24, page 4-5). The absence of the 9 indicates the status bar will not be visible

on the Main Window. Use the mouse to select or de-select this option.

Timestamps &

Chartspeed

Statusbar

4-18

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Options

Option Settings includes three separate dialog boxes, accessible by tabs, as indicated in

the following screen captures.

Charts

Restricts Scroll Speed to Eliminate Aliasing

It is possible for chart displays to exhibit aliasing when using ChartScan, NetScan, or

MultiScan devices. The aliasing effect can be eliminated from the display by enabling the

“Restrict scroll speed to actual scan rate” feature. This reduces the scroll speed to a

range that results in non-aliased displays.

System

Determines Communication Timeout in Seconds

The system communications timeout determines how long the software will wait before

declaring a detected communications error. If linked to Excel, the system timeout value

(indicated in the above figure) will be overridden by the timeout value in the DDE

Configuration for Excel dialog box (accessed from the Data pull-down menu).

Acquisition

PostView Comment and Auto Re-arm Trigger Options

PostView Comment Enabling this option allows the user to enter a comment in a text box located in the

Setup/Data Destination dialog box. The following screen capture provides an example.

The message is stored in the header file (that is created when an acquisition saves data to

disk.)

The PostView Comment option should only be used for systems having PostView version

3.3 or later. The comment field in the header file is not compatible with the earlier versions

of PostView.

Example of a Data Commentary Entry for PostView

When in PostView (version 3.3 or greater), the data commentary can be read by selecting

Data Commentary from PostView’s Option pull-down menu. The commentary is displayed

in a message box.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-19

Acquisition

(continued)

Automatic Keyboard This feature works in conjunction with Keyboard Triggering when Auto Re-arm is being

Trigger used. Auto Re-arm is discussed on page 4-42.

on Auto Re-arm

If the option is disabled, acquisition data is saved to disk, and the device automatically

re-arms. ChartView displays the Trigger dialog box and waits for the trigger button to be

pressed by the user before beginning the next acquisition.

If the option is enabled (3), the trigger dialog box is not displayed and the trigger is

automatically sent to the acquisition device. The automatic trigger may be delayed by up

to 2 seconds (after the previous acquisition has finished).

Acquire

Arms the data acquisition device in preparation of receiving a trigger.

Arm Acquisition

(Ctrl + T)

Disarms the data acquisition device and discontinues the acquisition of data.

Disarm…

(Ctrl + Y)

Displays the condition of a data acquisition.

Acquisition Status...

Start All Indicators

Stop All Indicators

Starts all selected indicators for: the spreadsheet Reading column, Charts, and Meters.

Stops all selected indicators for spreadsheet Reading column, Charts, and Meters.

Data

Configures the DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) operation of ChartView. This pull-

down menu allows you to dynamically load collected ChartView data into an open

Excel spreadsheet. The three field regions are: Command Characters, Data

Destination, and Timeout. These are discussed on the following page.

DDE Configuration for Excel…

4-20

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

This area contains two fields for entering command characters, one for row setting and one for column

setting. Enter the characters (Excel parameters) to match the applicable version of Excel; for example:

France - Row = L, Column = C

Command

Characters

Germany - Row = Z, Column = S

United States - Row = R, Column = C.

Data Destination

Assign the Data Destination. This area allows you to assign the data destination on the Excel

spreadsheet. Specify the data starting point by entering a number for row, and another for column. The

two numbers designate the upper left hand corner cell of the Excel data entry.

Positioning Data in Excel. The data destination region also allows you to select one of three options in

regard to positioning data in Excel on subsequent scans. Options are as follows:

Row 1 Column 1. This selection starts the next scan at the designated row and column on the Excel

spreadsheet. Changing the values in the “Row” and “Column” boxes (above figure) will automatically enter

the new values in the corresponding fields of the “Row # Column #” placement assignment. For example,

If you entered a 3 in the row box and a 5 in the column box you would see Row 3 Column 5, instead of

Row 1 Column 1, in the above figure; and the next scan would start at row 3 column 5 in Excel.

Row after last scan. When “Row after last scan” is selected the next scan will begin at the point in Excel

where the previous acquisition left off.

Prompt each time. When “Prompt each time” is selected, after each acquisition is completed a dialog box

will ask if you want to return to origin. If you select “Yes”, you will have an overwrite on the Excel

spreadsheet, starting with the existing column and row designation. If you select “No,” the next scan will

begin on the spreadsheet’s next row (from where the previous acquisition left off).

Increment the Row on each new scan. With this selected (9), the Excel spreadsheet will use multiple

rows, one row for each new data scan. With no check-mark, the spreadsheet will make use of one row

only and will continue to display the latest scan information in that row.

Timestamp Format. This feature can only be used if Timestamps have been enabled in the

Setup/Destination dialog box. If this is the case, you can select a pre-configured format for the timestamps

sent to the Excel spreadsheet. Available formats are indicated in the previous screen capture. This

feature only affects the timestamp format in the Excel spreadsheet. It has no effect on timestamps saved

to disk.

This field allows you to enter a DDE link timeout value from 5 to 3276 seconds. The value is how long the

data import to Excel can be suspended while you perform a second Excel activity, such as displaying

graphs, or saving data to disk. A screen message informs you when the DDE link is timed out, terminating

the DDE link to Excel.

Timeout Region

Link to Excel…

Creates DDE link to Excel spreadsheet. Excel must already be running, and Excel Format must be

selected in the Setup/Data Destination dialog box.

Enables ChartView to retrieve scans from device memory as data becomes available. The acquisition is

active.

Upload Data

During

Acquisition

(automatic control)

Stops ChartView’s transfer of data from the instrument to disk.

Stop Upload

(Ctrl + J)

(manual control)

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-21

Enables ChartView to access device memory for all scans currently available. This function only uploads

scans that are currently available.

Upload Available

Scans

(Ctrl + U) (manual

control)

Enables ChartView to access device memory and upload scans until scanning is complete.

Upload Scans

Until Done

Window

Selecting Bar Graph Meters from ChartView’s Window pull-down menu brings up the Bar Graph window.

This window displays several channels in bar graph format. To activate the display, select the Start button

in the meter toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an active (On) channel. You can select to

view up to 32 meters at a given time. (See page 4-28).

Bar Graph Meters

Analog Meters

Selecting Analog Meters from ChartView’s Window pull-down menu brings up the Analog

Meters window. This window displays several channels in a dial/gage format. To activate the

display, select the Start button in the meter toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an

active (On) channel. You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time. (See page 4-29).

Digital Meters

Selecting Digital Meters from ChartView’s Window pull-down menu brings up the Digital

Meters window to display several channels in numeric format. To activate the display, select

the Start button from the toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an active (On)

channel. You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time. (See page 4-30).

PostView post-acq

data viewer

The “PostView post acquisition data viewer” selection accesses the PostView program. This

independent program allows you to view waveforms recorded by data acquisition programs

such as ChartView, ChartView Plus, and TempView. PostView is detailed in Chapter 5 of this

manual.

4-22

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Device … Interface ¾

Setup IEEE 488

The IEEE 488 Setup dialog box appears. Valid addresses are 0 to 30. DIP switch settings must agree

with this setup. For ChartScan, an IEEE 488 interface card is required for use of IEEE 488 interface.

NetScan devices can not make use of the IEEE 488 interface.

When using ChartView with IEEE 488 applications, you must make use of an IOtech Driver 488/W31, /W95,

or /WNT when made available. In addition, the device must be configured in the Driver 488 and be named

WAVE.

NetScan devices can not make use of the IEEE 488 interface.

The RS-232/422 Setup dialog box appears. If “Yes” is chosen for modem, the RS-232/422 Setup window

changes, allowing you to cancel your call waiting service by entering your cancellation code and your modem

phone number. The Cancel Code pull-down list provides three common code options. Instead of using a

code from the list, you can type in the desired code. Note that the device DIP switch settings must match

those entered in the text boxes.

Setup

RS-232/422

1-16

Comm Port

Baud Rate

Parity

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

None, Odd, or Even

None or RTS/CTS

Handshaking

Modem

No or Yes

*70, 70#, 1170, or type in other acceptable code

Cancel Codes

for Call Waiting

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-23

Brings up the Network Interface Settings dialog box. A valid registration number must be entered (1^stscreen

below) to gain access to the ChartView’s Network Interface support feature. The second dialog box allows users

of NetScan or Net232 to configure the ethernet interface.

Setup Network

The program will generate data from a simulated instrument with no actual hardware concerns.

Simulated

Instrument

Device … Status ¾

Accesses the System Inventory dialog box.

Instrument

Inventory

Brings up selection list for Status, Log configuration, and Log Enable

Alarms

Brings up the Alarm Status box. The Alarm Status box shows the current state of each alarm. The alarm state

appears as either a “1” or “0”, the “1” being digital High, and the “0” being digital Low (0). A one-for-one

correlation between the alarm number and channel can only occur if each channel of a 32 channel [or less]

system is assigned to a dedicated alarm number.

Status

Log configuration

Alarm logging is a feature of ChartView Plus only. Alarm Logging allows you to monitor the Alarm states of the

instrument, and save selected information to a file whenever any of the states change.

Alarm logging is implemented by periodically polling the instrument; the time interval between polls

is about one second. With this in mind, be aware any event that could trigger an alarm [lasting

one second or less], could be missed and not logged.

4-24

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

From the Alarm configuration dialog box, you can define the information that will be saved in the log file.

Options include the Time and Date when the state change occurred, the Alarm number, the Channel(s) that

tripped the alarm along with the current reading, and the state of the alarm itself or all alarms, either 1 or 0.

Additionally you can define the character that is used to separate the information in the file. This is useful if

you want to read the file into a program that presents the information in a tabular format, such as Microsoft

Excel.

By using combinations of option settings you can define how the alarm log file is filled. If you choose not to

save Alarm ID's (Alarm numbers) in combination with saving All Alarm States, your Alarm file will be saved with

one line of text each time an Alarm state change is detected during polling. The line will contain the optional

Time and Date and 32 digits, one for each alarm, set to either 0 or 1. The left most digit being Alarm one, the

rightmost Alarm 32. You can not choose to save channel information if you have selected not to save Alarm

ID's.

The following example shows what the Alarm log entries look like if this configuration is selected:

1:21:10 PM 10/29/98

1:21:11 PM 10/29/98

1:21:13 PM 10/29/98

1:21:14 PM 10/29/98

00000000000000000000000000000000

01000000000000000000000000000000

11000000000000000000000000000000

00000000000000000000000000000000

If you choose to log Alarm ID's and multiple Alarm state changes are detected during a single poll, multiple

lines of text will be saved in the log file; one for each alarm that had a state change. By examining the optional

Time and Date information you can identify which lines in the Alarm log are associated with Alarms that were

detected during a specific polling event. If you have Alarm ID's enabled, you can also choose to log Channel

information. The channel information contains the channel label and the current reading associated with the

channel. The following example shows what the alarm log entries look like if this configuration is selected:

1:39:46 PM 10/29/98

1:40:11 PM 10/29/98

1:40:12 PM 10/29/98

1:40:27 PM 10/29/98

1:41:10 PM 10/29/98

Alarm-01

Alarm-02

Alarm-01

(CH1-68.72) 1

(CH3-68.54) 1

(CH1-73.22) 0

(CH1-86.36) 1

(CH1-71.42) 0

(CH1-69.98)(CH2-71.24) 0

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-25

Once an alarm log file exists, log enable can be used to activate the logging process; or to disable an

active log. A check-mark (9) preceding Log Enable indicates that the log is active. No check-mark

present indicates the alarm log has not been enabled.

Log Enable

(Ctrl+A)

Brings up the Device Error Status dialog box. This box lists existing error types, including invalid

command and channel configuration errors.

Instrument Error

Status

Brings up the Device System Time dialog box. You can adjust the time and date settings from this

box.

Instrument

Realtime Clock

Device Status Dialog Boxes

Device … Configuration ¾

A Device Expanded Menu (obtained with use of the F12 Key)

You can expand the Device pull-down menu by pressing the F12 function key (on your computer keyboard) prior to

pulling down the menu. After pressing F12, the pull-down menu will show a listing entitled “Configuration.” The

expanded-menu setting is not saved in the configuration file when exiting ChartView. If the expanded menu is

desired, you must press F12 each time you start ChartView. This expanded menu is typically not used by the

operator. The Raw Thermocouple Input and Raw Temperature Sensor Input selections primarily exist as an aid in

troubleshooting by experienced technicians.

4-26

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Setup

Accesses the Setup Window for configuring channels and alarms. From the

channels & alarms dialog box, you can select the Acquisition Setup and Data

Destination dialog boxes.

Channels & Alarms Ctrl+L

Accesses the Acquisition Setup dialog box. From the Acquisition Setup box,

you can select the Channels & Alarms dialog box, as well as the Data

Destination dialog box.

Acquisition

Ctrl+C

Accesses the Setup Window for assigning the Data Destination and provides a

means of configuring the Auto Re-arm feature for ChartView Plus (see page

4-42). From the Data Destination dialog box you can directly access the

Acquisition Setup and the Channels & Alarms dialog boxes.

Data Destination

Bar Graph, Analog, and Digital Meters

Overview

This section pertains to channel data display screens (windows, or dialog boxes) other than the main

chart screen (ChartView’s main window).

After a brief discussion and illustration of each meter type, commonalties to these three types of meters

is presented. These common areas include: Toolbars, Pull-Down Menus, and two special Pop-Up

Menus, one for configuring the meters, and the other for replacing a represented channel with another.

Note:

The acquisition-to-disk has a higher priority then the updating of Charts, Meters, and the Reading

column. Therefore, data is displayed as soon as the acquisition task is satisfied. As the scan rate is

increased, the acquisition-to-disk task will take up more processor (CPU) time and the displaying of

data will be updated as time allows. If you select linear conversion (mX + b) as the units for channel

configuration you should expect a further impact on real time display performance. The mX + b

conversion is discussed in the section, Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box.

The meter channels selected are independent of the group chart assignments.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-27

Bar Graph Meters

Selecting Bar Graph Meters from ChartView’s Window pull-down menu brings up the Bar Graph

window. This window displays several channels in bar graph format. To activate the display, select

the Start button from the toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an active (On) channel. You

can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time.

Bargraph Meters, Shown with 3 Meters Selected for Viewing

Note 1: Double-clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop-up

menu. A single click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up a configuration pop-up

menu (item H). Both of these pop-up menus are discussed in the section, Meters Configuration Menu.

The items in this window are as follows:

A - Start

B - Stop

C - Reset Peak Hold

D - Stay On Top

E - Print

F - Rows x Columns

G - Number of Meters

H - Configuration Pop-Up Menu

These items are discussed in more detail, following the description of Digital Meters.

Configuration Note:

…. for Bar Graph Meters

For Bar Graph Meters, configure the meter settings by first clicking the right mouse button

anywhere within the meter display area. A pop-up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure

the meter in regard to scale, limits, channel selection, adding peak hold indicators, etc. Refer to the

section entitled Meters Configuration Menu for more detail.

4-28

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Analog Meters

Selecting Analog Meters from ChartView’s Window pull-down menu brings up the Analog Meters

window. This window displays several channels in a dial/gage format. To activate the display, select

the Start button from the toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an active (On) channel. You

can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time.

Analog Meters, Shown with 4 Meters Selected for Viewing

Double-clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop-up menu

(not shown). A single-click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up a configuration

pop-up menu (see Bar Graph Meters figure, item H). Both of these pop-up menus are discussed in the

section, Meters Configuration Menu.

Note that Meter #3 (CH3) in the above figure shows Peak Indicators near the pointer, as well as a

trend indicator in the upper right hand corner of the meter.

The items in this window are as follows:

A- Start

B- Stop

C - Reset Peak Hold E - Print

D - Stay On Top F - Rows x Columns

G - Number of Meters

H - Configuration Pop-Up Menu

These items are discussed in more detail, following the description of the Digital Meters.

Configuration Note:

…. for Analog Meters

For Analog Meters, configure the meter settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere

within the meter display area. A pop-up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meter

in regard to scale, limits, channel selection, adding peak hold indicators, etc. Refer to the section

entitled Meters Configuration Menu for more detail.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-29

Digital Meters

Selecting Digital Meters from ChartView’s Window pull-down menu brings up the Digital Meters

window to display several channels in numeric format. To activate the display, select the Start button

from the toolbar. At least one meter must be assigned to an active (On) channel. You can select to

view up to 32 meters at a given time.

Digital Meters, Shown with 6 Meters Selected for Viewing

Note: Although the Digital Meters instrument is capable of displaying 6 decimal places, there is not 6

place accuracy in the readings. Due to transducer and transient noises, the accuracy of voltage

readings is ± 0.02%. Temperature accuracy varies, depending on thermocouple type; with type J

having ± 0.5°C for a range of -100°C to +760°C. For your application, please refer to

specifications of the signal conditioning card(s) used, as well as the thermocouple type, and the

data acquisition instrument used (TempScan, MultiScan, ChartScan, or NetScan).

Double-clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop-up menu

(not shown). A single-click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up a configuration

pop-up menu (see Bar Graph Meters figure, item H). Both of these pop-up menus are discussed in the

section, Meters Configuration Menu. Note that each of the above channels shows a trend indicator on

the left side of the meter.

The items in this window are as follows:

A - Start

B - Stop

C - N/A

D - Stay On Top

E - Print

F - Rows x Columns

G - Number of Meters

H - Configuration Pop-Up Menu

Toolbar items A through G are discussed in more detail in the following section, Meter Toolbars.

Item H is discussed in the subsequent section, Meters Configuration Menu.

Configuration Note:

…. For Digital Meters

Configure the Digital Meters settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere within the

digital meter display area. A pop-up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meter in

regard to scale, limits, channel selection, etc. Refer to the section entitled Configure Meter

Settings for more detail.

4-30

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Meter Toolbars

The toolbars for the three meter types are identical, with exception that the Digital Meters toolbar does

not have a Reset Peak Hold button (item C in the following figure).

Meters Toolbar Buttons

Item Name

Function

Start

Stop

Starts meters.

Stops meters.

Reset Peak Hold

Indicator

Resets the floating markers. Upon reset, the markers will instantly

adjust to indicate the highest and lowest values reached since the time

of the reset. This feature does not apply to the Digital Meters.

Stay On Top

(Push pin)

Locks or unlocks the meter window on top of other windows.

Sends the meter(s) display image to connected printer.

Opens a small menu with “row x column” arrangement options. Example:

When the number of meters is 6 the grid options will be: 6x1, 3x2, 2x3, and

2x4 with the first number being the number of rows. If you then select 3x2,

you will have 3 rows of meters with 2 meters per row.

Rows x Columns

Specifies the number of meters to appear on the screen.

A maximum number of 32 meters can be selected.

Number of Meters

Meter Pull-Down Menus

The meters windows each have a Control and View pull-down menu, as indicated by the following

figure. The functions of these menus can also be implemented by using the toolbar buttons.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-31

Meters Configuration Menu

A meters configuration menu (lower left corner of figure) will appear when you place the mouse

pointer over a meter and click the right-hand mouse button. The menu allows you to access various

dialog boxes for changing parameters for an individual meter, or simultaneously for a group of meters.

The steps for configuring a meter are detailed below.

Note: The Show Peak Hold Indicator / Reset Peak Hold Indicator selections are not an option for

Digital Meters and do not appear on the configuration window for digital meters.

Meter Configuration Menu and Related Dialog Boxes

Configuring a Meter

1. Bring up the desired meter group (Bar Graph, Analog, or Digital).

2. Place the mouse cursor over the meter you desire to reconfigure.

3. Click on the right mouse button. A Meters Configuration Menu, similar to that in the above figure, will

appear.

Note: The Show Peak Hold Indicator / Reset Peak Hold Indicator selections are not an option for

Digital Meters and do not appear on the configuration window for digital meters.

4. Select the desired option from the meter configuration menu.

5. If a dialog box is required, for example, to change a limit, simply enter in the new value in the

appropriate parameter box and press “Apply” or “OK.” Pressing “Apply” implements your changes,

but keeps the dialog box open, allowing you to make additional changes. Pressing “OK” implements

your changes and closes the dialog box.

The following table, as well as the preceding figure, serve as a quick reference to meters configuration.

4-32

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Configure Meter Settings, Function Descriptions

Description

Function

Select Channel

Select a new channel for display. The selected channel will replace the one currently seen in

the meter. Note, double-clicking the left mouse button in the meter region will also bring up

a dialog box that allows you to select a new channel.

Set Scale

Set the high and low points of the scale, as well as define the decimal place format.

Show Peak Hold

Indicator

Places high and low uni-directional floating markers on the scale to indicate the highest and

lowest values reached up to the present time. This feature does not apply to the Digital

Meters selection.

Reset Peak Hold

Indicator

Resets the floating markers. Upon reset, the markers will instantly adjust to indicate the

highest and lowest values reached since the time of the reset. This feature does not apply

to the Digital Meters selection.

Show Trend

Indicator

Displays a pointer to indicate the direction of the trend. Note, during rapid meter

fluctuations the increase and decrease pointers will appear to blink simultaneously.

Set Limits

Provides a way of establishing high and low limit set-points.

Show Limits

Displays limits in color (red for high, blue for low). The color is applied to scale regions >

the set limit values. For Digital Meters, the limits are indicated by red numbers and an

upper red bar for hitting or exceeding the high limit; and blue numbers and a lower blue bar

when reaching or exceeding the low limit.

Properties

Allows setting and showing limits, as well as opening the Scale dialog box.

You can access a different dialog box from the one initially selected. For example, from the Set Scale

dialog box you can select Limits to access the Set Limits/Show Limits display, as well as select “Misc.”

to “Show Trend Indicator” and “Show Peak Hold Indicators.” You can use the Simulated Instrument

mode to familiarize yourself with various meter configuration options.

Setup Window

The Setup Window is used to configure channels, setup acquisition parameters, and assign data

destinations, and configure the auto re-arm feature. The Setup Window contains three tabs: Channel

and Alarm Setup, Acquisition Setup, and Data Destination. Once in the Setup window you can access

an inactive dialog box by clicking on its related tab. The three tabs remain visible; regardless of which

dialog box is active.

Access the Setup window using one of the following methods:

•

Use the Setup pull-down menu (on ChartView’s main window) and select the desired

dialog box (Channel and Alarm Setup, Acquisition Setup, or Data Destination)

•

Double-click the Channel Configuration button (item 8, main window figure), then click

on the appropriate dialog box tab

Channel & Alarm Setup Dialog Box

The Channel and Alarm Setup dialog box consists primarily of a configuration spread-sheet. The

dialog box allows you to configure the input channels, and displays them. Each row shows a single

channel and its configuration. The number of rows may vary (depending on the number of channels

present in your acquisition system). Four of the columns (On, Type, Label, and Units) allow blocks of

cells to be selected and altered at the same time. Clicking on one of these column headers selects the

entire column.

When a cell is selected, the message box reveals a note, and often a related pull-down list. In the

following figure, the cell for channel “Type” has been selected. This caused the “CHOOSE TYPE->”

message to appear, along with the type pull-down menu. Depending on the column, you can make

changes to the information contained in the cell by either of the following methods:

•

double clicking the cell with the mouse

highlighting the cell and typing in the new value or label

selecting from a list

using copy (Ctrl+C) and paste (Ctrl+V) functions

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-33

Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box

Channel and Alarm Setup, Button Descriptions

1 – Turn On All Channels (Alt + N)

2 – Turn Off All Channels Not Assigned to Charts (Alt + F)

3 – Turn On/Off Channel Readings (Alt + R)

4 – Print Entire Channel and Alarm Setup (Alt + P)

The following table indicates message and pull-down menu aspects of the Channel and Alarm Setup

Dialog Box.

Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box

Message and Pull-Down List Aspects

Column

Message

List*

---

N/A

ENABLE or DISABLE

Reading

Type

Label

Units

Low

High

Hyst

Alarm#

N/A

---

CHOOSE TYPE->

ENTER LABEL (MAX = 8 LETTER)

CHOOSE UNITS->

---

ENTER DESIRED LOW LIMIT

ENTER DESIRED HIGH LIMIT

ENTER DESIRED HYSTERESIS

SELECT AN ALARM#

*A “3” indicates the associated item has a pull-down list from

which a selection can be made.

The pull-down list selection or copy/paste process are useful for making multiple channel configuration

changes within a column. You may double-click within a cell to make your way through all the

possible selections. The selections are repetitive; in other words, you will eventually advance to the

same selection with which you started.

The following text provides more detail regarding the channel and alarm configuration parameters.

The number preceding the text refers to the column number with “1” being the left-hand column and

“10” being the right-hand column of the Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box.

4-34

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Channel Configuration Columns

1) Channel (CH)  This column serves only as a channel number indicator. The channel number cannot be

changed from this column.

2) On  The On column allows you to enable a channel for data collection. When a cell or block of cells in

this column is selected, a selection box will appear that allows “On” to enable or “Off” to disable the

channel. Double-clicking a cell in this column toggles the channel’s enable status. Clicking the Make All

Channels Active button enables (turns all channels “on”). Clicking on the Make All Channels Inactive

button disables all channels (turns them “off”), with the exception that channels assigned to charts can only

be turned off from the display configuration setup.

3) Readings  The reading column displays the scanning device input readings. The column is activated

when you select the Enable SpreadSheet Reading button. The column’s values are real-time channel values

from the instrument and cannot be altered by the user. This column will update the readings as fast as the

computer will allow.

Note: Other areas of the SpreadSheet cannot be altered while the channel Readings column is enabled.

4) Type  A block of cells in this column can be selected for convenience of single type selection.

Double-clicking a cell will select the next available type.

5) Label  The Label column identifies the input channel by descriptive name. The label is used when

selecting a channel in the trigger and chart selection lists. The label column automatically uses the channel

number as a default. You can change the label to any alpha-numeric designation not exceeding eight

characters. Each label used must be unique (specific) to its designated channel.

6) Units  Cells in the Units column are dependent on the Type selected and automatically change when the

type is changed, for example temperature units will be replaced by volts units when changing from a

thermocouple type to a volts type.

If the channel is configured for Temperature, the units automatically change to °C (default); at this point,

you have the option of selecting a different engineering temperature unit (°F, °K, °and R). Note that the

mX+b equation, discussed in the following text, is typically not used for temperature readings, since

temperature data will be linear. However, you can use the equation in temperature applications, for

example: setting b to -32 in order to watch deviations from freezing point when temperature is in °F.

In addition, with ChartView Plus you can subtract a reference channel from the mX+b equation to obtain a

temperature differential, as indicated in the following example.

Example:

A heated room has 2 thermocouples (T1 for CH1 and T2 for CH2); with T1 being in the center of the room

and T2 positioned at an outer wall. If the outer wall is monitored to ensure a temperature within ±2°F (of

the temperature indicated by thermocouple T1), then CH1 can be used as a reference channel such that its

value will be subtracted from the actual value for channel 2. Assume the central thermocouple is reading

90.5°F and the outer thermocouple (for CH2) is reading 89.0°F. In this case, we can use the equation so

channel 2’s charted reading will not be of the actual temperature, but will be the differential between CH1

and CH2, e.g.:

y = (mX + b) - ref. chan; where:

y = Channel 2’s charted value (a temperature

differential)

m = 1

b = 0

X = CH2

ref. Chan. = CH1

Channel 2’s charted value = (1 x CH2 + 0) - CH1

Channel 2’s charted value = (1 x 89.0°F + 0) - 90.5°F

Channel 2’s charted value = -1.5°F

Note: The reference channel feature is only available with ChartView Plus.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-35

Note: When using a channel as a reference channel, remember that lower numbered channels are calculated

ahead of higher numbered channels, e.g., CH1 is calculated ahead of CH2. This makes a difference

when subtracting a reference channel in regard to the time aspect of the reference value.

If the channel is configured for Volts, the units automatically change to V; at this point, you have the

option of selecting the millivolt unit (mV). The user can also change each channel to apply a linear

equation (mX+b) to the data. When the mX+b option is selected the Configure Engineering Units dialog

box is displayed. You are prompted to define “m” and “b” and the engineering units label; as well as which

standard units the mX+b equation should be applied to. The engineering units chosen will be displayed in

the “Units” column, and the “mX+b” equation will be applied to the reading from the device before the

reading is displayed or written to disk.

The mX+b option is convenient for obtaining a value that has a linear relation to a channel reading.

X is the scanned voltage value read back from the acquisition device

m is [but not limited to] a proportionality constant or gain factor, but not zero.

b is the offset value (the value of the calculated reading when the scanned value is “zero”).

Alarm Configuration Columns

1) Low Limit  Set alarm low limit.

2) High Limit  Set alarm high limit.

3) Hysteresis  A hysteresis value can be set for each channel to avoid a “chatter” problem.

See Appendix C, Set Point Hysteresis, page C-27.

4) Alarm #  You can assign one alarm number (1 to 32) to a channel. Any number of channels can be

assigned to the same alarm number. A given digital output will be set “true” (1) if at least one of the

common channels (assigned to a single alarm) enters an alarm state.

Acquisition Setup Dialog Box

The information entered in the Acquisition Setup dialog box is used by the Arm Acquisition command

to set up the acquisition of data to disk. When the trigger is satisfied, the scans are collected at the

selected scan frequency and stored to disk in the designated file.

The Acquisition Setup dialog box can be accessed in one of three ways: a) clicking on the Channel

Configuration button (item 8 in Main Window figure), b) clicking on the Acquisition Setup tab from

the Channels or Data Destination dialog boxes, c) using the Setup pull-down menu and selecting

Acquisition.

ChartScan, NetScan, and MultiScan have two modes of data acquisition, these are:

•

Normal mode

High-speed, single-channel mode (burst mode)

4-36

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

The mode is selected from the lower left-hand portion of the dialog box. The following figure

represents a screen capture with normal mode selected.

Acquisition Setup Dialog Box, Normal Mode

The following figure depicts components of an acquisition. The Trigger and Stop Points represent the

entries described under the Event Configuration selection in the table on the following page.

In the “High-speed, single-channel” mode the Scan Intervals parameters section is replaced with a

High-Speed Setup parameters section with boxes for selection of Channel and Scan Rate, as indicated

in the following figure.

In the High-speed, single-channel (burst mode), all ChartView display functions are

intentionally disabled. Data acquisition and storage to disk are the only services that

remain functional. When you select the High-speed, single channel mode, a Warning

dialog box appears with this information, providing you with the opportunity to cancel if

desired.

Reference Note: Burst mode operational constraints are discussed in greater detail on

page 4-39.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-37

Acquisition Setup

Options

Parameter

Event Configuration

Trigger: Set a trigger scan in the Acquisition by using one of the following:

Keyboard - Use Console Trigger dialog box to start trigger scan.

Note: If the Keyboard Trigger is selected the use of Pre-trigger is disabled.

External TTL - Use an external signal to start the trigger scan.

Channel Value - Use specified value of a given channel.

Alarm - Use an Alarm value to start the trigger scan.

Absolute Time - Use a time of day to start the trigger scan.

Note: If Absolute Time is selected, the use of Auto Re-arm is disabled.

Stop:

Set a stop scan in the Acquisition by using one of the above selections or Count (as

specified below). Keyboard isn’t applicable. If a MultiScan, ChartScan, or NetScan is

connected and High-Speed Single-Channel (Burst Mode) is selected, then “Count from

trigger” is the only Stop available for the event configuration.

Count: Specify a number of scans to be read before a stop scan is set.

Acquisition Parameters

Scan Counts:

Specify the number of scans in an acquisition

Pre-trigger

Post Stop

Average weight: Average weight can be specified only when in the Normal Mode. The value for

the average weight determines the number of samples to be averaged when in

Normal Mode. Values of 1, 2, 4, and 8 are for high-speed multiple channel

applications for thermocouples and DC voltages where noise filtering is not an

issue.

Values of 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 are recommended for AC noise rejection.

Scan Intervals: Time between scans (frequency of scans)

Pre-trigger and Post Stop

Post-trigger

Use one Interval

High Speed Setup:

Allows for channel and scan rate entries for high-speed, single channel mode.

Note: These parameters cannot be altered while an acquisition is in progress.

Note: If Normal Mode is selected, channels assigned to a chart must be (and will be) enabled in the Acquisition.

The assigned channels will be “ON” in the

Channel Configuration portion of the

Channel and Alarm Setup spreadsheet and

can not be turned off while assigned to a

chart. However; additional channels (not

assigned to charts) can still be enabled and

disabled from the Channel and Alarm Setup

sheet.

Example. In the figure to the left:

(a) Channel 1 and Channel 2 can not be

turned “OFF.” Each is assigned to a chart.

(b) Both Channel 3 and Channel 4 can be

turned “OFF.” Neither is assigned to a chart.

channel will result in a message box similar to

that in the figure.

Normal Mode, CH1 and CH2 Assigned to a Chart

4-38

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Burst Mode, Operational Issues

Acquisition Setup Dialog Box, High-Speed, Single-Channel Mode

The Burst Mode, also referred to as High-speed, single-channel mode, is selected with a radio-button located on

the lower left of the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box. The following bulleted issues apply to Burst Mode operations.

•

When in the High-speed, single-channel (burst mode), all ChartView display functions are intentionally

disabled. Data acquisition and storage to disk are the only services that remain functional. When you

select the High-speed, single channel mode, a Warning message box appears, as indicated in the

following figure.

This Warning Appears Prior to Enabling the Burst Mode

•

The Burst Mode channel will be the only channel enabled in the instrument. This is regardless of the

ON/OFF status indicated on the Channel and Alarm Setup spreadsheet (located on the Setup Channel

Types, Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Window).

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-39

•

When using Burst Mode, data saved to disk can still be viewed in PostView. However, the PostView

chart setup will only allow you to select the single channel (previously selected in ChartView as the

high-speed Burst Mode channel).

Example: If Channel 4 is selected as the High-Speed Setup Channel (in ChartView’s Acquisition Setup),

and data is acquired and saved to disk, then the only channel that can be selected for PostView’s

chart display is Channel 4.

When you switch operation from Burst Mode, back to Normal Mode…

a) channels that were assigned to Charts will automatically re-enable, i.e., returned to an ON state.

b) channels that were not assigned to Charts, but were set to ON prior to selecting Burst Mode, will not

return to the ON state automatically.

c) the channel that was selected for Burst Mode will remain in the ON state, unless turned off by the user.

Measuring AC Voltage, or AC RMS Voltage

Introduction

When someone talks about measuring AC voltage, they are usually talking about measuring

“AC RMS,” which is the effective periodic value of the voltage for one full cycle. RMS (Root Mean

Square) is the square root of the average of the squares of the signal being measured.

ChartScan, MultiScan and NetScan can use multiple channels to measure AC RMS voltages; but are

restricted to the use of one channel when measure actual AC voltage at 60 cycles. The following

questions and answers should help to clarify this point.

Question 1: Can I measure multiple channels of 60 cycle waveforms with ChartScan, MultiScan, or

NetScan?

Answer:

No. Measuring a 60 cycle (or 50 cycle) waveform with ChartScan, MultiScan, or

NetScan requires the use of High-speed, single-channel Burst Mode. While in this mode,

only one channel can be measured. See related questions 2 and 3.

Question 2: How do I measure a 60 cycle waveform using just one channel?

Answer:

To measure AC, you must sample at a rate fast enough to see every cycle line.

Multiplying the number of cycles by 10 will provide an adequate sampling rate. For

example: for 60 Hz you should sample at 600 samples/sec; and for 50 Hz you should

sample at 500 samples/sec.

To obtain these sample rates [with ChartScan, MultiScan, or NetScan], use the

High-speed, single-channel (Burst Mode).

Question 3: Can I measure multiple channels of 60 cycle “AC RMS” voltage with ChartScan,

MultiScan, or NetScan?

Answer:

Yes, providing the amplitude of the signals falls within the range of the card. For

example, if your amplitude was 120V you would need to use a high voltage signal-

conditioning card. Note that the CSN14/HV/S card has a high range of ±250V. To

measure multiple channels of 60 cycle AC RMS (or 50 Hz, AC RMS in Europe), perform

the steps in the following section, Measuring AC RMS.

4-40

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Measuring AC RMS

The following steps pertain to measuring AC RMS voltage.

1. Determine the peak voltage of the input signal.

2. Based on the value from step 1, select the appropriate VAC option. This is done in ChartView’s

Channel and Alarm Setup window (see following figure).

Choosing A Voltage Type

3. In the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box, set the Average Weight to “32.”

Setting Average Weight to 32 (in the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box)

4. Run the acquisition as normal.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-41

Data Destination Dialog Box

Data Destination

The Data Destination portion of the box is used to assign a filename and folder location for data, select an

Excel or binary format (.TXT or .IOT respectively), and to select optional Time/Date and/or Alarm Stamps

(to be included in the data) if desired. The dialog box can be accessed from the Channel and Alarm Setup

and Acquisition Setup dialog boxes by selecting the Data Destination tab, or by selecting Data Destination

from the Setup pull-down menu. You can quickly access the Channel and Alarm Setup and Acquisition

Setup dialog boxes by selecting the appropriate folder tab image located near the top of the Data

Destination dialog box.

Destination Dialog Box

The following items describe key areas of the Data Destination Dialog box. If you have

ChartView Plus, you can use the lower section of the Data Destination box to configure Auto Re-arm

as described in the sub-section below, entitled Auto Re-arm (for ChartView Plus Only).

Folder:

Filename:

Format:

The drive and directory where data will be written.

Name of data file.

File saved as an Excel (.TXT) or Binary (.IOT) format.

Scan Format: Data marked with Time/Date Stamp and/or Alarm Stamp.

Note: These parameters cannot be altered while the acquisition is in progress.

Auto Re-arm (for ChartView Plus only)

Auto Re-arm is a feature available with ChartView Plus. As seen in the previous figure, Auto Re-arm

is accessed from the Data Destination box. The Auto Re-arm feature allows for a large number of

acquisitions to take place automatically, with each acquisition using the same configuration settings.

With Auto Re-arm, the system immediately re-arms itself, waiting for the trigger to be satisfied, as soon

as the previous trigger block is terminated.

Auto Re-arm allows you to choose one of the following three options:

•

capture one trigger block (default, Auto Re-arm disabled)

capture multiple trigger blocks in one file

capture multiple trigger blocks in indexed files

4-42

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

Why use Auto Re-arm?

You can use Auto Re-arm as a convenient way to monitor and analyze specific types of trigger events.

For example, if you set Channel 1 going above 30°C as a trigger, you can choose to repeat 100 (or

more) acquisitions with this same trigger criteria (Channel 1 > 30°C). Whether you select to capture

the trigger blocks in one file, or each in a separate file, each of the data acquisitions will occur

automatically; and each will make use of your set configuration.

Disabling Auto Re-arm

To disable Auto Re-arm, simply use Auto Re-arm’s default setting of “Capture one trigger block.”

When you capture only one trigger block you are, in essence, not making use of the automatic re-arm

feature.

Note: The trigger event, trigger by absolute time, is not suitable for automatic re-arming. In this instance, the

default of “Capture one trigger block” is automatically forced.

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-43

Chart Setup Wizard

Reference Note: For very first time start-up of ChartView and a program tutorial (that includes a first

time use of the Chart Setup Wizard) refer to Chapter 1.

Introduction

Chart Setup Wizard is a feature of ChartView, ChartView Plus and PostView. The feature allows you

to set up your initial chart display configuration using an automated method, or manually create a new

display configuration. The following points are important in regard to the Chart Setup Wizard.

•

You can edit the chart display by accessing the Display Configuration Setup dialog box from

the Chart pull-down menu; or by clicking of the Chart Setup button in the main window

toolbar. This method does not use the Chart Setup Wizard and does not reset your chart

display configuration setup.

•

Activating the Chart Setup Wizard will reset your chart Display Configuration Setup. It

will not reset your Channel and Alarm configuration.

Chart Setup Wizard, as described in this text, covers the expanded setup applications available

with ChartView Plus. The basic ChartView program does not permit overlapping channels or

having more than 1 chart group.

•

Expanded applications (ChartView Plus) can be activated by use of a special code available

from the factory. Please consult your service representative for more detailed information.

Activating the Chart Setup Wizard from the Chart pull-down menu will result in the following dialog

box and warning.

The Chart Setup Wizard window appears when you attempt to run ChartView for the very first time, as

well as when a configuration file does not exist. When a configuration file already exists, you can

easily access the Chart Setup Wizard by selecting Wizard in the Chart pull-down menu. It is important

to realize running the Chart Setup Wizard will result in a reset of your display setup; it will not,

however, change your channel and alarm configuration (with the exception of new display channels

now enabled).

The chart setup determines how your ChartView Main Window will appear in regard to the following:

•

number of chart groups available for viewing

number of charts shown for each selected group

the number of overlapping channels in each chart (not to exceed 4)

You can choose to manually create a configuration, or have one created automatically. The automatic

setup method offers three choices: Simple, Moderate, and Advanced. Moderate and advanced are only

available with ChartView Plus.

Note: You can use Chart Setup Wizard to quickly set up a large number of charts. You can then

fine-tune the layout manually via the Manual Chart Creation feature.

4-44

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

A Manual Chart Creation, Create Charts button allows you to bypass the Chart Setup Wizard and enter a

manual mode. This option makes use of ChartView’s Display Configuration feature (reference page 4-9).

Manual chart creation allows you to vary the number of assigned channels per chart, as well as vary the number

of charts per group.

Chart Setup Wizard, Simple Mode

Chart Setup Wizard, Automatic Setup Options

Setup Type

Simple

Group Setup

(for Chart Groups)

1 group only

Chart Setup

Channel Setup

Up to 16 charts

1 channel per chart

Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart

1 group only

Moderate

Up to 64 groups

Up to 16 charts per

group

Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart

Advanced

Note : Moderate and Advanced modes of Automatic Chart Creation are only available with ChartView Plus. The

standard ChartView program allows for 1 chart group only, and does not permit overlapping channels.

Note : The Manual Chart Creation, Create Charts button (above figure) allows you to exit the Chart Setup Wizard and

enter a manual create chart display mode.

Automatic Chart Setup with Wizard

The previous figure shows the Simple mode dialog box for Automatic Chart Creation. The following figures show the

Moderate and Advanced mode dialog boxes (available only with ChartView Plus).

Dialog Boxes for Moderate and Advanced Modes of Automatic Chart Creation, ChartView Plus Only

ChartScan User’s Manual

ChartView Software Reference 4-45

It is a simple task to create chart display configurations using the automatic method. The following

steps apply to this feature of Chart Setup Wizard.

1. Select Wizard from the Chart pull-down menu of ChartView’s main window. The New Display

Setup dialog box appears.

2. Click OK on the New Display Setup dialog box. The Wizard setup window appears.

3. Select the desired mode tab (Simple, Moderate, or Advanced). Moderate and advanced modes are

only available with ChartView Plus.

4. Use the pull-down arrows (τ), or use the cursor and type in a new value to make selections for the

number of groups, charts, and channels as applicable.

5. If you desire to start with a channel other than channel 1, use the pull-down arrow and select the

desired starting channel number.

6. When your setup is complete, click on the Automatic Chart Creation, Create Charts button. A

percentage of completion bar will appear, followed by the Channel and Alarm Setup box.

7. Make appropriate configuration changes, if any are desired, including enabling additional

channels; then click on the OK button. After clicking OK, the Main Window appears and you can

begin running charts. The Channel and Alarm Setup section of this chapter contains related

information.

The channels in the setup you create will be automatically enabled and will appear in chart form on

ChartView’s Main Window. The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart (for ChartView Plus

applications), and will be visible when the applicable Group is selected. Only one group of charts can

be viewed at a time.

As mentioned earlier, you can enable additional channels from the Channel and Alarm Setup window.

Enabling additional channels allows you to acquire more data to disk; however, it will not change your

display on ChartView’s Main Window. In other words, you can acquire data from channels you do not

monitor.

Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup

You can bypass Chart Setup Wizard by clicking on the Manual Chart Creation, Create Charts button

in Chart Setup Wizard’s main window. After selecting this option you will be using the Display

Configuration Setup dialog boxes to create a display from scratch, i.e., using a “clean slate” approach.

This is method is detailed with an example, in the section Manually Creating a Display, beginning on

page 4-12.

4-46

ChartView Software Reference

ChartScan User’s Manual

eZ-PostView and ViewXL

Introduction

ChartScan systems can now make use of the post-acquisition data viewing program, eZ-PostView and a

Microsoft Excel add-in known as ViewXL.

eZ-PostView is a time-domain post-acquisition data viewing application that has been integrated with primary data

acquisition software, including DaqView, Personal DaqView, ChartView, LogView, and WaveView.

ViewXL is a Microsoft Excel Add-In that provides setup and data acquisition for personal computers running 32-bit

versions of Microsoft Windows. The features of Excel and the selected data acquisition program, for example,

ChartView, combine seamlessly to form a powerful data acquisition tool.

Documentation for both of these applications is in the Adobe PDF format, and is included on your installation CD.

A brief introduction to each application follows.

eZ-PostView

eZ-PostView Can Be Used without the Presence of Acquisition Hardware

eZ-PostView is a time-domain post-acquisition data

viewing application that has been integrated with

primary data acquisition software, including

DaqView, Personal DaqView, ChartView,

LogView, and WaveView.

The eZ-PostView application provides easy-to-use

post-acquisition analysis capability, and is included

free of charge as a part of product support. From

this application you can display up to eight time-

domain function windows and display up to sixteen

channel traces per window. Data is automatically

scaled to optimize its fit in the window.

From eZ-PostView you can customize window,

channel trace, and cursor colors.

A Screen Capture from eZ-PostView

Once installed, eZ-PostView can be launched from the data-acquisition program by a simple click of the

<View Data> button. As an alternative, the application can be launched independent of the acquisition program

and supported data files can be loaded for viewing.

ChartScan User’s Manual

08-09-02

5-1

eZ-PostView includes the following features:

• File Input Format Support for: DaqView, WaveView, Personal DaqView, ChartView,

Universal File Format UFF-58B.

• Can show 8 Display Windows simultaneously

• Can show 16 Channel Traces per Display Window

• Includes Automatic Data Scaling

• User-Configurable Data Display is provided for channels and trace colors

• Allows for multiple Tiling, or Cascading, of display windows

Reference Note:

As a part of product support, a PDF version of the eZ-PostView User’s Guide, p/n 1086-0926, is

automatically loaded onto your hard drive during software installation. The default location is the

Programs Group, which can be accessed through the Windows Desktop. You can also access the

document directly from the installation CD.

ViewXL

ViewXL is a Microsoft Excel Add-In that provides setup and data acquisition for personal computers

running 32-bit versions of Microsoft Windows. The features of Excel and the selected data acquisition

program, for example, ChartView, combine seamlessly to form a powerful data acquisition tool.

ViewXL:

• Augments Microsoft Excel with data acquisition capability.

• Automatically converts data to engineering units.

• Allows multiple data acquisitions [obtained using auto-rearm] to be

placed into multiple worksheets.

• Can import data from previously acquired data files.

Once the ViewXL add-in is installed, a ViewXL toolbar and related menu appear in Excel.

These provide all configuration and data acquisition controls.

Reference Note:

As a part of product support, a PDF version of the ViewXL document is automatically loaded onto your

hard drive during software installation. The default location is the Programs Group, which can be

accessed through the Windows Desktop. You can also access the document directly from the

installation CD.

5-2

08-09-02

ChartScan User’s Manual

Calibration

Introduction ……6-1

Manual Calibration of Main Unit ……6-6

Offset Calibration of Main Unit ……6-6

Gain Calibration of Main Unit ……6-8

Calibration Setup ……6-1

Non-Volatile Storage of Calibration Constants

……6-2

Hardware Protected RAM ……6-2

Manual Calibration of

Signal Conditioning Cards ……6-10

ScanCal Software Application ……6-3

ScanCal’s Main Window ……6-3

Using ScanCal ……6-3

Interface Parameters

Offset Calibration of Cards ……6-10

Gain Calibration of Low Volts Cards ……6-12

Gain Calibration of High Volts Card ……6-15

Cold Junction Calibration ……6-17

System Inventory

Calibration

Calibration Without ScanCal ……6-5

Password ……6-5

Calibration Mode Indicator ……6-5

Command Active Indicators ……6-5

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,

when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause

equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

Introduction

ScanCal is a Window’s based software program that provides step-by-step calibration instructions. If you

do not wish to use ScanCal, you can manually calibrate the system according to instructions presented later

in this chapter. Note that this chapter has been written for both ChartScan and NetScan devices.

Note: The main unit (ChartScan or NetScan) and signal conditioning cards are calibrated prior to shipment; however,

these items require periodic calibration to ensure accuracy is maintained. The industry standard for this

calibration is once every year.

Note: Main unit calibration is supported only when operating in the Calibration Mode. A specific set of commands is

provided for performing manual calibration.

Calibration Setup

CAUTION

To ensure accurate measurements, calibration must only be performed by authorized

personnel.

Failure to comply with this requirement can result in faulty equipment performance and

necessitate additional services of an authorized metrology lab.

CAUTION

The VDC Calibrator used must meet the following criteria:

1) Range: 0 - 100 mV Resolution: 0.1 µV

2) Range: 0 - 10 V

Resolution: 10 µV

3) Range: 0 - 1000 V

Resolution: 1 mV (for CSN14/HV/S card calibration)

4) Remote sensing terminals. Note that stabilizing capacitors will typically be required at the

point of connection to the main unit due to the relatively low bandwidth of high resolution VDC

calibrators.

Failure to comply with this requirement can result in faulty equipment performance and

necessitate additional services of an authorized metrology lab.

ChartScan User’s Manual, ^1-12-99

Calibration 6-1

CAUTION

The digital voltmeter (or digital multimeter) used to verify calibration voltage accuracy

must meet the following criteria:

1) Minimum Resolution: 6-1/2 digits

2) Minimum DC Accuracy: 0.005% full scale

Failure to comply with this requirement can result in faulty equipment performance and

necessitate additional services of an authorized metrology lab.

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,

when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause

equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

The main main unit and each signal conditioning card are calibrated separately.

Note that the main unit and its signal conditioning cards contain components for saving

calibration constants, allowing for card swapping within a system, card swapping between

systems, and system expansion. Calibration relates to the main unit and cards as follows:

Main Unit: NetScan or ChartScan main chassis, calibrated for offset and gain only.

Signal Conditioning Cards: Calibrated for offset, gain, and cold junction sensor offset (if thermocouples

are used).

Non-Volatile Storage of Calibration Constants

To preserve calibration constants, main unit constants are stored in an on-board battery backed up RAM

and the constants for each signal conditioning card are stored on the card’s EEPROM.

Hardware Protected RAM

Your scanning device contains a security circuit. This circuit disables writing to the portion of battery

backed up RAM which holds the main unit’s calibration constants and calibration password. You must

enable the calibration mode prior to calibrating the main unit or changing the password.

NetScan, Rear Panel

To enable calibration, locate the Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton. (ChartScan User’s

see notes 1 and 2, below). Push the button so it is in the indent position. This enables

writing to RAM.

Note 1: ChartScan users only. Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton.

For units with no calibration pushbutton, a DIP Switch is used instead of the pushbutton, as described in

note 2. ChartScan units that do have the pushbutton will have it located on the rear panel, as in the above

NetScan figure.

Note 2: ChartScan users only (for units with no Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton). If you are using an early

production ChartScan unit, with no calibration pushbutton, then you will enable the calibration mode by

positioning the DIP switch right-most micro-switch (#9) to the “1” (up) position.

6-2 Calibration

ChartScan User’s Manual

CAUTION

Unless you are setting main unit calibration constants or changing the password,

the calibration mode should be disabled.

The calibration mode applies to main unit calibration, and not to the calibration of

signal conditioning cards.

ScanCal Software Application

ScanCal’s Main Window

Select the ScanCal option from the ChartView Program Group. ScanCal’s Main Window will appear. The

window contains pull-down menus, a toolbar, and calibration instructions.

The options available from the pull-down menus (File, Instrument, and Calibrate) are the same as those

offered by the toolbar, with one exception: the Calibrate pull-down menu contains a selection to

Upload Cal Constants.

Icon Legend

Open Interface Parameters

Save Interface Parameters

Setup Interface Parameters

Inventory Instrument System

Calibrate Selected Devices

ScanCal Main Window and Icon Legend

ScanCal Main Window Pull-Down Menus

Using ScanCal

To use ScanCal, simply follow the four steps listed under the word Instructions in ScanCal’s Main Window.

The steps are repeated below, along with the proper tool icon and equivalent pull-down menu option.

Instructions for setting up calibration equipment are contained in specific sections of this chapter, for

example, the section Offset Calibration of Main Unit details how to use a calibration card and either of two

shorting methods.

Step Instruction

Tool Icon

Dip Switch

Pull-down Menu

Verify the interface parameters

File menu

Icon

Click the inventory tool to perform a system inventory.

Select the desired devices from the inventory list.

Click the calibrate tool.

Inventory

Icon

Instrument menu

Calibrate menu

Inventory

Icon

Calibrate

Icon

Note: The following text discusses the use of the tool icons. However, if desired, the pull-down menus

can be used instead.

ChartScan User’s Manual

Calibration 6-3

Interface Parameters

If your data acquisition device interface is set up for Network (ethernet), you should

change the device interface to RS-232 serial communications prior to performing

calibration. Refer to your hardware setup chapter as needed.

1.a Select the DIP Switch toolbar icon to activate the Select & Verify Interface Setup window. This

allows you to select and setup the communication interface used for your scanning system.

Select & Verify Interface Setup

1.b Choose the desired interface by clicking the top pull-down triangle (τ) and then selecting the applicable

interface from the expanded interface list.

1.c Select the DIP switch image that represents your instrument’s DIP switch overlay.

1.d Click the Verify box to make sure the settings are correct.

The Calibration Enable/Disable pushbutton (located on the main unit chassis rear panel) must be in

the indent (enable position) in order to calibrate the main chassis.

Early production ChartScan units (units that have no calibration pushbutton) must have DIP switch

#9 in the 1 (up) position.

After completing the prompt instructions, you can save the calibration settings by selecting the Save

Interface Parameters selection (from the File pull-down menu or toolbar). The settings and

constants will be stored in a file with a .CAL extension.

System Inventory

2. Select the Inventory icon from the toolbar to generate a list of items that make up your scanning

system.

3. Select the items you wish to calibrate.

Calibration

4. Select the Calibration icon from the toolbar to initiate the automatic calibration process. The ScanCal

program will prompt you through the calibration. Be ready to supply the corresponding passwords

when prompted by ScanCal.

ScanCal contains a feature that allows you to view the calibration steps without performing an

actual calibration. This is accomplished by using the Skip this Step button to skip a procedural

step(s). When using this feature the existing calibration settings will not change.

6-4 Calibration

ChartScan User’s Manual

Calibration Without ScanCal

Password

To perform calibration, the calibration mode must be enabled. The Enter Calibration Mode (K) command

enables calibration, where keywordis the five-digit keyword (or password) currently configured for the

unit. Your scanning unit is shipped with a default password of 12345. This password can be modified by

the Change Calibration Keyword (*K) command, once Calibration Mode has been entered. Calibration

mode is ended by executing the End Calibration Mode (E) command.

Attempts to execute calibration commands without entry into calibration mode will result in a

calibration status error.

If the password is lost or forgotten, a new password can be entered after enabling the calibration mode.

This mode is enabled by indenting the Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton. After pushing in the button,

execute the *Kcommand to change the existing password. For more information, refer to the Hardware

Protected RAM section on page 6-2.

Disable writing to RAM after successfully changing the password by setting the Calibration

Enable/Disable Pushbutton to the disable (non-indent) position.

Note to ChartScan users: Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable/Disable

Pushbutton. For these units the calibration mode is enabled by positioning the DIP switch right-most micro-

switch (#9) to the “1” (up) position. Note that ChartScan units with the pushbutton have it located on the rear

panel, as indicated in the NetScan figure (page 6-2).

Mode Indicator

To denote whether or not calibration mode has been activated, bit 7 in the Calibration Status Register will

be set after a valid Kcommand has been executed. This bit is cleared by the Ecommand (see “E Command”

in Appendix A).

You can verify the register status by the U2command. A response of U128indicates that the unit is in the

calibration mode. U2,in the command reference section (Appendix A) contains details regarding this

command.

Command Active Indicators

Since the calibration commands require a few seconds to complete, bit 6 in the Calibration Status

When these indicators are off, a subsequent calibration step can be started.

ChartScan User’s Manual

Calibration 6-5

Calibration of Main Unit

Offset Calibration of Main Unit

Required Equipment

- Shorting bar, or 3 linked banana plugs (see following figure)

- Calibration Card (installed in bottom slot, slot #1, of the main unit)

CAUTION

Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit, or from its expansion chassis

unless the unit is powered “OFF” and has no power sources connected to it.

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist

strap, when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so

could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

6-6 Calibration

ChartScan User’s Manual

1. Ensure the main unit is powered “OFF,” and has no power sources connected to it.

2. If a signal conditioning card is in slot #1 of the chassis, remove the card.

3. Install Calibration Card into Slot #1 (bottom slot) of the main unit.

CAUTION

Do not perform calibration until after the main unit and calibration equipment

have been powered on for at least one hour.

4. With all covers in place, allow the main unit and calibration equipment to warm up (powered on) for at

least 1 hour.

5. Place the Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton (on main unit rear-panel) in the “enable” (indent)

position to enable writing to RAM.

Note to ChartScan users: Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton.

For these units the calibration mode is enabled by positioning the DIP switch right-most micro-switch (#9) to the “1”

(up) position. Note that ChartScan units with the pushbutton have it located on the rear panel, as indicated in the

NetScan figure (page 6-2).

6. If the calibration password has not been changed, enter K12345. If the password has been changed,

enter the K command and new password. This enables the calibration mode.

7. Type U2Xto verify calibration mode. U128should appear, indicating the unit is in calibration mode.

8. Insert banana plugs of shorting option (shorting bar or 3 linked plugs) into -V, +V, and GND binding

posts of calibration card. This short circuits the analog backplane HI and LO voltage inputs and GND

(see previous figure, Calibration Card and Two Shorting Options).

9. Type H0X. The Trigger LED will flash, indicating that offset calibration is in progress. When flashing

stops, the chassis offset calibration is complete.

10. Type U2X. U128should appear, indicating the unit is in calibration mode and that no error has

occurred.

Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows:

Response to U2X

U128

Indication for Calibration Mode

No error

U129

Read Failure (EEPROM Error)

Write Failure (EEPROM Error)

Chksum Err (EEPROM Error)

U130

U132

U136

Cal Err (offset, gain, or temperature

sensor out of range)

U144

U160

Invalid password

Invalid command

ChartScan User’s Manual

Calibration 6-7

Gain Calibration of Main Unit

Required Equipment*

- Volts DC Calibrator

- 22-2 Twisted pairs (to connect calibrator to calibration card)

- Digital Voltmeter, or Digital Multimeter (used for verification of calibration voltages)

- Calibration Card (installed in bottom slot, slot #1, of main unit)

* see required specifications on page 6-2

CAUTION

Offset calibration of main unit must be completed prior to calibrating the main unit for

gain.

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,

when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause

equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

6-8 Calibration

ChartScan User’s Manual

Connect HI, LO, -S, and +S lines from the precision calibrator to the binding posts of the calibration

card, as indicated in the figure above.

Apply -4.4 VDC (minus 4.4 VDC) from the calibrator to the calibration card. Use a precision digital

multimeter to verify voltage accuracy.

Note: You can view the main unit calibration constants by typing:

C#0X QC?

To monitor the chassis calibration voltage type:

*B …to clear the buffer

… selects the main unit (chassis)

C3,90X …to address the backplane

T1,1,0,0X;@X …to trigger the acquisition (Trigger LED flashes); @Xstarts acquisition

U13X …very entry of U13X results in an updated value of voltage in counts

Voltage will appear in counts. For 4.4 volts the reading should be 32038.844 counts.

Note that @X can be used to start or stop the acquisition.

3. Type G0,91X. The Trigger LED will flash, indicating that gain calibration is in progress. When

flashing stops, the chassis gain calibration is complete.

4. Type U2X. U128should appear, indicating the unit is in calibration mode and that no error has

occurred.

5. Apply +4.4 VDC (positive 4.4 VDC) from the calibrator to the calibration card. Use a precision digital

multimeter to verify voltage accuracy.

6. Type G0,91X. The Trigger LED will flash, indicating that gain calibration is in progress. When

flashing stops, the chassis gain calibration is complete.

7. Type U2X. U128should appear, indicating the unit is in calibration mode and that no error has

occurred.

Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows:

Response to U2X

U128

Indication for Calibration Mode

No error

U129

Read Failure (EEPROM Error)

Write Failure (EEPROM Error)

Chksum Err (EEPROM Error)

U130

U132

U136

Cal Err (offset, gain, or temperature

sensor out of range)

U144

U160

Invalid password

Invalid command

8. Type EX. The calibration mode is disabled.

9. Position the Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton in the “non-indent” (disable) position.

Note to ChartScan users: Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable/Disable Pushbutton.

For these units the calibration mode is enabled by positioning the DIP switch right-most micro-switch (#9) to the “1”

(up) position. Note that ChartScan units with the pushbutton have it located on the rear panel, as indicated in the

NetScan figure (page 6-2).

10. Remove power from the main unit and all connected devices.

11. Remove the calibration card from the chassis.

You are now ready to calibrate the signal conditioning cards as described in the following sections of this

chapter.

ChartScan User’s Manual

Calibration 6-9

Calibration of Signal Conditioning Cards

Offset Calibration of Cards

Required Equipment

- BNC Short for CSN14/LV/B cards, see note

- Terminal Type Short for CSN14/LV/T cards, see note

- Banana Plug Type Short for CSN14/LV/S cards, see note

- Type U Subminiature Plug Short for CSN14/TC/P cards, see note

Note: The four types of shorting connectors are illustrated later in this section.

With exception of the type of shorting connector, the offset calibration procedure is identical for each of the

following cards.

CSN14/TC/P

CSN14/LV/S

CSN14/LV/B

CSN14/LV/T

CSN14/HV/S

CAUTION

The main unit (chassis) must be calibrated for offset and gain prior to calibrating the

signal conditioning cards.

CAUTION

Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit, or from its expansion chassis unless

the unit is powered “OFF” and has no power sources connected to it.

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,

when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause

equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

1. Ensure the main unit is powered “OFF,” and has no power sources connected to it.

2. Remove the calibration card (used to calibrate the main chassis) from slot #1.

3. Install the signal conditioning card (which will be used during data acquisition) into slot #1.

CAUTION

Do not perform calibration until after the ChartScan, or NetScan, and calibration

equipment have been powered on for at least one hour. The cards to be calibrated,

including those in an expansion chassis (if used), should be installed prior to the 1 hour

warm-up, and should be in the slots in which they will be used during data acquisition.

4. With all covers in place, allow the ChartScan, or NetScan unit to warm up (powered on) for at least 1

hour; also allow calibration equipment to warm up (powered on) for at least 1 hour.

5. Short-circuit the input channels that will be used for calibration (one calibration channel per card). The

following figure illustrates the four different types of shorting connectors.

6-10 Calibration

ChartScan User’s Manual

1. If the calibration password has not been changed, enter K12345. If the password has been changed,

enter the K command and the current password. This enables the calibration mode.

2. Type U2Xto verify calibration mode. U128should appear, indicating the unit is in calibration mode.

3. Type H1X. The Trigger LED will flash, indicating that offset calibration is in progress for Channel 1.

4. Type U2X. U128should appear, indicating the unit is in calibration mode and no errors have occurred.

Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follow:

Response to U2X

U128

Indication for Calibration Mode

No error

U129

Read Failure (EEPROM Error)

Write Failure (EEPROM Error)

Chksum Err (EEPROM Error)

Cal Err (offset, gain, or temperature sensor out of range)

Invalid password

U130

U132

U136

U144

U160

Invalid command

10. Repeat steps for each additional calibration channel, using the Hcommand, channel number and X.

11. When offset calibration is complete for all cards, remove the shorting connectors.

12. Reinstall original card connectors as applicable.

You are now ready to perform gain calibration for the signal conditioning cards, as described in one or both

of the following two gain calibration sections. The first gain section is for low volts cards (including the

CSN14/TC/P card); while the second gain section applies to the high volts card, CSN14/HV/S.

ChartScan User’s Manual

Calibration 6-11

Gain Calibration of Low Volts Cards

Required Equipment*

- Volts DC Calibrator

- 22-2 Twisted pairs (to connect calibrator to calibration card)

- BNC Harness (for CSN14/LV/B cards), see note

-Terminal Type Harness for CSN14/LV/T cards, see note

- Banana Plug Type Harness CSN14/LV/S cards, see note

-Type U Subminiature Plug Harness for CSN14/TC/P cards, see note

- Digital Voltmeter, or Digital Multimeter

*see required specifications on page 6-2

Note: The four types of harnesses are illustrated later in this section.

With exception of the type of harness (see following figure), the gain calibration procedure is identical for

each of the following cards.

CSN14/TC/P

CSN14/LV/S

CSN14/LV/B

CSN14/LV/T

Reference Note: For gain calibration of the CSN14/HV/S card, refer to the section entitled,

Gain Calibration for High Volts Cards, beginning on page 6-15.

CAUTION

The main unit (chassis) must be calibrated for offset and gain; and the signal

conditioning cards must be calibrated for offset prior to calibrating the signal

conditioning cards for gain.

CAUTION

Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit, or from its expansion chassis

unless the unit is powered “OFF” and has no power sources connected to it.

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist

strap, when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so

could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION

Do not perform calibration until after the main unit and calibration equipment have

been powered on for at least one hour. The cards to be calibrated, including those in

an expansion chassis (if used), should be installed prior to the 1 hour warm-up, and

should be in the slots in which they will be used during data acquisition.

6-12 Calibration

ChartScan User’s Manual

1. Connect an applicable calibration harness to each card. Refer to figure below.

ChartScan User’s Manual

Calibration 6-13

2. Apply calibration voltage from the precision calibrator to the first channel of each card (see following

table), and verify with a digital multimeter. Requirements for both devices are specified in Required

Equipment.

Volts DC

Slot # 1

Slot # 2

G17,1X

Slot # 3

G33,1X

Slot # 4

G49,1X

Slot # 5

G65,1X

Slot # 6

G81,1X

Slot # 7 Slot # 8

-50 mV G1,1X

+50 mV G1,1X

-100 mV G1,11X

+100 mV G1,11X

-1.0 V

+1.0 V

-5.0 V

+5.0 V

-10 V

G97,1X

G113,1X

G17,11X

G17,12X

G17,13X

G17,14X

G33,11X

G33,12X

G33,13X

G33,14X

G49,11X

G49,12X

G49,13X

G49,14X

G65,11X

G65,12X

G65,13X

G65,14X

G81,11X

G81,12X

G81,13X

G81,14X

G97,11X G113,11X

G97,12X G113,12X

G97,13X G113,13X

G97,14X G113,14X

G1,12X

G1,13X

G1,14X

+10 V

Note: In the slot columns, the digit after the G is the channel number and the number immediately preceding

the X assigns the voltage value, e.g., G1,1X means “Calibrate Gain for channel 1, ±50 mV.”

3. After each calibration type U2Xand check for a return of U128to confirm no errors.

Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows:

Response to U2X

U128

Indication for Calibration Mode

No error

U129

Read Failure (EEPROM Error)

Write Failure (EEPROM Error)

Chksum Err (EEPROM Error)

Cal Err (offset, gain, or temperature sensor out of range)

Invalid password

U130

U132

U136

U144

U160

Invalid command

4. After completing the gain calibration of all cards, type EXto end the calibration mode.

5. Type U2Xto confirm calibration mode is disabled. A return of U000confirms this.

Note: You can view the calibration constants by typing an entry similar to the following:

C#1X QC?

…for slot #1

You can monitor the calibration voltage by typing an entry similar to the following:

…to clear the buffer

C1,1X

…to addresses the channel, this example is for slot #1, channel 1

T1,1,0,0X;@X … to trigger the acquisition (Trigger LED flashes); ); @Xstarts acquisition

U13X every entry of U13X results in an updated value of voltage in counts

Note that @X can be used to start or stop the acquisition.

6-14 Calibration

ChartScan User’s Manual

Gain Calibration of High Volts Cards

Required Equipment*

- Volts DC Calibrator

- 22-2 Twisted pairs (to connect calibrator to calibration card)

- Banana Plug Type Harness for CSN14/HV/S see note

- Digital Voltmeter or Digital Multimeter (used for verification of calibration voltages)

* see required specifications on page 6-2

Note: The harness for CSN14/HV/S is illustrated later in this section.

WARNING

High voltage potentials exist which could cause serious injury or death. Observe proper

electrical safety precautions throughout this procedure.

CAUTION

The main unit (chassis) must be calibrated for offset and gain; and the signal conditioning

cards must be calibrated for offset prior to calibrating the signal conditioning cards for

gain.

CAUTION

Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit, or from its expansion chassis unless

the unit is powered “OFF” and has no power sources connected to it.

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,

when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause

equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION

Do not perform calibration until after the main unit and calibration equipment have been

powered on for at least one hour. The cards to be calibrated, including those in an

expansion chassis (if used), should be installed prior to the 1 hour warm-up, and should be

in the slots in which they will be used during data acquisition.

1. Connect a harness to the CSN14/HV/S card and to the calibrator. Refer to the following figure.

ChartScan User’s Manual

Calibration 6-15

2. Apply calibration voltage from the precision calibrator to the first channel of each CSN14/HV/S card

(see following table), and verify with a digital multimeter. Requirements for both devices are specified

in Required Equipment.

Volts DC

Slot # 1

Slot # 2

G17,20 X

G17,20X

G17,21X

G17,22X

Slot # 3

G33,20X

G33,21X

G33,22X

Slot # 4

G49,20X

G49,21X

G49,22X

Slot # 5

G65,20X

G65,21X

G65,22X

Slot # 6

G81,20X

G81,21X

G81,22X

Slot # 7 Slot # 8

G97,20X G113,20X

G97,21X G113,21X

G97,22X G113,22X

-2.5 V G1,20X

+2.5 V G1,20X

-25.0 V G1,21X

+25.0 V G1,21X

-250.0 V G1,22X

+250.0 V G1,22X

Note: In the slot columns, the digit after the G is the channel number and the number immediately preceding

the X assigns the voltage value, e.g., G1,20X means “Calibrate Gain for channel 1, ±2.5 V.”

3. After each calibration type U2Xand check for a return of U128to confirm no errors.

Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows:

Response to U2X

U128

Indication for Calibration Mode

No error

U129

Read Failure (EEPROM Error)

Write Failure (EEPROM Error)

Chksum Err (EEPROM Error)

Cal Err (offset, gain, or temperature sensor out of range)

Invalid password

U130

U132

U136

U144

U160

Invalid command

4. After completing the gain calibration of all cards, type EXto end the calibration mode.

5. Type U2Xto confirm calibration mode is disabled. A return of U000confirms this.

Note: You can view the calibration constants by typing an entry similar to the following:

C#1X QC?

…for slot #1

You can monitor the calibration voltage by typing an entry similar to the following:

…to clear the buffer

C1,1X

…to addresses the channel, this example is for slot #1, channel 1

T1,1,0,0X;@X … to trigger the acquisition (Trigger LED flashes); ); @Xstarts acquisition

U13X every entry of U13X results in an updated value of voltage in counts

Note that @X can be used to start or stop the acquisition.

6-16 Calibration

ChartScan User’s Manual

Cold Junction Calibration

Required Equipment

Equipment for CJC Calibration

Cold (ice) cell for calibration with thermocouples at 0°C

T/C wire and subminiature plug connectors (T-Type T/C wire is recommended)

U-Type copper shorting plugs

Thermocouples

Equipment for Verification of Calibrated Temperature*

Option (a): Cold Cell Method

Cold (ice) cell

Volts DC Calibrator

Digital Voltmeter or Digital Multimeter

2-22 Twisted-pairs

Voltage-to-temperature reference tables

Thermocouples

T/C wire and subminiature plug connectors (T-Type T/C wire is recommended)

Option (b): Hot Cell Method

Hot Cell

Thermocouple

T/C wire and subminiature plug connector (T-Type T/C wire is recommended)

Option (c): T/C Calibrator/Simulator Method

Using a T/C Calibrator/Simulator is not recommended due to possible transient effects which can cause erroneous readings.

T/C Calibrator

Thermocouple

T/C wire and subminiature plug connector (T-Type T/C wire is recommended)

* see required specifications on page 6-2

Note: See figures, Cold Junction Calibration, Equipment Setup and Verification of Calibrated Temperatures.

The cold junction calibration applies only to thermocouple cards (CSN14/TC/P). The figure on the next

page, Cold Junction Calibration, Equipment Setup represents the setup for a T/C card in slot #1. In this

example channels 3, 6, 11, and 14 must be used for the cold junction calibration. The following table

indicates channel numbers applicable to the T/C card in each of the eight possible card slots.

Cold Junction Channel Numbers

Unit

Main Chassis

Slot #

1 (bottom slot)

Required CJC Channels

3, 6, 11, 14

19, 22, 27, 30

35, 38, 43, 46

51, 54, 59, 62

Expansion Chassis (Option)

67, 70, 75, 78

83, 86, 91, 94

99, 102, 107, 110

115, 118, 123, 126

8 (top slot)

CAUTION

Use approved ESD precautions, including static-free work area and grounded wrist strap,

when handling circuit boards and electronic components. Failure to do so could cause

equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge.

Note: The Cold Cell Simulator in the following figure shows a special connection box attached to it. This

connection box, which can be easily made, is not part of the cold cell device.

ChartScan User’s Manual

Calibration 6-17

CAUTION

The main unit (chassis) and T/C cards must be calibrated for offset and gain prior

to calibrating the T/C cards for cold junction.

CAUTION

Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit, or from its expansion

chassis unless the unit is powered “OFF” and has no power sources connected to

it.

CAUTION

Do not perform calibration until after the main unit has been powered on for at

least one hour, and the Cold Cell powered on for at least 2 hours. The cards to be

calibrated, including those in an expansion chassis (if used), should be installed

prior to the 1 hour chassis warm-up, and should be in the slots in which they will

be used during data acquisition.

1. With power “OFF” to the main unit, complete the system setup as indicated by the previous figure and

table.

2. Turn power “ON” to the main unit, Cold Cell, calibrator, and digital multimeter. Allow at least one

hour warm up time before proceeding. Allow at least 2 hours warm-up for the Cold Cell.

3. If the calibration password has not been changed, enter K12345. If the password has been changed,

enter the K command and current password. This enables the calibration mode.

ChartScan User’s Manual

6-18 Calibration

4. Type U2Xto verify calibration mode. U128should appear, indicating the unit is in calibration mode.

5. Enter commands similar to those in the first two columns in the following table. This example is for a

T/C card in slot #1, and a Type 3 (“T” type) thermocouple. The table on the preceding page provides

additional channel numbers to use as they apply to your system.

Enter:

J3,3,0000.0X After each calibration enter U2X,

J6,3,0000.0X

J11,3,0000.0X

J14,3,0000.0X

then observe U128indicating no errors.

Note: The number after the J is the channel number, the next number is the thermocouple “type,” and the

number preceding the X is the temperature in °C. Thus, J3,3,0000.0X means “Calibrate cold

junction offset for channel 3, type 3 (T-type) thermocouple at 0°C.

Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows:

Response to U2X

U128

Indication for Calibration Mode

No error

U129

U130

U132

U136

Read Failure (EEPROM Error)

Write Failure (EEPROM Error)

Chksum Err (EEPROM Error)

Cal Err (offset, gain, or temperature sensor out of range)

Invalid password

U144

U160

Invalid command

7. Verify calibrated temperature using one of the following three options. Note related figure on

following page.

a) Cold Cell Method. Connect Cold Cell simulator to the T/C card’s 4 CJC reference channels and to the

DC voltage calibrator, as indicated in the following illustration, figure (a). Adjust the calibrator

voltage to match that of the desired test temperature using Voltage-to-Temperature Reference Tables.

Verify the channel readings match the test temperature for each of the four CJC reference channels.

Repeat verification for all T/C cards.

Note: The Cold Cell Simulator in figure (a) shows a special connection box attached to it. This

connection box, which can be easily made, is not part of the cold cell device.

b) Hot Cell Method. Connect Hot Cell simulator to T/C card’s first CJC reference channel. Adjust Hot

Cell to obtain desired test temperature and ensure temperature is stabilized. Observe channel reading

to match test temperature. Repeat test for remaining three CJC reference channels. Repeat verification

for all T/C cards.

c) T/C Calibrator Method (see note). Connect a thermocouple calibrator/simulator to the first

ChartScan, or NetScan, CJC channel in accordance with the calibrator/simulator manufacturer’s

instructions. Certain simulators will require the use of specific type T/C extension wire to create a

cold junction at ChartScan’s, or NetScan’s, input; while other simulators require copper wire and

reduce the output voltage as a function of ambient temperature to create the effect of a cold junction at

the main unit. Adjust the output setting to the desired temperature and verify the channel reading is

within the range of ChartScan’s, or NetScan’s, tolerance band for the T/C type and temperature.

Repeat test for remaining three CJC reference channels. Repeat this test for all thermocouple type

signal conditioning cards.

The T/C Calibrator/Simulator Method is not recommended because, unlike voltage

calibrators, T/C Calibrator/Simulators have no provisions for remote sensing (and are

therefore more readily subject to the transient effects of sampled data acquisition

systems, such as ChartScan and NetScan). These transient effects can cause erroneous

readings, even when both units are calibrated within specifications.

ChartScan User’s Manual

Calibration 6-19

6-20 Calibration

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendices

Appendix A  API Commands

Appendix B  Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix C  Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Appendix D  ChartScan Program Examples

Appendix E  Bus States, Bus Lines, and Data Transfer Aspects

Appendix F  ASCII Code Summary

Appendix G  ChartScan Error Messages

Appendix H  Abbreviations

Synopsis of Appendices

With exception of Appendix G, these appendices provide programming-related information that is not necessary for

users of ChartView and ChartView Plus. The appendices cover the following information:

Appendix A: API Commands describes the entire command set for ChartScan. Syntax, parameters, interpretation,

and error codes are explained. Sections on the individual commands include their parameters, types, typical use,

related information, and a sample program excerpt.

Appendix B: Configuration Aspects for Programmers provides information on memory allocation, channel and

scan configuration, triggers, alarms, and digital I/O operation.

Appendix C: Registers, Formats, & Queries provides information regarding registers, data formats, status and

event reporting, and other operation-related factors.

Appendix D: ChartScan Program Examples explains the program examples which are supplied on the release disk.

Typical tasks are covered including various kinds of data acquisition and alarm control.

Appendix E: Bus States, Bus Lines, and Data Transfer Aspects provides reference material regarding bus states,

bus lines and data transfer (DIO) lines in relation to IEEE 488 and Serial Interfaces.

Appendix F: ASCII Code Summary summarizes ASCCII control codes and character codes.

Appendix G: ChartScan Error Messages lists and describes error codes pertaining to the unit.

Appendix H: Abbreviations

Reference Note: For users of Net232 Ethernet/RS-232 converters, additional API commands can

be found in the Net232 User’s Guide, part no. 1037-0901. These additional API commands pertain

to ethernet operations.

Appendices, ^12-30-98

A-i

A-ii

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

Contents

Command Syntax................................................................................................................. A-2

Case Sensitivity...................................................................................................................... A-2

Spaces................................................................................................................................... A-2

Multiple Parameters ............................................................................................................... A-2

Command Strings .................................................................................................................. A-2

Execute Command................................................................................................................. A-2

Fixed Formats ........................................................................................................................ A-3

Conflict Errors ........................................................................................................................ A-3

Command Interpretation .....................................................................................................A-3

Immediate & Deferred Commands......................................................................................... A-3

Deferred Commands, Order of Execution.............................................................................. A-5

Command Summary ............................................................................................................A-6

Command Reference .........................................................................................................A-11

Command Description Format ............................................................................................. A-11

The Commands.................................................................................................................... A-11

Command

Trigger On Command

Flush Acquisition Buffer

Clear Channel Configuration

Restore Factory Settings

Change Calibration Keyword

Adjust Calibration Card Pots

Power-On Reset

Page

A-12

A-13

A-14

A-15

A-16

A-17

A-18

A-19

A-20

A-21

A-22

A-23

A-26

A-27

A-28

A-29

A-30

A-33

A-34

A-35

A-36

A-37

Command

Calibrate Cold Junction Offset

Enter Calibration Mode

Set Trigger Level

Page

A-38

A-39

A-40

A-41

A-42

A-43

A-44

A-45

A-46

A-47

A-49

A-51

A-52

A-53

A-54

A-56

A-60

A-61

A-62

A-63

QC?

Set SRQ Mask

Set Measuring Mode

Set Event Mask

Set Digital Output

Program Trigger Times

Query

Power-Up Settings

Time Stamping

Assign Alarm Output

Alarm Stamping

Configure Channels

Select Cards

Set Relay Make Time

End Calibration Mode

Error Status Query

Set Query Terminator

Query Card Data

Read Buffered Data

Read Last Readings

Set Real Time Clocks

Set Trigger Configuration

User Status

Set Data Format

Set User Terminator

Set Average Weight

Execute

Set Burst Mode Frequency

Calibrate Channel Gain

Calibrate Channel Offset

Set Scan Interval

Set Counts, or Select Blocks

Digital Input Stamping

ChartScan User’s Manual, ^1-14-99

A-1

API Commands

Appendix A

Command Syntax

Commands are identified by the following syntax formats:

•

A single letter (Athrough Z)

A single letter (Athrough Z) followed by a pound sign (#)

An at-sign (@)

An asterisk (*) followed by a single letter (Athrough Z)

In addition, the commands are governed by the following syntax rules.

Case Sensitivity

Commands may be entered in upper or lower case.

For example, A1,1Xis interpreted the same as a1,1X.

Spaces

White space (which consists of all ASCII values of 32 and below, and includes the space, tab, new-line

and carriage-return characters) is generally allowed anywhere between commands and command

arguments. However, white space is not allowed in the middle of command options.

For example, 1 2 3is not the same as 123.

Multiple Parameters

If more than one parameter is used for a command, they must be separated by a comma or white space.

For example: Q4,1,1,0,0or Q 4 1 1 0 0is appropriate.

Command Strings

Commands may be sent individually or in a string with other commands.

For example, the following four lines of a program:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1,1X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A1,1X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C2,2X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A2,2X"

have the same effect as the single line:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; C1,1 A1,1 C2,2 A2,2 X"

Execute Command

Deferred commands are interpreted and processed as they are received. They require the Execute (X)

command to be issued in order to be executed. If multiple system commands are used in the same

string, each use of the command must be followed by the Execute (X) command. However, immediate

commands do not require an Execute command to be processed. For more detail on deferred and

immediate command types, refer to the next section on “Command Interpretation” in this chapter.

For example, to clear the SRQ mask and then set it for SRQ on trigger:

PRINT#1, OUTPUT10; "M000 X M002 X"

To configure channels 1 through 32 for temperature and 33 through 64 for volts, using one command

string:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-32, 1C33-64, 11X"

A-2

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

Fixed Formats

Any Query (?)command or Status (U) command returns a fixed format. For instance, any option that

can range up to 65,535 always returns five digits, so zero would be returned as 00000. In the

following command descriptions, leading zeros are included. They are not, however, required when

entering the command.

Conflict Errors

Some combinations of commands and parameters can be sent to the unit that are out of range for a

particular configuration or inconsistent with other commands. For instance, specifying a Scan Interval

(I) command to less time than the unit can acquire scans results in a conflict error:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-992,I00:00:00.0,00:00:00.0X"

A conflict error lights the ERROR indicator LED on the scanning unit and returns an E4when queried

with the Error Query (E?) command. Some conflict errors result in a default value for a conflicted

command. For instance, in the example above, the scan interval defaults to the fastest possible scan

interval for the number of defined channels.

Command Interpretation

As commands are received by the unit, they are interpreted in the order in which they are received.

Some commands are immediate, which means they immediately take effect. Other commands are

deferred and have no effect on device operation until the Execute (X) command is interpreted.

Immediate & Deferred Commands

The immediate and deferred commands applicable to ChartScan/1400 are listed in a table on the

following page.

An example of an immediate command is Set Digital Outputs (On), which immediately chooses the

digital output line which is being referred to.

An example of a deferred command is Set Data Format (F), which determines the input and output

format used for channel data when Xis interpreted. As deferred commands are interpreted, their

desired effects are recorded in internal temporary registers. As additional deferred commands are

interpreted, their effects are added to these registers, possibly overwriting earlier effects. Finally, when

Xis interpreted, the temporary registers are examined in the execution order described below. If two

deferred commands that do not affect the same function are received before the Execute (X)command,

they take effect in the execution order described below. If a deferred command is sent multiple times

within a command line, the last occurrence of the command will take precedence. Note that a

command line is terminated by the X. For example, if F1,1 F1,3Xis sent, the data output format will

be as specified by the F1,3Xcommand. The F1,1command is overridden and never takes effect.

If an error is detected during command processing, commands are ignored up through and including the

next execute command. Thus, any immediate commands after the error, (and all deferred commands)

are ignored. For example, the command line T1,1,0,0O216,0,25, 255AAT3,7 K20 Xcontaining

the error AAonly executes the O0, because it is an immediate command that occurred before the error.

The deferred commands T1,1,0,0and T3,7,0,0and the immediate command K20after the error

have no effect.

Deferred commands help reduce the effects of errors and improve synchronization of command

execution. The primary advantage of deferred commands is that they are executed as a group, either all

or none. If any errors occur, deferred commands have no effect and the device is left in a consistent

state instead of a partially modified, inconsistent state.

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-3

API Commands

Appendix A

The following is a list of all the immediate and deferred commands for ChartScan.

Command

Trigger On Command

Flush Acquisition Buffer

Clear Channel Configuration

Restore Factory Settings

Change Calibration Keyword

Adjust Calibration Card Pots

Power-On Reset

Power-Up Settings

Time Stamping

Assign Alarm Output

Alarm Stamping

Configure Channels

Select Cards

Set Relay Make Time

End Calibration Mode

Error Status Query

Set Data Format

Type

Deferred

Immediate

Deferred

Immediate

Deferred

Immediate

Deferred

Immediate

Deferred

Set Burst Mode Frequency

Calibrate Channel Gain

Calibrate Channel Offset

Set Scan Interval

Deferred

Immediate

Deferred

Digital Input Stamping

Calibrate Cold Junction Offset

Enter Calibration Mode

Set Trigger Level

Immediate

Deferred

Set SRQ Mask

Deferred

Set Measuring Mode

Set Event Mask

Deferred

QC?

Set Digital Output

Program Trigger Times

Query

Set Query Terminator

Query Card Data

Read Buffered Data

Read Last Readings

Set Real Time Clocks

Set Trigger Configuration

User Status

Set User Terminator

Set Averaging Weight

Execute

Immediate

Deferred

Immediate

Deferred

Immediate

Deferred

Immediate

Deferred

Immediate

Deferred

Set Counts

A-4

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

Deferred Commands, Order of Execution

The immediate commands take effect immediately when they are interpreted. Even so, they must be

followed by an Execute (X) command to terminate the command string for correct operation. For

example: K00001X

Deferred commands are not executed until the Xcommand has been successfully parsed and

interpreted. Upon interpretation of the Xcommand, the order of execution of all deferred commands is

as follows:

Order

Function

Set User Terminator

Set Query Terminator

Set Data Format

Set SRQ Mask

Set Event Mask

Set Trigger Level

Channel Setup Commands

Assign Alarm Output

Enable (1) or Disable (0) Alarm Stamping

Enable (1), or Disable (0) Digital Input Stamping

Configure Channels

Clear Channel Configuration

Set Relay Make Time

Set Burst Mode Frequency

Set Measuring Mode

Set Averaging Weight

Program Trigger Times

Set Scan Interval

Set Counts

Set Trigger Configuration

Trigger On Command

Note: Data acquisition may begin once the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command has been

defined. The above order of deferred commands ensures the configuration of acquisitions will

take place before any data is acquired.

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-5

API Commands

Appendix A

Command Summary

Command

Syntax

Description

Trigger On Command

Trigger on receipt of an @.

Flush Acquisition

Buffer

Flush any data currently in the acquisition buffer.

Clear Channel

Configuration

Clear out the channel configuration so that no channels are

configured.

Restore Factory

Settings

Restore unit to factory configuration.

*Kkey

Change Calibration

Keyword

Change the calibration keyword, where keyis the keyword in the

form of a 5-digit number nnnnn. Therefore the password can

be no longer than 5 characters.

*Pchan

Adjust Calibration Card

Pots

Select voltage level to be enabled for adjustment. Valid options

for chanare: 01- Enable -4.4 Volt Source on calibration card,

02- Enable +4.4. Volt Source on calibration card, and 03-

Select 0 Volts GND.

Power-On Reset

Power-on reset. Equivalent to hardware reset.

*Smode

Power-Up Settings

Specify power-up configuration mode. Valid options for modeare:

0- Power-up under last known configuration (default), and 1-

Power-up under factory default configuration.

*Tstate

Time Stamping

Specify whether or not time stamping will be enabled. Valid

options for stateare: 0- Disable time stamping (default), 1-

Enable absolute time stamping, and 2- Enable relative time

stamping

Achans,

output

Assign Alarm Output

Set alarm condition where chansis the channel(s) to assign to

the digital output.

chansmay be in two forms: chan(for a single channel where 1

< chan< max) or first-last(for a range of channels

where 1< first< last< max),

where max= 128 for ChartScan/1400.

outputis the digital output number to associate the channel(s)

with, where 0< output< 32.

Query channels assigned to digital output.

A#state

Alarm Stamping

Specify whether or not alarm stamping will be enabled. Valid

options for stateare: 0- Disable alarm stamping (default),

and 1- Enable alarm stamping.

Cchans,

Configure Channels

Configure the channels for the master unit and its slave units.

chansand typeare required arguments, while lowsp,

highspand hystare optional.

chansmay be in two forms: chan(for a single channel where 1

< chan< max) or first-last(for a range of channels

where 1< first< last< max),

type [,

[lowsp],

[highsp],

[hyst] ]

where max = 128 for ChartScan/1400.

The chassis is chan = 0.

typeis the type to assign to those channels.

Query current channel configuration.

C#card

Select Card

Select the card from which subsequent QC?and U12

interrogation will retrieve information.

Without optional Relay Card

Valid options for cardare: 0- Selects the chassis; 1, 2, 3, or 4 -

Selects the card in corresponding slot of the main unit (with 1

being the bottom slot); and 5, 6, 7, or 8 - Selects the

corresponding slot on the expansion chassis (with slot 5 being

the bottom slot of the expansion chassis.

With optional Relay Card (installs in slot 1)

Valid options for cardare: 0- Selects the chassis; 1 selects

card in slot 2, 2 selects card in slot 3; and so on, with 7

selecting the card in slot 8; and no card 8 available.

A-6

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

Command

Set Relay Make Time

Syntax

D#make

Description

Specify how long to wait after closing a channel relay before

reading valid data, where makeis the number of 520.833

microsecond intervals.

End Calibration Mode

Error Status Query

Terminate Calibration Mode

Returns present error condition of the unit with one of the following

error codes:

E000- No error has occurred.

E001- Invalid device dependent command (IDDC).

E002- Invalid device dependent command option (IDDCO).

E004- Channel configuration error.

E008- Calibration error.

E016- Trigger overrun.

E032- Open TC or Range Error.

E128- Command conflict error.

Fengr,

format

Set Data Format

Configure the input and output formats.

engrconverts the raw data to the engineering units that you

prefer to work with. Valid options are: 0- degrees Celsius

(default), 1- degrees Fahrenheit, 2- degrees Rankine, 3-

degrees Kelvin, and 4- Volts.

formatplaces the readings in a format that you prefer to work

with. Valid options are: 0- Engineering Units (default), 1-

Binary (Low Byte/High Byte), 2- Binary (High Byte/Low Byte),

and 3- Counts (ASCII).

Query the data format.

F#freq

Set Burst Mode

Frequency

Select burst mode sampling frequency where freqis a real

number and where 38.5< freq< 20000.0Hertz (default).

Gchan,

type

Calibrate Channel Gain

Calibrate the correction gain constants for given option card where

chanis the channel number such that

1< chan< max,

where max = 128 for ChartScan/1400.

The chassis is chan = 0.

typeis the channel type.

Hchan

Calibrate Channel

Offset

Calibrate the correction offset constants for given option card

where chanis the channel number such that

1< chan< max, where max = 128 for ChartScan/1400.

The chassis is chan = 0.

Inorm, acq

Set Scan Interval

Set the two configurable scan intervals of the unit where norm

and acqare the normal and acquisition scan intervals which

have the form: hh:mm:ss.twhere hhis hours, mmis

minutes, ssis seconds, and t is tenths of a second.

Query scan interval selection.

I#state

Digital Input Stamping

Specify whether or not digital input stamping will be enabled.

statemay have either of the following values: The default of

0, which disables digital input stamping, or 1to enable digital

stamping.

Jchan,

type,

temp

Calibrate Cold Junction

Offset

Calibrate the cold-junction offsets for cold-junction compensation

of the thermocouple signals where chanis the channel number

such that 1< chan< max,

where max = 128 for ChartScan/1400.

typeis the thermocouple channel type.

tempis the reference temperature currently being applied to the

selected channel, with the form nnn.nin degrees ºC.

Kkey

Enter Calibration Mode

Enter Calibration Mode if the keyword (or password) is correct,

where keyis the keyword in the form of a 5-digit number

nnnnn. Therefore the password can be no longer than 5

characters.

Query Kkeyas defined above.

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-7

API Commands

Appendix A

Command

Set Trigger Level

Syntax

Lchan,

level,

hyst

Description

Sets the level against which the testing of channel readings should

be performed where chanis the channel number such that 1<

chan< max,

where max = 128 for ChartScan/1400.

levelis the level against which the readings are tested to

determine if the level has been exceeded.

hystis the hysteresis level.

Query the the current level settings

Mmask

Set SRQ Mask

Use the IEEE 488 Service Request (SRQ) mechanism to inform

the IEEE 488 bus controller of certain conditions, where mask

is in the form of the number nnnsuch that 000< nnn< 255is

summed from the following conditions:

000- Power-on default mask value.

001- SRQ On Alarm.

002- SRQ On Trigger Event.

004- SRQ On Ready.

008- SRQ On Scan Available.

016- SRQ On Message Available (MAV).

032- SRQ On Event Detected.

128- SRQ On Buffer Overrun.

Query the SRQ mask.

M#mode

Set Measuring Mode

Set Event Mask

Specify measuring mode. Valid options for modeare: 0- Line

cycle integration / high-speed multi-channel mode, and 1-

Single channel high-speed burst mode.

Nmask

Directly sets the Event Status Enable Register (ESE) where mask

is in the form of the number nnnsuch that 000< nnn< 255is

summed from the following conditions:

000- Clear event mask

001- Acquisition complete

002- Stop Event

004- Query Error

008- Device Dependent Error

016- Execution Error

032- Command Error

064- Buffer 75% Full

128- Power On

Query the Event mask.

Obank1,

bank2,

bank3,

bank4

Set Digital Outputs

Set any of the 32 digital outputs (separated into four 8-bit banks)

to a specified setting, where bankn(n= 1, 2, 3, 4) is an

argument in the form of the number nnnsuch that 000< nnn

< 255when converted to binary format represents the desired

settings for the 8-bit bank.

Query current state of digital output.

Pstart,

stop

Program Trigger Times

Set the trigger start and/or stop times for an acquisition configured

for start and/or stop on absolute time, where startand stop

are in the standard time/date stamp format: HH:MM:SS:T,

mm/dd/yy where His hours, MMis minutes, SSis seconds,

Tis tenths of a second, mmis month, ddis day, and yyis year.

Query current start and stop times.

Query

Query present configuration or mode of command preceding the ?

Qresp,

hll,

scan,

block,

sep

Set Query Terminator

Set the query terminators with the following parameters: respis

the response terminator, hllis the channel terminator, scan

is the terminator which follows each scan output, and blockis

the terminator which follows each trigger block output.

sepdetermines whether or not a separator character should be

used. Valid options for separe: 0- Place no separators in

returned buffered scan data when it is read, and 1- Place a

separator whose value is determined by the current Set User

Terminator (V) command setting into the returned buffer data

when it is read.

Query current terminator settings.

QC?

Query Card Data

Read back card ID and calibration information from the card

previously selected by the Select Card (C#) command.

A-8

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

Command

Read Buffered Data

Syntax

Rtype

Description

Read scan data from the acquisition buffer where typeis the

type of data request being made. Valid options for typeare: 1

- Read the oldest scan currently residing in the acquisition

buffer, 2- Read the oldest complete trigger block currently

residing in the acquisition buffer, and 3- Read all the scan data

that currently resides in the acquisition buffer.

Query the contents of the data buffer.

R#chans

Read Last Readings

Set Real Time Clocks

Queries the last readings from the HLL Registers for specified

channels.

chansmay be in two forms: chan(for a single channel where 1

< chan< max) or first-last(for a range of channels

where 1< first< last< max),

where max = 128 for ChartScan/1400.

Stime

Set the unit’s internal real-time clock where timeis in the

standard time/date stamp format: HH:MM:SS:T, mm/dd/yy

where His hours, MMis minutes, SSis seconds, Tis tenths of a

second, mmis month, ddis day, and yyis year.

Query the internal real-time clock.

Tstart,

stop,

Set Trigger

Configuration

Configure an acquisition of scan data with the following

parameters:

re-arm,

sync

startis the start event and stopis the stop event

re-armdetermines if the unit should continue acquiring after the

first acquisition completes, where 1is on and 0is off.

syncdetermines if acquisition events should be synchronized

with the internal timebases, where 1is on and 0is off.

Query the present trigger configuration

Ureq

User Status

Request information about various internal conditions of the unit

where reqrefers to one of the following request types:

0- Query and clear the Event Status Register (ESR)

1- Query the Status Byte Register (STB)

2- Query and clear Calibration Status Register (CSR)

3- Query system settings

4- Query current High/Low/Last registers

5- Query and clear current High/Low/Last

6- Query the Buffer Status String

7- Query assigned alarm outputs

8- Query configured channels

9- Query digital inputs

10- Query memory option (in Kbytes)

11- Query all channels having programmed valid alarm setpoints

12- Query last calibration time/date

13- Query last scan read

14- Query card IDs

15- Query product information

16- Query measuring parameters

17- Query root mean square (RMS)

18- Query acquisition states and various system flags

Vval

Set User Terminator

Set Average Weight

Set the User Terminator value to any character whose numeric

value (ASCII value) valis in the range 0to 255.

Query the present user terminator value.

W#wt

In Normal mode, specify the number of samples to average for line

cycle integration or high-speed multi-channel use; where wtis

the average weight. Valid options for wtare: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16,

32, 64, 128, and 256(with 32being the default value).

Execute

Execute preceding command string.

Ypre,post,

stop

Set Counts

When in Normal mode, set acquisition counts where preis the

pre-trigger count, postis the post-trigger count and stopis

the post-stop count.

Y0,count,0

Select Blocks

When in High-speed, single-channel mode (burst mode), set

count; where countis the number of 256 sample blocks to be

collected

Query current acquisition count selections.

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-9

API Commands

Appendix A

−

Notes

A-10

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

Command Reference

The following pages provide the command set for ChartScan. For each command, the command name,

the descriptive name, and the command description are given. In turn, the command description

includes the following format.

Command Description Format

Type

This item refers to the part of the system that the command acts upon. The defined Types are as

follows:

Type

Definition

Acquisition

Buffer

Calibration

Channel

System

Refers to those commands which affect how the scans/channels are acquired.

Refers to those commands which affect the buffer operations and/or pointers.

Refers to those commands which affect instrument calibration.

Refers to those commands which affect channel configuration and/or acquisition.

Refers to those commands which affect general system functionality.

Execution

This item refers to the point in time which an interpreted command is executed. The defined

Executions are as follows:

Execution

Definition

Immediate

Indicates that the command will be executed immediately upon successful parsing of the

command and instrument parameters.

Deferred

Indicates that the command will be saved and executed later (after successfully parsing

and performing an Execute (X) command).

The Commands

The following pages presents the API Command Reference for ChartScan. The API Commands have

been arranged in alphabetical order by command syntax with the @and *characters preceding the

alphabetical characters, and with ?preceding the letter Q.

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-11

API Commands

Appendix A

@ - Trigger On Command

Acquisition

TYPE

Deferred

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Trigger upon receipt of an @

DESCRIPTION

The Trigger On (@) command will start or stop the acquisition accordingly when the startor stoparguments

of the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command is set to 1(trigger on). The Tcommand is used as a trigger

source and follows the same rules as other trigger sources as defined by the Tcommand. The @command is

valid only when an acquisition is configured where either the start and/or stop event is defined as the Trigger On

command. If this command is issued when the acquisition is not configured for stop and/or start Trigger On

command, an error condition will occur.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T1,1,0,0X”

‘ Configure an acquisition with both start and stop

trigger being Trigger On command

‘ Start the acquisition

‘ Wait 10 seconds to collect data

‘ Stop the acquisition

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; @X”

SLEEP 10

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; @X”

A-12

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

*B - Flush Acquisition Buffer

Buffer

TYPE

Immediate

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Flush any data currently in the acquisition buffer

DESCRIPTION

The Flush Acquisition Buffer (*B) command will flush any data currently in the acquisition buffer. Upon execution

of this command, all data currently in the acquisition buffer will be deleted and is unavailable to be read. This

command should only be used when it is determined that the data in the acquisition buffer is no longer needed or

may be corrupt. Once this command is executed, data in the acquisition buffer is irrevocably lost.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,"SPOLL07"

INPUT#2, S%

IF (S% AND 128) = 128 THEN

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; *BX"

ENDIF

‘ Serial Poll the unit

‘ Get the Serial Poll response

‘ Check for Buffer Overrun

‘ Data may be corrupt, flush the acquisition buffer

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-13

API Commands

Appendix A

*C - Clear Channel Configuration

Channel

Deferred

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Clear out the channel configuration so that no channels are configured

DESCRIPTION

The Clear Channel Configuration (*C) command will clear out the channel configuration so that no channels are

configured. After this command has been performed, channel readings will be not be updated; therefore, no HLL

or acquisition buffer updates will be performed until a new configuration is entered via the Configure Channels (C)

command. This command may be used when the present configuration is no longer acceptable and you wish to

reconfigure channels from scratch.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; *CX"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; C1, 1X"

‘ Clear all channels configuration

‘ Configure channel 1 of T/C type J

A-14

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

*F - Restore Factory Settings

System

TYPE

Immediate

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Restore unit to factory configuration

DESCRIPTION

The Restore Factory Defaults (*F) command may be used to restore the unit to the same configuration it had

when it left the factory. Issuing this command will cause the unit to load the factory default configuration into the

working configuration. The factory default configuration is defined in the Configuring Power-Up State section of

Appendix C.

This command may not be issued while an acquisition is configured since it will cause certain settings upon

which the acquisition depends to change. Issuing this command while an acquisition is configured will cause a

Conflict Error to occur.

Note: Issuing the *Fcommand will cause any previously defined configuration to be irrevocably lost. The

calibration factors, however, will remain intact.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q?T?Y?X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Retrieve some current configuration settings

‘ Get the settings

‘ Screen shows Q1,7,7,7,0 T0,3,0,0 Y000100,

001000,000000

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*FX"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q?T?Y?X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Restore factory default configuration

‘ Retrieve some current configuration settings

‘ Get the settings

‘ Screen shows Q1,0,0,0,0 T0,0,0,0 Y000000,

000000,000000

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-15

API Commands

Appendix A

*K - Change Calibration Keyword

Calibration

Immediate

*Kkey

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Change the calibration keyword, where keyis the keyword in the form of a 5-

digit number nnnnn. Therefore the password can be no longer than 5

characters.

DESCRIPTION

Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary for

normal, everyday operation.

The Change Calibration Keyword (*K) command allows the changing of the Calibration Keyword which is a user-

defined password. The password is a safety feature to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering calibration

mode and potentially altering calibration constants. The new keyword must be a 5-digit decimal number. Once

the keyword is set, it will, thereafter, be used by the Enter Calibration Mode (K) command to determine entry into

Calibration Mode.

Note: This command is only valid when calibration protection is disabled via the rear panel calibration protection

disable/enable DIP switch. Refer to Chapter 6 for detailed instructions on calibration.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;K12345X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U2X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07”

INPUT#2, C%

‘ Enter Calibration Mode. Keyword = 12345

‘ Check for Keyword Error

‘ Get the Calibration Status Register

IF (C% AND 16) THEN

PRINT,"ERROR—INVALID KEYWORD”

SLEEP 5

‘ If so, wait until keyword check jumper is disabled

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;*K67890X”

ENDIF

‘ Enter new Keyword = 67890

PRINT# 1 “EX”

‘ End Calibration Mode

A-16

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

*P - Adjust Calibration Card Pots

Calibration

Immediate

*Pchan

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Select voltage level to be enabled for adjustment. Valid options for chan

are: 01- Enable -4.4 Volt Source on calibration card, 02- Enable +4.4 Volt

Source on calibration card, and 03- Select 0 Volts GND.

DESCRIPTION

Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary for

normal, everyday operation.

The Adjust Calibration Card Pots (*P) command is used to enable the -4.4 Volt or +4.4 Volt source on the

special calibration card to allow for their adjustment. Refer to Chapter 6 for specific details. A second, diagnostic

use for this command is to program the channel sequencer to “SIT” on a specified channel without changing

address lines, accessing temperature sensors, or making/breaking relay contacts.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;K12345X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*P02X"

‘ Enter calibration mode

‘ Enable -4.4 Volt Source

‘ Adjust -4.4 Volt Source

‘ Enable +4.4 Volt Source

‘ Adjust +4.4 Volt Source

‘ End calibration mode

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*P01X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;EX"

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-17

API Commands

Appendix A

*R - Power-On Reset

System

Immediate

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Power-On Reset. Equivalent to a hardware reset.

DESCRIPTION

The Power-On Reset (*R) command has the same effect on the unit as removing and re-applying power. All

data in data buffers and configuration are erased.

Note: Because the *Rcommand performs a full power-on reset, 3 or 4 seconds are required before you can

communicate with the unit. A total of at least 5 seconds is required before normal operations can take

place.

The IEEE 488 bus commands Device Clear (DCL and SDC) do not have this effect. They clear only the

command input buffer, the output queue, and any pending commands.

Note: Issuing the Power-Up Default Settings (*S1) command and then power-cycling the unit, or issuing the *R

command will cause any previously defined configuration to be irrevocably lost. The calibration factors for

the unit and its slaves, however, will remain intact.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*RX"

SLEEP 4

WHILE (S% and 4) = 0

PRINT #1, “SPOLL07"

INPUT#2,S%

‘ Restore power-on settings to the unit

‘ Wait 4 seconds to restore communication

‘ Keep checking the serial poll response of the unit until it is ready,

meaning that bit 4 is asserted

WEND

A-18

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

*S - Power-Up Settings

System

TYPE

Immediate

*Smode

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Specify power-up configuration mode. Valid options for modeare: 0- Power

up under last known configuration (default). 1- Power up under factory

default configuration.

DESCRIPTION

With the Power-Up Settings (*S) command, specifying the mode to be 0will cause the unit to load its last known

configuration when it is powered on or when the Power-On Reset (*R) command is issued. The last known

configuration will be exactly the same as the configuration it had when it was last powered down or a *R

command issued. Specifying this mode will insure that the unit will always come up with the configuration which

has most recently been defined. Using this mode is convenient if it is undesirable to reconfigure the unit every

time it is powered up or a *Rcommand is issued.

Specifying the mode to be 1will cause the unit to load the factory default configuration when it is powered on or

when a *Rcommand is issued. Using this mode is the same as power-cycling the unit then issuing the *F

command. The factory defaults settings are defined in the Configuring Power-Up State section of Appendix C.

Note: Issuing the Power-Up Default Settings (*S1) command and then power-cycling the unit, or issuing the *R

command will cause any previously defined configuration to be irrevocably lost. The calibration factors for

the unit and its slaves, however, will remain intact.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q?T?Y?X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Retrieve some current configuration settings

‘ Get the settings

‘ Screen shows Q1,7,7,7,0 T1,3,0,0 Y000100,

001000,000000

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*S1X"

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;*RX”

SLEEP 5

‘ Configure to power up with factory defaults

‘ Reset the unit

‘ Wait for the unit to reset

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q?T?Y?X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Retrieve some current configuration settings

‘ Get the settings

‘ Screen shows Q1,0,0,0,0 T0,0,0,0 Y000000,

000000,000000

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-19

API Commands

Appendix A

*T - Time Stamping

System

TYPE

Immediate

*Tstate

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Specify whether or not time stamping will be enabled. Valid options for

stateare: 0- Disable time stamping (default), 1- Enable absolute time

stamping, and 2- Enable relative time stamping.

DESCRIPTION

The Time Stamping (*T) command, when enabled, will append a time/date time stamp to each scan being sent

by the unit to the controller:

If absolute time stamping is enabled, the format is HH:MM:SS.MIL, MM/DD/YY

where MIL= milliseconds.

If relative time stamping is enabled, the format is HH:MM:SS.MIL, DDDDDDD

where MIL= milliseconds and DDDDDDD= days.

In the relative mode, the time stamps are relative to the trigger scan which is time stamped

+00:00:00.000,0000000. This implies that the pre-trigger scans are negative (-) and post trigger scans

are positive (+). Refer to the Time Stamping section of Appendix B for details.

Note: Relative time stamping will not be valid if you attempt to use it in conjunction with continuous, gap-free

acquisitions with two timebases. In addition, time stamping is not valid in burst mode.

Note: If the output format is binary instead of ASCII, the time stamp is returned as ten eight-bit bytes in 2h

(2-hexidecimal) digit format. Examples for absolute and relative time stamp formats are provided below.

Note that the 2h digit format can not be printed.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*T1X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*T2X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*T0X"

‘ Enable absolute time stamping

‘ Enable relative time stamping

‘ Disable time stamping

Format Examples of Absolute and Relative Time Stamping

Absolute Time Stamping

Relative Time Stamping

ASCII and 2h Digit Examples for:

3 p.m., 2 min & 5 secs. after hour; July 9, 1997

ASCII format: 15:02:05.000, 07/09/97

ASCII and 2h Digit Examples for:

14 hours, 30 minutes, 10 days

ASCII format: +14:30:00.000, 00000010

ASCII

000

Time Increment

Hour

Minute

ASCII

000

Time Increment

Hour

Minute

Second

Milliseconds (for ASCII)

Microseconds (for 2h digit)

(low Æ high)

Milliseconds (for ASCII)

Microseconds (for 2h digit)

(low Æ high)

Month

Day

Year

00000010

Day

(low Æ high)

A-20

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

A - Assign Alarm Output

System

TYPE

Deferred

Achans,

output

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Set alarm condition where chansis the channel(s) to assign to the digital

output.

chansmay be in two forms: chan(for a single channel where

1< chan< max) or first-last(for a range of channels where

1< first< last< max), where max = 128 for ChartScan/1400.

outputis the digital output number with which to associate the channel(s),

where 0< output< 32.

Query channels assigned to digital output.

DESCRIPTION

The Assign Alarm Output (A) command may be used to assign a particular channel, or range of channels, alarm

condition(s) to a particular digital output. This command allows internal alarm conditions to be sensed by

external devices via the 32 TTL-level digital outputs located on the back panel of the unit.

To use alarms, the channels in question must be part of the channel scan. Once the channels are configured (by

using the Ccommand) and made part of the scan, the alarms are active. No trigger or timebase assignment is

required. Alarming is totally independent of buffered operations.

If it is desired, an alarm event for a specific channel can be used as a stimulus for a digital output signal on the

back panel of the unit by using the Acommand to assign the channel to digital output. This signal can be used

to set off an audible alarm or signal another device of the occurrence of the alarm condition.

To unassign a digital alarm condition, use 0, which is the null output number. Assigning the null output number

to a channel(s) will disassociate the channel(s) from any digital output.

Thirty-two digital signals are available on the back panel of the master unit. Although analog input channels on

the slave units can be used to stimulate alarms, no digital output signals are available on the slave units.

Regardless of the number of slaves connected, 32 external alarm signals are available.

A channel programmed with alarm setpoints will not generate an alarm unless it is over a setpoint when the scan

occurs. For example, if a channel goes above then below an alarm threshold in-between scans, it will not be

detected or posted.

Alarm detection will generate an SRQ. You can then issue an alarm query (A?) which will return a 4-byte image

of the 32 alarm outputs.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-32, 1,

-100.0, 100.0, 1.0X"

‘ Configure channels 1 - 32

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A1,1X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A2-16,2X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A17-25,3X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A26-32,32X"

‘ Assign channel 1 alarm to digital output channel 1

‘ Assign channels 2 - 16 alarms to digital output channel 2

‘ Assign channels 17 - 25 alarms to digital output channel 3

‘ Assign channels 26 - 32 alarms to digital output channel 32

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-21

API Commands

Appendix A

A# - Alarm Stamping

System

TYPE

Immediate

A#state

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Specify whether or not alarm stamping will be enabled. Valid options for

stateare: 0- Disable alarm stamping (default), and 1- Enable alarm

stamping.

DESCRIPTION

The Alarm Stamping (A#) command (when enabled) will append the alarm state to the end of each scan as it

occurs:

The alarm status consists of 32 bits: A31 through A00, each with a 1signifying alarm on, or a 0signifying alarm

off.

In Binary Low-High mode, 4 bytes will be appended as follows:

Byte 1: A07 - A00

Byte 2: A15 - A08

Byte 3: A23 - A16

Byte 4: A31 - A24

In Binary High-Low mode, 4 bytes will be appended as follows:

Byte 1: A15 - A08

Byte 2: A07 - A00

Byte 3: A31 - A34

Byte 4: A23 - A16

In ASCII mode, 12 bytes will be appended as follows:

DwwwDxxxDyyyDzzz, where:

D = User Terminator

www = Decimal equivalent of A07 - A00

xxx = Decimal equivalent of A15 - A08

yyy = Decimal equivalent of A23 - A16

zzz = Decimal equivalent of A31 - A24

Note: This feature is not available in ChartScan/1400’s high-speed, single-channel mode (burst mode) since

alarms are not monitored.

Note: If Digital Input Stamp (I#) is also enabled, it will be appended after the Alarm Stamp (A#).

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A#1X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;A#0X"

‘ Enable alarm stamping

‘ Disable alarm stamping

A-22

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

C - Configure Channels

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Channel

Deferred

Cchans,

Configure the channels for the master unit and its slave units. chansand

typeare required arguments, while lowsp, highspand hystare

optional.

chansmay be in two forms: chan(for a single channel where 1< chan<

max) or first-last(for a range of channels where

1< first< last< max), where max= 128 for ChartScan/1400.

The chassis is chan = 0.

type [,

[lowsp],

[highsp],

[hyst] ]

typeis the type to assign to those channels.

Query current channel configuration.

DESCRIPTION

The optional arguments lowsp, highspand hystare the low setpoint, high setpoint and hysteresis values,

respectively, for the Configure Channels (C) command. These arguments are only needed if it is desired to

configure alarms on the specified channel(s). The format for these optional arguments follow the rules for

readings input defined under the Set Data Format (F) command.

The channel typeis used by the unit to determine how a certain channels readings are to be interpreted.

Because of this fact, defining the channel type is critical to the proper configuration of the channel. Each channel

must be assigned a channel type in order for it to be included in the scan group. Likewise, assigning a channel

type of 0will remove that channel from the scan group.

The following table outlines the channel types for ChartScan/1400.

Channel Types

ChartScan/1400

Null

1-9

Thermocouple Card

(N/A)

Volts Card

12,13,14

Volts Card

Reserved

16,17,18

Reserved

(N/A)

High-Voltage Card

Volts Card

21,22

23,24,25,26

(N/A)

28,29

High-Voltage Card

Thermocouple Card

(N/A)

Reserved

31-50

51-59

60-99

100-110

111-127

228-238

Reserved

The following list outlines the channel type definitions:

Null Type: The null channel type is type 0. Assigning a channel to the null type will remove the channel from

the scan group.

Thermocouple Card Types: See the following tables for details.

Volts Card Types: See the following tables for details.

High-Voltage Card Types: See the following tables for details.

Reserved Types: Reserved types are types that are reserved to the internal processes of the unit. Among

these types, 90and 91are reserved for chassis calibration. Refer to Chapter 6 for calibration details.

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-23

API Commands

Appendix A

Note: Specifying a reserved type will cause an error.

Note: Because the Configure Channels (C) command is a deferred command, the channel(s) will not actually be

configured until the Execute (X) command is processed. Since the configuring of channels takes a good

deal of processor time, as many Configure Channels (C) commands as possible, should be placed on one

command line. This will avoid unnecessary processing time when configuring many channels.

Thermocouple Card Types

For Troubleshooting purposes only, not for normal operation.

These special types are valid only in degrees Celsius.

Thermocouple

Type

Normal

Operation normal

operation

Same as

Without temperature

sensor adjustment (i.e.

raw A/D input of the T/C

type)

Temp.

sensor

values only,

not

sensor

values

only,

but

linearized

(i.e. raw A/D

input of the

temp.

without

temperature

sensor

adjustment

sensors)

Assignable Channel Types

N (14 gauge)

N (28 gauge)

(N/A)

Volts Card Types

High-Voltage Card Types

High Voltage

Volts Type

(Range)

Normal Operation

Type (Range)

Assignable Ch. Types

100 mV DC

1 V DC

5 V DC

10 V DC

100 mV AC

1 V AC

2.5 V DC

25 V DC

250 V DC

2.5 V AC

25 V AC

250 V AC

5 V AC

10 V AC

A-24

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; F0,0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;*C”

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1,1,-100.0,

100.0, 0.5"

‘ Set Data Format to Engineering Units, degrees C

‘ Clear current channel configuration

‘ Configure channel for T/C type J with low setpoint of -

100.0 °C, high setpoint of 100.0 °C and hysteresis of

0.5 °C

‘ Configure channels 33 and 34 for Volts type (100 mV

range) and no setpoints

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C33-34,11"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C65,2"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;X"

‘ Configure channel 65 for T/C type K with no setpoints

‘ Execute the above configuration (The unit is now

scanning the above configuration)

‘ Get the last readings of configured channels

‘ Retrieve response

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; U13X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Screen shows

+0034.40

-0103.00

+0012.30

+0004.60

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-25

API Commands

Appendix A

C# - Select Card

Calibration

Immediate

C#card

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Select the card from which subsequent QC?and U12interrogation will

retrieve information.

Without optional Relay Card

Valid options for cardare: 0- Selects the chassis; 1, 2, 3, or 4 - Selects the

card in corresponding slot of the main unit (with 1 being the bottom slot);

and 5, 6, 7, or 8 - Selects the corresponding slot on the expansion chassis

(with slot 5 being the bottom slot of the expansion chassis.

With optional Relay Card Installed (installs in slot 1)

Valid options for cardare: 0- Selects the chassis; 1 selects card in slot 2,

2 selects card in slot 3; and so on, with 7 selecting the card in slot 8; and

no card 8 available.

DESCRIPTION

Using the Select Card (C#) command, selecting a number from the range 1-8for the parameter cardwill

cause subsequent QC?commands to return the calibration factors of the cards by themselves. To return the

calibration factors of the cards as part of the system, select a number from the range 101-108.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C#0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;QC?X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07"

‘ Select chassis

‘ Read chassis calibration factors

INPUT #2, A$

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C#5X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U12X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07"

‘ Select the card #5

‘ Read back the time/date that card #5 was last calibrated

INPUT #2, A$

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C#105X”

‘ Select the card #5 in order to read back the calibration factors

as part of the system

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;QC?X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07"

INPUT #2, A$

‘ Read back the system calibration factors of card #5

Note: In the above example an expansion chassis is being used, thereby allowing an additional 4 card slots.

Note: Card #5 will typically be located in slot #5; however, if the optional relay card is used, card #5 will be located

in slot #6 and signal conditioning card use is limited to 7 cards (instead of 8).

A-26

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

D# - Set Relay Make Time

System

TYPE

Deferred

D#make

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Specify how long to wait after closing a channel relay before reading valid

data, where makeis the number of 520.833-microsecond intervals.

DESCRIPTION

The Set Relay Make Time (D#) command allows the user to increase the delay between closing a relay and

reading valid channel data. The system powerup default is: make= 6= 3.125 milliseconds.

If common mode voltages on adjacent channels are widely dissimilar, reading inaccuracies can result. This

inaccuracy is due to inadequate settling time at the instrumentation amplifier when the unit is scanning between

channels. To eliminate these inaccuracies, the settling time can be increased using the D#command as shown

in the example below.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;M#0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;W#32X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;D#12X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;Y0,10,0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1-360,1X

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;@X”

‘ Select Normal mode

‘ Select number of samples = 32

‘ Set Relay Make Time = 12 = 6.25 milliseconds

‘ Setup to read 10 past trigger scans

‘ Enable channels 1 - 360 for J type thermocouples

‘ Arm the unit

‘ Trigger unit and collect scans

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-27

API Commands

Appendix A

E - End Calibration Mode

Calibration

TYPE

Immediate

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Terminate Calibration Mode

DESCRIPTION

Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary for

normal, everyday operation.

To use this command the unit must be in Calibration Mode. The End Calibration Mode (E) command is then

used to take the unit out of Calibration Mode. Once this command has been executed the unit will no longer be

in Calibration Mode and the Enter Calibration Mode command (K) must be issued to re-enter Calibration Mode.

Chapter 6, Calibration contains additional information.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;K12345X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;H17X”

‘ Enter Calibration Mode

‘ Apply precision voltage

‘ Will calculate offsets for card #2

‘ Wait for command to complete

‘ Apply precision voltage of -50.0 mV

‘ Calibrate negative gain for TC for card #2

‘Wait for command to complete

‘ Apply precision voltage of +50.0 mV

‘ Calibrate positive gain for TC for card #2

‘ Wait for command to complete

‘ Apply temperature of 90.0 °C

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;G17,1X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;J1,2,90.0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;EX”

‘ Calibrate cold junction offset for channel 1 on card 1

‘ Wait for command to complete

‘ Remove precision voltage

‘ End Calibration Mode

A-28

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

E? - Error Status Query

System

TYPE

Immediate

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Returns present error condition of the unit with one of the following error

codes:

E000- No error has occurred.

E001- Invalid device dependent command (IDDC).

E002- Invalid device dependent command option (IDDCO).

E004- Channel configuration error.

E008- Calibration error.

E016- Trigger overrun.

E032- Open T/C or Range Error.

E128- Command conflict error.

DESCRIPTION

When an error has occurred, the ERROR indicator light on the front panel of the unit turns on. Error Status

Query (E?) is used to determine the present error condition. After execution of the Error Status Query command,

the unit responds with one of the following error codes:

E000: No error has occurred.

E001: Invalid device dependent command (IDDC) due to a command syntax error.

E002: Invalid device dependent command option (IDDCO). A command parameter was out of range or

missing.

E004: A Channel Configuration Error indicates that a channel has been inappropriately configured, either

because the channel is not present or because the specified channel type is not compatible with the card type

installed.

E008: A Calibration Error occurs when the card calibration has failed or has been inappropriately calibrated.

E016: A Trigger Overrun Error occurs when more than one trigger event occurs for a given trigger state or when

a non-expectant trigger event occurs.

E032: An Open T/C Error or Range Error, occurs when the hardware circuitry detects an open thermocouple, or

when the software detects the A/D input has reached or exceeded its linearization.

E128: A Command Conflict Error indicates the issuance of a command that is in conflict with other commands

that have been issued or the current configuration. This error usually occurs when a command is issued that

cannot be performed because of the current state of the unit. For instance, if the Set Scan Interval (I) command

is issued during an acquisition (tstart 0).

After execution of the Error Status Query, most error conditions are cleared. Error conditions may also be

cleared by issuing a Clear Event Status (U0) command to the unit. The ERROR light will remain on until an E?

or U0command is executed to clear the error condition.

EXAMPLES

PRINT#1,"CLEAR07"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;E?X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT#2,A$

‘ Reset the unit

‘ Request error status

PRINT A$

‘ Display shows E000, no errors occurred

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;K3 X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;E?X"

‘ Send illegal command option to the unit

‘ (Note: ERROR indicator light turns on)

‘ Request error status

‘ (Note: ERROR indicator light turns off)

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT#2,A$

PRINT A$

‘ Displays E002(Invalid Device Dependent Command Option)

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-29

API Commands

Appendix A

F - Set Data Format

System

TYPE

Deferred

Fengr,

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Configure the input and output formats.

format

engrconverts the raw data to the engineering units with which you prefer

to work. Valid options are: 0- °C, 1- °F, 2- °R, 3 - °K, and 4-

Volts.

°C is the default engineering unit.

formatplaces the readings in a format with which you prefer to work.

Valid options are: 0- Engineering Units (default), 1- Binary (Low

Byte/High Byte), 2- Binary (High Byte/Low Byte), and 3- Counts

(ASCII).

Query the data format.

DESCRIPTION

The Set Data Format (F) command configures the input and output data format for data transmissions with the

unit, and requires two arguments. The first argument engris the engineering units, the second argument

formatis the reading format.

When the unit is inputting or outputting data, it first references the current reading format. If formatis 0

(Engineering Units), it will then reference the current settings of the engineering units and then perform the

necessary conversion.

Data Input Formats (see Note 1)

Data Type

Engineering Units

Counts

xxxxx

Temperature

xxxx.xx °C

1 xxxx.xx °F

2 xxxx.xx °R

xxxx.xx °K

+xx.xxxxxxxxx

xxxxx

Volts

Interpreted as

Engineering Units

Time/Date

Absolute

Relative

Timebase

hh:mm:ss.mil,MM/DD/YY

+hh:mm:ss.mil,DDDDDDDD

hh:mm:ss.mil

Interpreted as

Engineering Units

Legend

x= ASCII digit

h= hour

MM= month

DD= day

m= minute

s= second

YY= year

DDDDDDDD= day

mil= see Note 2

Note 1: Binary Low Byte/High Byte (1) and Binary High Byte/Low Byte (2) are interpreted

as engineering units.

Note 2: mil is milliseconds for ASCII, but microseconds for binary (2-hexidecimal) format.

The Set Data Format (F) command determines the format of readings input from the controller. However, the

only readings input from the controller come in the form of command parameters and there are only two

commands which take readings as parameters: the Configure Channels (C) and the Set Trigger Level (L)

commands. These are the only command parameters over which the Fcommand has control.

With both the Cand Lcommand the Fcommand may determine the format of the hysteresis parameter. The F

command may also determine the high and low setpoint format in the Ccommand.

The reading parameters for the Cand Lcommands cannot be issued in binary format. If binary format is

specified by the Fcommand, these parameters will be interpreted as Engineering Units. These parameters will

always be interpreted as Engineering Units (as currently defined by the Engineering Units argument of the F

command) except when the Counts format is specified. When the Counts format is specified, these parameters

are interpreted as Counts. For additional information on the different format types, see the Data Format section

in Appendix C.

If readings are interpreted as Counts or Binary format then the engineering unit parameter of the Fcommand is

ignored.

(continued)

A-30

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

Data Output Formats

Data Type

Engineering Units

Binary

Counts

High Byte /

Low Byte

Low Byte /

High Byte

xxxx.xx °C

xxxx.xx °F

xxxx.xx °R

xxxx.xx °K

+xx.xxxxxxxxx

hh:mm:ss.mil,

MM/DD/YY

Temperature

H/L

L/H

xxxxx

H/L

hmstMDY

L/H

xxxxx

hh:mm:ss.mil,

MM/DD/YY

hh:mm:ss.mil,

DDDDDDDD

Volts

Time/Date

Absolute

Relative

hh:mm:ss.mil,

DDDDDDDD

hmstMDY

hh:mm:ss.t

Interpreted as engineering units

Interpreted as

Timebase

engineering units

Legend

x= ASCII digit

h= hours

m= minutes

s= seconds

mil(see Note 1)

MM= months

DD= days

H= high order byte

L= low order byte

h= hours

m= minutes

s= seconds

t= tenths

M= months

D= days

Y= years

x= ASCII digit

h= hours

m= minutes

s= seconds

mil(see Note 1)

MM= months

DD= days

YY= years

DDDDDDDD=

Days

YY= years

DDDDDDDD= Days

Note 1: mil is milliseconds for ASCII, but microseconds for binary (2-hexidecimal) output format.

Data output formats differ slightly from data input formats in that binary formats may be used for Channel Data.

Channel Data is the only output data which may use the binary format (if it is specified). Channel Data is defined

as data originating from the High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers or the Acquisition Buffer. The commands that initiate

Channel Data output are the R, R#, U4, U5and U13commands. However, Channel Data may also be output

as Engineering Units and Counts.

Data output formats for command queries will follow the same rules as data input formatting. As in the case of

data input formats, all readings output will be in Engineering Units unless Counts is specified. However, there

are only 3 command queries which need to follow the Fcommand format in this fashion. They are C?, L?and

U8command queries.

Note: It also should be noted that readings are only converted to the specified engineering units if the

associated channel type is a channel that supports those engineering units. For example if the specified

channel is a volts channel and the engineering units is 0(°C), the reading will be interpreted as volts, not

a temperature in °C.

Note: When Binary formats are specified, the HLL, Scan and Block terminator do not apply.

The following table shows the effect of the Set Data Format (F) command on readings input/output formats for

the commands and queries over which it has control. Refer to the Data Format section of Appendix C for more

examples.

Reading Formats

Command

Engineering Units

Binary

Counts

High Byte /

Low Byte

Low Byte /

High Byte

U13

Engr. Units

Binary (H/L)

Engr. Units

Binary (L/H)

Counts

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-31

API Commands

Appendix A

EXAMPLES

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07:F0,0X”

‘ Set the engineering units to °C and reading format to

engineering units

PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;C1, 1, -100.0,

100.0, 1.0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; U4X”

PRINT#1, “ENTERO7"

LINE INPUT #2, A$

PRINT A$

‘ Set points and hysteresis interpreted as °C

‘ Retrieve High/Low/Last readings

‘ Returned readings are in engineering °C format

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;F1,1X”

‘ Set the engineering units to °F and reading format to

binary low/high

PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;C1, 1, -100.0,

100.0, 1.0X”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;U4X”

PRINT #1, “ENTER07"

LINE INPUT #2, A$

PRINT A$

‘ Set points and hysteresis interpreted as °F

‘ Retrieve High/Low/Last readings

‘ Returned readings in binary low/high format

A-32

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

F# - Set Burst Mode Frequency

System

TYPE

Deferred

F#freq

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Select burst mode sampling frequency where freqis a real number and

where 38.5< freq< 20000.0Hertz (default).

DESCRIPTION

The Set Burst Mode Frequency (F#) command is used to select the channel sampling frequency when in the

High-speed, single-channel mode (burst mode). See Measuring Modes section of Appendix C for more

information.

For AC measurements where the RMS value is to be returned via the U16command, it is the user’s

responsibility to program a frequency which will yield a sufficient whole even number of samples per line cycle in

order to compute the RMS accurately. In general for AC measurements, the frequency should equal (2n * 60) Hz

where n is a positive integer.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F#15000.0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F#100.5X”

‘ Select 15 KHz sampling frequency

‘ Select 100.5 Hz sampling frequency

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-33

API Commands

Appendix A

G - Calibrate Channel Gain

Calibration

TYPE

Immediate

Gchan,

type

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Calibrate the correction gain constants for given option card where chanis

the channel number such that 1< chan< max,

where max = 128 for ChartScan/1400. The chassis is chan = 0.

typeis the channel type.

DESCRIPTION

Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary for

normal, everyday operation.

Active only in calibration mode, the Calibrate Channel Gain (G) command is used to calibrate the correction gain

constants for a given slide-in card. The channel gain value is necessary in order for the internal firmware to

accurately interpret readings coming from the input channels. This command will take the parameters chanand

typeand will calculate the gain based on the present channel input voltage.

Note: To achieve correct results, this command must be issued twice. First with a negative input voltage and

then with a positive input voltage.

Each time the command has been issued, the precision voltage source must remain at its value until the trigger

LED stops flashing. For further details on channel calibration, see Chapter 6.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;K12345X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;G17,1"

‘ Enter Calibration Mode

‘ Apply negative precision voltage

‘ Calculate (-) gain for T/C card, card #2

‘ Wait for command to complete

‘ Apply positive precision voltage

‘ Calculate (+) gain for T/C card, card #2

‘ Wait for command to complete

‘ Remove precision voltage

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;G17,1"

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;EX”

‘ End Calibration Mode

A-34

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

H - Calibrate Channel Offset

Calibration

TYPE

Immediate

Hchan

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Calibrate the correction offset constants for given option card where chanis

the channel number such that 1< chan< max,

where max = 128 for ChartScan/1400. The chassis is chan = 0.

DESCRIPTION

Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary for

normal, everyday operation.

Active only in calibration mode, the Calibrate Channel Offset (H) command is used to calibrate the correction

offset constants for a given slide-in card. The channel offset values are necessary in order for the internal

firmware to accurately interpret readings coming from the input channels. This command will take the parameter

chanand calculate the offsets based on the present channel input voltage.

Note: To achieve correct results 0.0 mV must be present at the desired channel prior to performing the

command. The 0.0 mV value is obtained by placing a “short” across the applicable channel. Chapter 6,

Calibration, provides illustrations of various channel shorts.

After the command has been issued, the precision voltage source must remain at its value at least until the

trigger LED stops flashing in order to achieve accurate results. Refer to Chapter 6 for more information

calibration.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;K12345X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;H17X”

‘ Enter Calibration Mode

‘ Connect short across applicable channel

‘ Calculate offsets for T/C card, card #2

‘ Wait for command to complete

‘ Remove precision voltage

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;EX”

‘ End Calibration Mode

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-35

API Commands

Appendix A

I - Set Scan Interval

Acquisition

Deferred

Inorm,

acq

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Set the two configurable scan intervals of the unit where normand acqare

the normal and acquisition scan intervals which have the form:

hh:mm:ss.twhere hhis hours, mmis minutes, ssis seconds, and tis

tenths of a second.

Query scan interval selection.

DESCRIPTION

The Set Scan Interval (I) command is used to set one of the following two distinct scan intervals:

The first is the “normal” scan interval, used when the unit is collecting scans before the start trigger has occurred

or after stop trigger has occurred. Scans in these two regions are called pre-trigger scans and post-stop scans,

respectively.

The second is the “acquisition” scan interval, used when the unit is acquiring scans after the start trigger has

occurred but before the stop event has occurred. Scans in this region are referred to as post-trigger scans.

The normand acqarguments represent the normal and acquisition scan intervals, respectively.

The scan interval can be set to run as fast as the current unit configuration will allow. This is referred to as “fast

mode”. Each of the two scan intervals can be configured as such by specifying 00:00:00.0as the argument

for the desired scan interval.

When the Icommand is interrogated by the unit, the unit will determine, by examining its current channel

configuration, if it is capable of running at the desired interval. If the unit determines that it is not capable of

running at the desired interval, it will automatically enable fast mode for the interval(s) in question. It will also

issue a Conflict Error to inform you that it is not running at the user-specified interval.

The scan interval can be programmed from a 24-hour period to a 0.1-second period in increments of 0.1 second.

If a scan interval of zero is programmed, the interval will default to fast mode. Likewise, if a scan interval is

programmed less than the unit is capable of running at, the interval will default to fast mode.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, OUTPUT07;I01:00:00.0,

00:00:00.0X

‘ Set normal scan interval to once every hour and

acquisition interval to fast mode

PRINT#1, OUTPUT07;I?X

PRINT#1, ENTER07

LINE INPUT #2, I$

PRINT I$

‘ Query the current scan intervals

‘ Screen shows I01:00:00.0,00:00:00.0

A-36

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

I# - Digital Input Stamping

System

TYPE

Deferred

I#state

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Specifies digital input stamping as enabled,or disabled. statemay have

either of the following values: the default of 0, which disables digital input

stamping, or 1to enable digital stamping.

DESCRIPTION

The Digital Input Stamping (I#) command, when enabled, will append the digital input state to the end of each

scan as it occurs in real time.

The digital input state consists of 8 bits (I8through I1). Each bit has an assigned binary value of “1” or “0,”

where “1” indicates digital input “on” and “0” indicates digital input “off.”

In binary mode, 2 bytes will be appended as follows: Byte 2: 00h, I8- I1

In ASCII mode, 8 bytes will be appended as follows: DXXXD000

Where D= User Terminator, and XXX= the decimal equivalent of I8- I1.

Note: If Alarm Stamping (A#) is also enabled, the Digital Input Stamp (I#) will be appended after the

Alarm Stamp.

EXAMPLES

Without Digital Input Stamping (default):

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;I#0X”

‘ Disable digital input stamp

‘ Configure and start an acquisition

‘ Request the next scan in the buffer

‘ Retrieve it

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R1X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07”

INPUT A$

‘

....+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60

With Digital Input Stamping:

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;I#1X”

‘ Enable digital input stamping

‘ Configure and start an acquisition

‘ Request the next scan in the buffer

‘ Retrieve it

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R1X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07”

INPUT A$

....+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60 036 000

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-37

API Commands

Appendix A

J - Calibrate Cold Junction Offset

Calibration

Immediate

Jchan,

type,

temp

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Calibrate the cold-junction offsets for cold-junction compensation of the

thermocouple signals where chanis the channel number such that

1< chan< max, where max = 128 for ChartScan/1400.

typeis the thermocouple channel type.

tempis the reference temperature currently being applied to the selected

channel, with the form nnn.nin degrees ºC.

DESCRIPTION

Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary for

normal, everyday operation.

Active only in calibration mode, the Calibrate Cold Junction Offset (J) command is used to calibrate the cold

junction offsets for cold-junction compensation of the thermocouple signals. Each thermocouple input channel

has associated with it one of these temperature sensors. Although calibrated at the factory, these temperature

sensors are subject to component aging which may affect their accuracy over time. The function of the Calibrate

Cold Junction Offset (J) command is to allow the adjusting of the internal firmware to compensate for the affects

of component aging.

Since there are 4 cold junction temperature sensors associated with 32 temperature input channels, it is

necessary to select 4 channels. Each channel is associated with one of the 4 cold junction temperature sensors

in order to calibrate all cold junction temperature sensors on a given card.

Note: Four separate channels on each card must be supplied with an accurate thermocouple signal of known

warm junction temperature.

The parameter typeis the same channel type that is used with the Configure Channels (C) command.

After the command has been issued, the applied thermocouple signal must remain at its value until the trigger

LED stops flashing in order to achieve accurate results. For further details on channel calibration, see Chapter 6.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;K12345X”

‘ Enter Calibration Mode

‘ Apply precision temperature

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;J1,2,101.7X”

‘ Compute cold junction offset for the temperature

sensor associated with the type K thermocouple

on channel 1 of card #1, at 101.7°C

‘ Wait for command to complete

‘ Remove precision temperature

‘ End calibration mode

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;EX”

A-38

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

K - Enter Calibration Mode

Calibration

TYPE

Immediate

Kkey

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Enter Calibration Mode if the keyword (or password) is correct, where keyis

the keyword in the form of a 5-digit number nnnnn. Therefore the

password can be no longer than 5 characters.

Query Kkeyas defined above.

DESCRIPTION

Note: Calibration should only be performed by a qualified metrology lab. If necessary contact the factory for

assistance.

The Enter Calibration Mode (K) command places the unit into Calibration Mode. While in Calibration Mode the

unit may be calibrated using any of the defined calibration commands. In addition, all other commands are valid

during Calibration Mode. However, if the unit is not in Calibration Mode, none of the defined calibration

commands are valid, and an error condition will be generated if any of these commands are issued.

The Kcommand requires a pre-defined keyword as a parameter. This keyword must match the existing keyword

definition in order to enter Calibration Mode. If the keyword is not correct, Calibration Mode will not be entered

and no calibration commands will be processed.

Note: If the keyword becomes lost or forgotten a new keyword can be issued with the *Kcommand.

Note: Refer to Chapter 6 for detailed calibration instruction.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;K12345X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;U2X”

PRINT #1, “ENTER07"

INPUT#2, C%

IF (C% AND 16) THEN

PRINT,"ERROR-INVALID KEYWORD”

HALT

‘ Enter Calibration Mode with the keyword 12345

‘ Check for keyword error

‘ Get the Calibration Status Register

‘ Is there a keyword error?

‘ If so, stop execution

ENDIF

‘ Connect short across applicable channel

‘ Calculate offset for card #2

‘ Wait for command to complete

‘ Wait until trigger LED stops flashing

‘ Apply (-) precision voltage

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT10;H17X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT10;G17,1X”

PRINT# 1, “EX”

‘ Calculate (-) gain for card #2

‘ Wait for command to complete

‘ Apply (+) precision voltage

‘ Calculate (+) gain for card #2

‘ Wait for command to complete

‘ Remove precision voltage

‘ End Calibration Mode

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-39

API Commands

Appendix A

L - Set Trigger Level

Channel

Deferred

Lchan,

level,

hyst

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Sets the level against which the testing of channel readings should be

performed where chanis the channel number such that 1< chan< max,

where max= 128for ChartScan/1400.

levelis the level against which the readings are tested to determine if the

level has been exceeded.

hystis the hysteresis level.

Query the the current level settings

DESCRIPTION

The Set Trigger Level (L) command simply sets the level against which the testing of channel readings should be

performed. The Set Trigger Configuration (T) command should be used to configure whether the level condition

should be tested for going above the specified level or below the specified level.

Note: This command is only valid for trigger start/stop events of T4and T5.

The parameter levelis the value, which, if exceeded (by going above or below it as defined), should generate

a trigger event. The parameter hystis the hysteresis value that, with level, is used to test whether the level

condition still persists. The level condition will persist until the channel readings no longer exceed the level as

specified. Further, in order to come out of the level condition, the channel readings must not exceed the

aggregate of the level and hysteresis values. The format for the leveland hystarguments follow the rules

for readings input defined under the Set Data Format (F) Command and in the Data Format section of

Appendix C.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F0,0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;L1,100.0,10.0X”

‘ Set the engineering units format to be degrees C

‘ Set the level channel to be channel 1 at a level 100.0

°C with a hysteresis of 10.0 °C

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;L?X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07"

LINE INPUT #2, L$

‘ Read the current level setting

‘ The screen shows L001,+0100.0,+0010.0

PRINT L$

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T4,5,0,0X”

‘ Set the unit to start on channel going above the level

and to stop on the channel going below the level

A-40

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

M - Set SRQ Mask

System

Deferred

Mmask

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Use the IEEE 488 Service Request (SRQ) mechanism to inform the

IEEE 488 bus controller of certain conditions, where maskis in the form of

the number nnnsuch that 000< nnn< 255is summed from the

following conditions:

000- Power-on default mask value

001- SRQ On Alarm

002- SRQ On Trigger Event

004- SRQ On Ready

008- SRQ On Scan Available

016- SRQ On Message Available

032- SRQ On Event Detected

128- SRQ On Buffer Overrun

Query the SRQ mask.

DESCRIPTION

The Set SRQ Mask (M) command uses the IEEE 488 Service Request (SRQ) mechanism to inform the IEEE 488

bus controller of the existence of several conditions in the Service Request Enable (SRE) Register. These

conditions are described in detail below. Multiple conditions can be enabled simultaneously. If multiple

conditions are contained within the same command string, each Set SRQ Mask command should be proceeded

by an Execute (X) command. The resulting SRQ Mask register value is the logical ORed value of the individual

values sent. Alternately, the entire value of all the desired conditions may be sent within one Set SRQ Mask (M)

command string. The programmed SRQ Mask remains enabled until the receipt of a M000command or the

detection of a Device Clear (DCL) or Selected Device Clear (SDC).

The following list outlines the possible conditions of the SRE:

M000: This is the power-on default mask value. It disables the unit from generating service requests by clearing

the entire mask of the Service Request Enable (SRE) Register to zero.

M001: SRQ On Alarm. Sending this command will enable the unit to generate an SRQ when it has recognized

that one or more channels has gone into alarm condition. Refer to the Configure Channels (C) command on how

to configure an alarm condition.

M002: SRQ On Trigger Event. Sending this command allows the unit to generate a service request when it has

detected a valid trigger from the programmed trigger source.

M004: SRQ On Ready. This command causes a service request to be generated when the unit has completed

executing a set of commands from the IEEE 488 bus controller. This is used to allow the bus controller to attend

to other bus matters while the unit is changing its internal state.

M008: SRQ On Scan Available. Sending this command will cause the unit to generate an SRQ when at least

one scan is available to be read in the acquisition buffer.

M016: SRQ On Message Available (MAV). Sending this command will cause the unit to generate an SRQ

when there is data available in the output queue to be read.

M032: SRQ On Event Detected. Sending this command will cause the unit to generate an SRQ when at least

one of the defined events in the Event Status Register has occurred. Refer to the Set Event Mask (N) command

on how to define events.

M128: SRQ On Buffer Overrun. Sending this command will cause the unit to generate an SRQ when it has

detected that an overrun of the acquisition buffer has occurred.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;M0X”

PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;M1XM2X”

PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;M?X”

‘ Clear the Service Request Enable (SRE) register

‘ Set the unit to SRQ on Alarm or Trigger

‘ Read the current Service Request Enable (SRE)

PRINT#1,“ENTER07"

LINE INPUT #2, M$

PRINT M$

‘ Computer screen shows M003

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-41

API Commands

Appendix A

M# - Set Measuring Mode

System

TYPE

Deferred

M#mode

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Specify measuring mode. Valid options for modeare: 0- Line cycle

integration / high-speed multi-channel mode, and 1- Single channel high-

speed burst mode.

DESCRIPTION

The Set Measuring Mode (M#) command selects one of the two internal measuring modes supported by the

ChartScan/1400 units:

Normal Mode (for Line Cycle Integration and High-Speed Multi-Channel applications). Normal mode is the

system default. In this mode each channel is averaged over a selected number of samples as specified with the

Set Averaging Weight (W#) command. As there are 32 samples per line cycle, 32, 64, 128, or 256 samples will

automatically enable line cycle noise rejection.

Thermocouples and DC Volts are averaged over the specified number of samples. For AC Volts, the root mean

square (RMS) is computed over the specified number of samples.

High-speed, Single-Channel Mode (Burst mode) is used to sample a single channel at a frequency specified

by the Set Frequency (F#) command. The channel is sampled in blocks of 256 readings, with the number of

blocks specified by the Set Counts (Y) command.

Refer to Measuring Mode section of Appendix B for more detailed information.

EXAMPLES

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;M#0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;W#32X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;Y0,10,0”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1-3,1X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;@X”

‘ Select Line Cycle Integration/High-Speed Multi-Channel Mode

‘ Select number of samples = 32

‘ Setup to read 10 post trigger scans

‘ Enable channels 1 - 3 for Type J thermocouples

‘ Arm the unit

‘ Trigger unit and collect scans

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;M#1X”

‘ Select Single Channel High-Speed Burst Mode

‘ Set sampling frequency = 10 KHz

‘ Set count to take 1 MB’s worth of samples

‘ Select channel 1 for reading 250 Volts AC samples

‘ Arm the unit

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F#10000.0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;Y0,4096,0”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1,26X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;@X”

‘ Trigger unit and collect scans

A-42

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

N - Set Event Mask

System

Deferred

Nmask

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Directly sets the Event Status Enable Register (ESE) where maskis in the

form of the number nnnsuch that 000< nnn< 255is summed from the

following conditions:

000- Clear event mask

001- Acquisition complete

002- Stop Event

016- Execution Error

032- Command Error

064- Buffer 75% Full

128- Power On

004- Query Error

008- Device Dependent Error

Query the Event mask.

DESCRIPTION

The Set Event Mask (N) command directly sets the Event Status Enable (ESE) Register. ESE conditions, in

turn, determine which Event Status Register (ESR) conditions are enabled to generate the Event Status Register

Bit (ESB) in the Serial Poll Status (SPS) Register. Multiple ESR bits can be enabled simultaneously by issuing

Set Event Mask (N) commands separately or by combining them in one command string. The programmed

Event Mask remains enabled until a Clear Event Mask (N0) command is sent or the controller sends a Power-On

Reset (*R) command. See the IEEE 488 Serial Poll Response section in Appendix C for more information.

The following list outlines the possible conditions of the ESE:

N000: Sending this command clears the entire mask of the Event Status Enable (ESE) Register to zero.

N001: Acquisition Complete. Sending this command allows the setting of the ESB if the unit has determined

that the configured acquisition has completed.

N002: Stop Event. Sending this command allows the setting of the ESB when the pre-defined stop event of a

configured acquisition has occurred.

N004: Query Error. This condition is set when an attempt is made to read data from the output queue when no

data are present or data in the output queue were lost. Data may be lost when too many data are requested to

be buffered in the queue (for example, issuing multiple commands to return data without ever reading them).

008: Device Dependent Error. This condition is set when a conflict in programmed parameters is detected.

This is also referred to as a conflict error.

N016: Execution Error. This condition is set when a parameter exceeds valid limits for a particular command.

This is also referred to as Invalid Device Dependent Command Option (IDDCO) error.

N032: Command Error. This condition is set when an illegal command is sent to the unit. This is also referred

to as Invalid Device Dependent Command (IDDC) error.

N064: Buffer 75% Full. Sending this command will allow the setting of the ESB when the unit has determined

that the acquisition buffer is at least 75% full.

N128: Power On. This condition is set whenever unit is first powered up or a *Ris issued.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;N0 X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;N? X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07"

LINE INPUT #2, N$

‘ Clear the Event Status Enable (ESE) Register

‘ Read the Event Status Enable (ESE) Register

‘ Computer screen shows N000

PRINT N$

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;N1N2X”

‘ Set enable ESB setting on pre-trigger count satisfied or

acquisition complete

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;N? X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07"

LINE INPUT #2, N$

PRINT N$

‘ Read the Event Status Enable (ESE) Register

‘ Computer screen shows N003

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;M32 X”

‘ Set SRQ on Event Detected (ESB). SRQ will now be

generated when pre-trigger count is satisfied or the

acquisition completes

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-43

API Commands

Appendix A

O - Set Digital Outputs

System

TYPE

Immediate

Obank1,

bank2,

bank3,

bank4

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Set any of the 32 digital outputs (separated into four 8-bit banks) to a

specified setting, where bankn(for n= 1, 2, 3, 4) is an argument in the

form of the number nnnsuch that 000< nnn< 255when converted to

binary format represents the desired settings for the 8-bit bank.

Query current state of digital output.

DESCRIPTION

The Set Digital Outputs (O) command may be used to force any of the 32 digital outputs (separated into four 8-bit

banks) on the unit to a certain setting. The Bank to Digital Output mapping is as follows:

Bank

Digital Output

01 - 08

09 - 16

17 - 24

25 - 32

Each argument banknrepresents the desired bit mapping for the corresponding bank of digital outputs. The

argument is a decimal number, which, when converted to binary format is the desired settings for that bank of

digital outputs. For example, an argument of 201for bank2would be interpreted in binary as 11001001(with

1as active high and 0as active low). This would affect the digital outputs of Bank 2 as follows:

Bank 2 Digital Outputs

high

low

high

low

high

Note: The setting of a bank will force the digital outputs to the specified setting regardless of the current state of

the digital outputs (such as if an alarm has been assigned to the output).

If it is desired to not affect a certain bank (maybe because it is being used for alarm outputs), a value of 999can

be used for the argument for that bank. This will effectively “mask off” that bank from being updated.

There are 8 digital input lines and 32 digital output lines available on a rear panel DB50 connector. The digital

output can be controlled either “automatically” via the alarm settings or manually using the Set Digital Outputs (O)

command. To determine the digital output state, use the User Status (U) commands.

The Set Digital Outputs (O) command allows you to enter an output range and specify whether the output should

be cleared (logic false) or set (logic true). This command will force the specified digital output to the specified

condition. A 1will drive the corresponding digital output(s) high. Conversely, a 0will drive the corresponding

digital output(s) low.

Each digital output line will drive 5 standard TTL loads. All digital input lines are one-eighth (0.125) TTL loads. All

inputs are protected against damage from high static voltages. Normal precautions should be taken to limit the

input voltages to 0.3 to 5.3 volts. All digital I/O lines are referenced to digital ground.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;O?X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07"

LINE INPUT #2, N$

PRINT N$

‘ Get the current state of the digital outputs banks

‘ Screen shows O128,255,065,024

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;O0,999,76,234X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;O?X”

PRINT#1

‘ Set Banks 1, 3, and 4

‘ Get the current state of the digital outputs

‘ Screen shows O000,255,076,234

‘ Note that Bank 2 did not change

LINE INPUT #2, O$

PRINT O$

A-44

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

P - Program Trigger Times

Channel

TYPE

Deferred

Pstart,

stop

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Set the trigger start and/or stop times for an acquisition configured for start

and/or stop on absolute time, where startand stopare in the standard

time/date stamp format: HH:MM:SS:T,mm/dd/yywhere His hours,

MMis minutes, SSis seconds, Tis tenths of a second, mmis month,

ddis day, and yyis year.

Query current start and stop times in the form: Pstart,stop

DESCRIPTION

The Program Trigger Times (P) command may be used to set the trigger start and/or stop times for an

acquisition that is configured for start and/or stop on Absolute Time as configured by the Set Trigger

Configuration (T) command.

The Program Trigger Times command is to be used in concert with the Set Trigger Configuration command when

it is desired to begin and/or stop an acquisition on certain times and/or dates. The values of the start and stop

times are only used when the start and/or stop events have been configured for Absolute Time.

If only the start time is needed, the stopargument should be set to 00:00:00.0,00/00/00. Likewise, if

only the stop time is needed, the startargument should be set to 00:00:00.0,00/00/00.

In addition to the ability to start/stop on a particular time/date the unit has the ability to start/stop at a particular

time, independent of the date. If the date for the start/stop time is of no concern, then the date portion of the

time/date field should be set to 00/00/00. In this way, the unit can start or stop an acquisition at a particular

time regardless of the date. This feature is particularly useful when using the auto-rearm feature of the unit since

it will allow the collection of data at a particular time each day without user intervention.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;S12:54:00.0,

01/01/93X”

‘ Set the internal clock of the unit

PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;P01:00:00, 0,

01/01/93, 02:00:00.0, 01/01/93X”

PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07;T11,11,0,0X”

‘ Set start (1:00 am) and stop (2:00 am)

acquisition times

‘ Configure for start/stop on Absolute Time

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-45

API Commands

Appendix A

? - Query

System

Immediate

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Query the present configuration or mode of the command preceding the ?

DESCRIPTION

Most commands have a corresponding Query (?) command formed by appending a question mark (?) to the

command letter. Query commands place their responses into the output queue until the controller retrieves

them. They respond with the present configuration or mode of a previously executed command. When

appropriate, the response from a Query command is in the form of a command string which, if it were executed,

would put the unit into the configuration it was in when the Query was executed.

For instance, the response of the User Terminator Query (V?X) command is in the following form: Vvalwhere

0< val< 255. This response is in the form of the Set User Terminator (V) command and, if it is sent to the

unit, it would set the User Terminator to the same value that it had when the Query was issued. Query

responses are always fixed-length strings in a pre-defined format.

Any number of Query commands can be combined into one string to create a specialized status command that

responds with only the information of interest for a given application.

Query commands are immediate. Their responses are generated as soon as they are interpreted, before any

other commands, including the Execute (X) command.

Note: Even though Query commands generate their responses as soon as they are interpreted, they must still

be followed by an Execute (X) command for proper termination. For more information on command

execution, refer to the Xcommand reference presented later in this appendix.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; V1 X V? X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07”

INPUT A$

‘ Get the response of current User Terminator

‘ Retrieve response

‘ Screen shows V1

PRINT A$

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; V0 X V? X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07”

INPUT A$

‘ Change User Terminator and get response

‘ Retrieve response

‘ Screen shows V0

‘ Change User Terminator and get response - No

intermediate Xcommand

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; V4 V? X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07”

INPUT A$

‘ Retrieve response

‘ Screen shows V0User Terminator. Response is still V0

because the immediate command V?was executed

before the deferred command V4

PRINT A$

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; V? X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07”

INPUT A$

‘ Get User Terminator response

‘ Retrieve response

‘ Screen shows new User Terminator V4

A-46

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

Q - Set Query Terminator

System

TYPE

Deferred

Qresp,

hll,

scan,

block,

sep

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Set the query terminators with the following parameters: respis the

response terminator, hllis the channel terminator, scanis the terminator

which follows each scan output, and blockis the terminator which follows

each trigger block output.

sepdetermines whether or not a separator character should be used. Valid

options for separe: 0- Place no separators in returned buffered scan data

when it is read, and 1- Place a separator whose value is determined by the

current Set User Terminator (V) command setting into the returned buffer

data when it is read.

Query current terminator settings.

DESCRIPTION

The Set Query Terminator (Q) command is used to set the following query terminators:

resp: This argument specifies the response terminator for general purpose queries issued by the controller.

These queries are queries that do not request High/Low/Last or Acquisition Buffer data. This terminator is used

in all query responses unless the query refers to data in the High/Low/Last registers or the Acquisition Buffer. In

these cases, these types of queries have separate terminators as described below.

hll: This argument specifies the channel terminator to be used for queries which request data residing in the

High/Low/Last registers. When this terminator is specified, the terminator will be inserted between each channel

response when a High/Low/Last register query request is made. The queries that request High/Low/Last register

data are U4, U5, U13, and R#. Remember, the Read Last Readings (R#) command is an HLL register query.

scan: This argument specifies the terminator which will follow each scan that is output when a query request is

made for Acquisition Buffer data. When a query request is made for Acquisition Buffer data, this terminator will

be used to terminate each scan as it is output to the interface. This will be true except for the last scan in the

block. In this case, the trigger block terminator will be used to terminate the scan and the block. The only query

command which requests Acquisition Buffer data is the Read Buffered Data (R) command.

block: This argument specifies the terminator which will follow each trigger block that is output when a query

request is made for Acquisition Buffer data. When a query request is made for Acquisition Buffer data, this

terminator will be used to terminate each trigger block as it is output to the interface. This terminator will be in

effect during Read Buffer Data (R) commands. It should be noted that the last scan in the trigger block to be

output will be terminated by the defined trigger block terminator rather than the scan terminator.

Each of the above four arguments may be defined with one of the following terminator types, where USERis the

user-defined terminator corresponding to the numeric (ASCII) value val, as defined by the Set User Terminator

(V) command:

Terminator Type

Terminator Description

IEEE-488

Serial

(None)

CR LF

LF CR

(None)

CR LF/EOI

CR LF

LF CR/EOI

LF CR

CR/EOI

LF/EOI

USER/EOI

USER

sep: This argument specifies whether or not a separator character should be placed between each returned

reading in the buffer scan data. This field will be in effect during Read Buffer Data (R) commands. The value of

this field is interpreted as follows: 0- Place no separators in returned buffered scan data when it is read, and 1-

Place a separator, whose value is determined by the current Set User Terminator (V) command setting, into the

returned buffer data when it is read.

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-47

API Commands

Appendix A

The following table summarizes terminator usage with all possible commands in ASCII mode (no terminators are

used in binary mode), where X indicates that the terminator is asserted at the end of the response, O indicates

that the terminator is asserted within the response to separate channel and scan readings, and a blank cell

indicates that the terminator does not affect the command:

Command

Argument

resp

hll

scan

block

sep

R1X

R2X

R3X

R#chanX

R#first-lastX

U4X

U5X

U13X

All others

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-4,1X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;F0,0X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q7,7,0,0,0X"

‘ Configure four channels for T/C Type J

‘ Configure engineering units, degrees C

‘ Set the respand hllterminators to LF/EOI, and

the scanand blockterminators to None

‘ Get the current query terminators

‘ Screen shows Q07,07,00,00,00

‘ Request the last readings

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q?X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;U13X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT#1 A$

‘ Get reading for channel 1

‘ Screen shows +0104.20

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT#1 A$

‘ Get reading for channel 2

‘ Screen shows +0010.40

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT#1 A$

‘ Get reading for channel 3

‘ Screen shows -0064.10

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT#1 A$

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Q7,0,0,0,0X"

‘ Get reading for channel 4

‘ Screen shows +0006.30

‘ Set the respterminator to LF/EOIand the hll,

scanand blockterminators to None

‘ Request the last readings

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;U13X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

‘ Get readings for channels 1 - 4. Screen shows...

+0104.20

+0010.40

-0064.10

+0006.30

A-48

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

QC? - Query Card Data

Calibration

TYPE

Immediate

QC?

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Read back card ID and calibration information from the card previously

selected by the Select Card (C#) command.

DESCRIPTION

Note: This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration. It is not necessary for

normal, everyday operation.

The information returned is as follows:

•

Card Number

Serial Number

Card ID (type 16

•

Gains and offsets for PGA values 0 – 7

Offsets and temperature sensors

Time and date last calibrated

- TC/Volts card)

(type 17 - High Volts card)

Refer to the Select Card (C#) command for selecting chassis, card only, or card/chassis information.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; C#5X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; QC?X”

INPUT#1 A$

‘ Select card #5

‘ Read back the card #5 information

PRINT#1 A$

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-49

API Commands

Appendix A

A-50

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

R - Read Buffered Data

Buffer

TYPE

Immediate

Rtype

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Read scan data from the acquisition buffer where typeis the type of data

request being made. Valid options for typeare: 1- Read the oldest scan

currently residing in the acquisition buffer, 2- Read the oldest complete

trigger block currently residing in the acquisition buffer, and 3- Read all the

scan data that currently resides in the acquisition buffer.

Query the contents of the data buffer.

DESCRIPTION

The Read Buffered Data (R) command may only be used to extract data from the acquisition buffer which has

been collected as a result of an acquisition that has been previously configured. For more information regarding

the configuration of acquisitions, refer to the Set Trigger Configuration (T) command.

Since the unit’s buffer is organized as a FIFO (first in, first out), the Read Buffer Data command will always read

the oldest data available in the buffer first. As the controller requests buffer scan data, the unit supplies the

oldest available scan. After the scan is supplied, that scan is no longer available. As scan data is read from the

acquisition buffer, the data is removed from the buffer and, thereafter, may not be referenced or read.

This command operates as follows: When a Read Buffer Data (R) command is interpreted, the requested scan

data, if it exists, is moved, one scan at a time, from the Acquisition Buffer to the output queue where it will wait in

state until you remove it. Once the data is removed from the output queue, the next Read Buffered Data

command may be issued.

Note: If the appropriate amount of scan data is not in the acquisition buffer at the time these commands are

issued, a conflict error will result.

The Scan Available bit in the Status Byte (STB) register may be queried or Serial Polled to determine if there is

any buffer scan data available. For a more complete description of how much data is available in the acquisition

buffer at any particular time, the Buffer Status String (U6) command may be issued.

The Set Query Terminators (Q) command determines the format for the terminators for acquisition buffer data.

For more information regarding the acquisition buffer terminators, refer to the Set Query Terminators (Q)

command.

Note: In High-speed, single-channel (burst mode), “scan” means one block of 256 samples.

EXAMPLE

S% = 0

‘ Wait for a scan

‘ Get the scan

While (S% and 8) = 0

PRINT#1 “SPOLL07"

INPUT#2, S%

WEND

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R1X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

LINE INPUT#2, A$

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-51

API Commands

Appendix A

R# - Read Last Readings

System

TYPE

Immediate

R#chans

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Queries the last readings from the HLL Registers for specified channels.

chansmay be in two forms:

chan(for a single channel where 1< chan< max), or

first-last(for a range of channels where 1< first< last< max),

where max = 128 for ChartScan/1400.

DESCRIPTION

The Read Last Readings (R#) command will return a subset of the Query Last (U13) command. It allows the

specifying of specific channels within the current channel configuration. This command is useful for querying

specific channels without having unwanted channels returned. The response to this command takes the same

form as the Query Last (U13) command, whereby each reading conforms to the reading output format specified

by the Set Data Format (F) command. In addition, each channel is terminated by the HLL terminator hll, as

specified with the Set Query Terminator (Q) command.

Note: If the specified channel, or a range of channels, is not currently defined in the scan group as configured by

the Channel Configuration (C) command, a conflict error will be flagged.

EXAMPLES

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-16,1X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;F1,0X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R#16X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

‘ Configure channels 1 - 16 for T/C Type J

‘ Set format for engineering units degrees C

‘ Get the last reading for channel 16

‘ Screen shows +0103.20(channel 16 is 103.2 °C)

LINE INPUT #2, R$

PRINT R

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R#1-4X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

‘ Get the Last readings for channels 1 - 4

‘ Screen shows

-0003.70 (channel 1 is -3.7 °C)

+0005.60 (channel 2 is 5.6 °C)

+0010.20 (channel 3 is 10.2 °C)

+0024.40 (channel 4 is 24.4 °C)

LINE INPUT #2, R$

PRINT R#

A-52

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

S - Set Real Time Clock

System

TYPE

Immediate

Stime

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Set the unit’s internal real-time clock where timeis in the standard time/date

stamp format: HH:MM:SS:T,mm/dd/yywhere His hours, MMis

minutes, SSis seconds, Tis tenths of a second, mmis month,

ddis day, and yyis year.

Query Stimeas defined above.

DESCRIPTION

The Set Real Time Clock (S) command is used to set the unit’s internal real-time clock. The timeargument

follows the same format as the standard time/date stamp input format as specified in the Data Format section of

Appendix C.

The Set Real Time Clock command is used to set the battery backed internal real-time clock of the unit. In order

for the time/date stamped data to be accurate, the internal real-time clock must be set to an accurate time/date.

Once set, however, the battery-backed real-time clock will remember the current time, even when powered-off.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; S14:00:00.0,4/30/93X”

‘ Current date and time

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-53

API Commands

Appendix A

T - Set Trigger Configuration

Acquisition

TYPE

Deferred

Tstart,

stop,

re-arm,

sync

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Configure an acquisition of scan data with the following parameters:

startis the start event

stopis the stop event

re-armdetermines if the unit should continue acquiring after the first

acquisition completes, where 1is on and 0is off.

syncdetermines if acquisition events should be synchronized with the

internal timebases, where 1is on and 0is off.

Query the present trigger configuration

DESCRIPTION

The Set Trigger Configuration (T) command is the central command which controls how an acquisition is to be

configured. Upon execution of this command the unit enters the acquiring mode. This will be indicated on the

front panel by the flashing of the TRIGGER light. If a pre-trigger has been configured (via the Ycommand), then

the sampling for pre-trigger data will begin at this time.

Since the Set Trigger Configuration command controls the configuration of an acquisition, all other acquisition

dependent commands should be sent before the Set Trigger Configuration command is sent to the unit. The

commands which should be sent to the unit prior to the Set Trigger Configuration command will depend on the

desired start and/or stop triggers. For instance, if configuring for Trigger on Command, it would not be necessary

to send the Set Trigger Level (L) command.

The following table lists the valid trigger types and their associated required prior issue commands.

Start/Stop

Trigger

Type

Start/Stop Trigger Definition

Pre-Trigger/

Post Stop

Required Prior Issue

Commands

None - Event Not Defined

(N/A)

yes

(N/A)

I,Y

I,Y,L

I,L

I,Y,L

I,L

I,Y

Trigger on Command(See @command)

Trigger on GET (IEEE-488 only)

Trigger on Talk (IEEE-488 only)

Trigger on Channel Above Level (Lcommand)

Trigger on Channel Below Level (Lcommand)

Trigger on TTL Signal Rising

Trigger on TTL Signal Falling

I,Y

Trigger on Count (Ycommand)

Trigger on Alarm Turning On (Ccommand)

—

yes

I,Y,C,A(Ais optional)

I,C,A(Ais optional)

I,Y,C,A(Ais optional)

I,C,A(Ais optional)

I,Y,P

Trigger on Alarm Turning Off (Ccommand)

Trigger on Absolute Time (Pcommand)

I,P

Note: If the start and stop triggers are of different types, a combination of the start and stop prior issue

commands is required.

The Set Trigger Configuration (T) command is used to configure the manner in which scans are to be acquired.

It sets the sources to determine when an acquisition is to be initiated and when it is to be terminated. It also

determines how these acquisition sources are to be (if at all) synchronized with the internal scan intervals (I)

command. Likewise, it may allow the acquisition to re-enable itself (with the same configuration) after the initial

acquisition has been terminated.

A-54

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

(1) The first parameter, start, defines the event that is to take place in order for the unit to begin acquiring

scans. This event is referred to as the Start Trigger. When the unit has recognized that a Start Trigger has been

encountered, it will begin acquiring scans at that point. The first of these scans, the Start Trigger scan, will be

time/date stamped for later reference. Also, when the Start Trigger is recognized, the Triggered Bit (02) of the

Status Byte will be set and the TRIGGER light on the front panel will turn on.

Setting the startparameter to 0will disable the acquiring of scan; this may be performed at any time during or

after an acquisition. The startparameter will automatically be set to 0upon the termination of an acquisition

unless the re-arm flag is set to 1.

Note: If the trigger start event is level or alarm, at least one pre-trigger scan must be programmed to initiate

scanning in order for the event to be recognized.

(2) The second parameter, stop, defines the event that is to take place in order for the unit to stop acquiring

scans. This event is referred to as the Stop Trigger. When the unit has recognized that a Stop Trigger has been

encountered, it will stop acquiring scans at that point (unless post-stop count is defined; see Ycommand). The

last scan collected, the Stop Trigger scan, will be time/date stamped for later reference. Also, when the Stop

Trigger is recognized, the Trigger Bit (02) of the Status Byte will be cleared and the TRIGGER light on the front

panel will turn off.

Setting the stopparameter to 0will have the same effect as setting the stopparameter to 1(Stop on Count)

with Post-Stop Count (Y) command set to 0. In both cases, the Start Trigger scan will be collected and the

acquisition immediately terminated.

(3) The third parameter, re-arm, determines if, after the initial acquisition, the acquisition should be re-enabled

automatically. If this parameter is set, then after the Stop Trigger is recognized and the acquisition terminated a

new acquisition (with the same configuration) will be enabled automatically. In other words, after the termination

of the previous acquisition, the unit will immediately begin another acquisition of the same configuration.

Otherwise, if the parameter is not set, new acquisitions will remain disabled after the initial acquisition has

terminated.

(4) The fourth parameter, sync, determines if the Start Trigger should be synchronized with the internal Pre-

Trigger Scan Interval (I) command value. If the Pre-Trigger Count (Y) command is defined, this parameter will

be examined to determine if the Start Trigger should be synchronized with the internal Pre-Trigger Timebase

Interval. If so, then the Start Trigger, regardless of what point in time it occurred, will be synchronized with the

next occurrence of the Pre-Trigger Scan Interval “tick.” In other words, if the real Start Trigger occurs between

Pre-Trigger Scan Interval “ticks,” then the acquisition will not begin until the next “tick” of the Pre-Trigger Scan

Interval. Otherwise, the acquisition will begin as soon as the Start Trigger is encountered.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; I12:00:00:0,

00:01:00.0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;Y100,10000,0X”

‘ Collect scans once every 12 hours then when Start

Trigger occurs collect them once every minute

‘ Set pre-trigger count to 100, post-trigger count to 10000

and define no post-stop count

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;T1,7,0,1X”

‘ Start Trigger On (@) command, Stop Trigger on post-

trigger count (10000) and synchronize the Start

Trigger to the pre-trigger timebase interval

‘ Issue Start Trigger (acquisition may begin as much as 12

hours from now because we synchronized with pre-

trigger timebase interval)

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;@X”

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-55

API Commands

Appendix A

U - User Status

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

System

Immediate

Ureq

Request information about various internal conditions of the unit where req

refers to one of the following request types:

0- Query and clear the Event Status Register (ESR)

1- Query the Status Byte Register (STB)

2- Query and clear Calibration Status Register (CSR)

3- Query system settings

4- Query current High/Low/Last registers

5- Query and clear current High/Low/Last

6- Query the Buffer Status String

7- Query assigned alarm outputs

8- Query configured channels

9- Query digital inputs

10- Query memory option (in Kbytes)

11- Query all channels having programmed valid alarm setpoints

12- Query last calibration time/date

13- Query last scan read

14- Query card IDs

15- Query product information

16- Query measuring mode parameters

17- Query root mean square (RMS)

18- Query acquisition states and various system flags

DESCRIPTION

The User Status (U) command is used to return information about various conditions of the unit, and may be sent

at any time without interfering with normal operation. Any error conditions, except Calibration Errors, are cleared

after the status string is read by the controller. Calibration errors are cleared when the unit is calibrated.

Status strings are returned when the unit is next addressed to Talk. The terminators used and the use of the End

Or Identify (EOI) line can be changed with the Set Query Terminator (Q) and Set User Terminator (V) commands.

If the unit is configured to trigger on Talk, requesting a status report will not cause the unit to trigger.

The following paragraphs provide more detailed information about the Uresponses.

U0: Reads and clears the Event Status Register (ESR). Refer to the Status and Event Reporting sections of

Appendix C for details on status reporting. U0responds with:

001- Acquisition Complete

002- Stop Event

004- Query Error

016- Execution Error

032- Command Error

064- Buffer 75% Full

128- Power-On

008- Device Dependent Error

U1: Reads the Status Byte register (STB). The response to this request is the same as in an IEEE 488 Serial

Poll except that bit 6 carries the Master Summary Status (MSS) rather than the Request for Service. The Status

Byte register is a read-only register whose bits correspond to those of the Service Request Enable (SRE) register

with the addition of bit value 64 which responds with the Master Summary Status. The Master Summary Status

bit indicates whether or not this device needs service. It responds with:

001- Alarm

002- Triggered

004- Ready

016- Message Available

032- Event Detected

128- Buffer Overrun

008- Scan Available

U2: Read and clear the Calibration Status Register (CSR). The response to this request is the current contents

of the Calibration Status Register. This register contains information regarding the calibration of the unit and any

errors encountered while attempting to calibrate the unit. Refer to the following figure for details about the

Calibration Status Register.

A-56

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

Contents of Calibration Status Register (CSR)

U3: Query the current system settings. This command responds with the equivalent of the following:

F?I?L?P?Q?S?T?Y?

U4: Reads the current High/Low/Last data for all configured channels. Refer to the Data Output Format section

of Appendix C for the format of the High/Low/Last response.

U5: Reads and resets the High/Low/Last data. This command performs exactly like the U4command except

that it clears out the current High and Low readings for all of the configured channels.

U6: Reads the Buffer Status String. The buffer status string contains current information regarding the current

state of the acquisition buffer. The current status of the acquisition buffer may be interrogated at any time by

issuing the Buffer Status String (U6) command. As mentioned earlier, the U6command is a user query

command which will return information regarding the current state of the acquisition buffer. The acquisition buffer

holds scan data that has been initiated by one or more trigger events. This data is held in trigger blocks within

the buffer. Each trigger block defines one acquisition that has taken place. The trigger blocks may be variable in

length. The Buffer Status String command provides the interface in which the current acquisition buffer

configuration may be queried.

The Buffer Status String (U6) command returns the following fields:

•

Blocks Available: This field represents the total number of blocks currently contained within the

buffer. The total represents the total number of blocks that have been triggered. A block need not be

complete to be included in this total, it only needs to be triggered. This field also represents the

number of trigger blocks that the read block is behind the current write block. If there are no blocks

available, then Blocks Available will be 0000000.

Scans Available: This field represents the total number of scans available at the time the U6

command was issued. It should be noted that pre-trigger data is not available for use until the defined

trigger event has taken place. This total represents the total number of scans available across all

blocks in the acquisition buffer. If there are no scans available in the buffer, then Scans Available will

be 0000000.

Current Read Pointer: This field represents the current position within the current read block. This

pointer is relative to the trigger point which is always oriented at location 0. In other words if, currently,

pre-trigger scans are being read, the Current Pointer will be less than 0. Likewise, if post-trigger scans

are currently being read, the Current Read Pointer will be greater than 0. If the current scan to be read

is the trigger scan, then the Current Read Pointer will be 0000000. If the Current Read Pointer is

undefined its value will be -0999999.

•

Trigger Time Stamp: This field represents the Time/Date that the trigger event occurred for the

current read block. This field takes on the same format as other time/date stamp fields described

elsewhere in this manual. If the trigger event has not occurred, then this field will have the value

00:00:00.00,00/00/00.

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-57

API Commands

Appendix A

•

Stop Scan Pointer: This field represents the location in the current read block that the stop event

occurred. This pointer will always be relative to the trigger point with the trigger point always oriented at

location 0. Since the stop event must always occur after the trigger event this pointer will always be

greater than 0. If the stop event has not yet occurred at the time of the U6query, this field will have

the value of -0999999.

•

Stop Time Stamp: This field represents the Time/Date that the stop event occurred for the current

read block. This field takes on the same format as other time/date stamp fields described elsewhere in

this manual. If the stop event has not yet occurred at the time of the U6query, then this field will have

the value 00:00:00.00,00/00/00.

End Scan Pointer: This field represents the location in the current read block that the end scan

occurred. This pointer will always be relative to the trigger point with the trigger point always oriented at

location 0. Since the end scan must always occur after the trigger event this pointer will always be

greater than 0. If the end scan has not yet occurred at the time of the U6query, this field will have the

value of -0999999. This field will always be the same as the Stop Scan Pointer, unless a post-stop

count is specified (Ycommand) in which case the End Scan Pointer will be greater than the Stop Event

Pointer by the value of the post-stop count.

•

Block Status: This field represents the status of the current read block. If the current read block is not

yet completely written then the value of this field will be 00. If the current read block has been

completely written and has terminated normally the value will be 01. If, however, the current read

block has prematurely terminated (because of user intervention) the value will be 02.

Note: Trigger blocks are not assigned a trigger block number per se. The trigger block numbers referred to

in the U6examples (in Appendix C are relative to the read and write blocks, respectively.

U7: Returns the input channel to digital output channel assignments in the form A? Achan,outputfor each

channel that is currently assigned to a digital output.

U8: Reads the current configuration settings for each channel configured in the unit. This command returns the

same information in as the C?command except that it returns it for all channels which are configured.

U9: Read the Digital Inputs. This command will read the current state of the digital inputs. This function is

performed by reading each of the eight digital inputs, converting each input to a binary (high is 1and low is 0)

and converting that aggregate binary 8-bit number into a decimal number. The decimal number is then returned

as the response nnnwhere it has the following form: 000≤ nnn≤ 255.

U10: Queries the installed memory option. This command will return the amount of memory installed (in

Kbytes). The possible responses are:

00256- 256 Kbyte option

04096- 4 Meg option

01024- 1 Meg option

08192- 8 Meg option

U11: Queries all channels having programmed valid alarm setpoints. The response is

CCC,A,CCC,A,CCC,A…where: CCCis a channel number in 3-didgit format, and Ais the alarm state with 0

indicating “not in alarm state,” and 1indicating “in an alarm state.” An example of a response in which channel 1

is the only channel in an alarm state is as follows:

001,1,002,0,003,0 …

U12: Reads the last calibration time/date stamp. The response is the #(number sign, to distinguish it from

other time/date stamps) appended with the time/date of the last calibration. For example:

#12:31:01.20,04/24/93

U13: Queries the last scan read.

U14: Queries the card type. Returns card ID for each card slot. Valid card IDs for use with ChartScan are:

-1- Card not installed

16- TC/Volts card

17- High volts card

Note: This command can only be issued when all channels are in an unconfigured state. If any channel is

configured, the system will issue a command conflict error in response to the U14command. Also

see QC?And Ccommands.

U15: Queries the product information. The response to this command is the current product information

including revision levels.

U16: This command queries the measuring mode parameters defined by the Set Measuring Mode (M#), Set

Burst Mode Frequency (F#), and Set Averaging Weight (W#) commands. The response has the following form:

M#modeF#freqW#wt

A-58

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

U17: This command computes and returns the root mean square (RMS) value of the last completed burst mode

acquisition.

U18: Queries the acquisition states and various system flags. The response nnnhas the following integer

form: 000≤ nnn≤ 255. The bit mapping of the response is as follows:

EXAMPLES

Refer to the EXAMPLES section for each of the following commands:

*K - Change Calibration Keyword

C - Configure Channels

C# - Select Card

F - Set Data Format

K - Enter Calibration Mode

Q - Set Query Terminator

X - Execute

Y - Set Counts

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-59

API Commands

Appendix A

V - Set User Terminator

System

Deferred

Vval

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Set the User Terminator value to any character whose numeric value (ASCII

value) valis in the range 0to 255.

Query the present user terminator value.

DESCRIPTION

The Set User Terminator (V) command is used to set the User Terminator value to any character whose numeric

value (ASCII value) is in the range 0to 255. The User Terminator may be used by the Set Query Terminator (Q)

command to specify a user-defined terminator for any of the defined terminator types or as a reading separator

for the Read Buffered Data (R) command.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;Q1,0,1,1,1X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F0,0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;V44X”

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-4,1X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;I00:00:01.0,

00:00:00.1”

‘ Set the reading separator flag ON

‘ Data format is engineering units, degrees C

‘ Set the User Terminator to be a comma (,)

‘ Configure channels 1 - 4 as T/C type J

‘ Configure scan interval

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Y0,1000,0X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X"

‘ Configure acquisition counts

‘ Configure acquisition, start trigger is Trigger On (@)

command, stop trigger is Counts

‘ Trigger the acquisition

‘ Read a Scan

‘ Retrieve the Scan

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;@X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R1X”

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Screen shows +0020.30, +0023.80,

+0034.90, +0013.50

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;V58X”

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R1X

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Set the User Terminator to be a colon (:)

‘ Read a Scan

‘ Retrieve the Scan

‘ Screen shows +0020.30: +0023.80:

+0034.90: +0013.50

A-60

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

W# - Set Average Weight

System

TYPE

Deferred

W#wt

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Specify the number of samples to average in the Normal mode, where wtis the

average weight. Valid options for wtare: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, and

256 (with 32 being the default value).

DESCRIPTION

Normal mode is used for line cycle integration for noise filtering, or for high-speed multiple channel use when

noise is not a problem. The selection for Average Weight (W#) determines how many samples to average for

each thermocouple or DC volts channel, or how many samples over which the root mean square (RMS) is

calculated for AC volts. As there are 32 samples per line cycle, setting wtto 32, 64, 128, or 256samples will

automatically enable line cycle noise rejection.

Note: Due to hardware constraints, weights greater than 128limit the number of channels which can be active

in an acquisition to 122 channels, maximum.

Weight (wt)

1,2,4,8,16,32,64,128

256

Maximum # of Channels

128

122

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;M#0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;W#64X”

PRINT#1,

‘ Select line cycle integration/high-speed multi-channel mode

‘ Select number of samples = 64

‘ Setup to read 10 post trigger scans

“OUTPUT07;Y0,10,0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;C1-

3,1X”

‘ Enable channels 1 - 3 for Type J thermocouples

‘ Arm the unit

PRINT#1,

“OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;@X”

‘ Trigger unit and collect scans

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-61

API Commands

Appendix A

X - Execute

System

Immediate

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

Execute preceding command string.

DESCRIPTION

Most commands are interpreted and processed as they are received but are not executed until the Execute (X)

command is issued. Commands sent without an Xare stored in an internal buffer and are not executed until an

Xis received.

While a command line is being interpreted, the front panel LEDs will not be updated. These LEDs will only be

updated when the unit is in a ready state. In order to determine if the unit is in a ready state, perform a Serial

Poll for the ready bit (4).

If multiple system commands are used in the same string, each use of the command must be followed by the

Execute (X) command. Any number of Execute commands may be inserted into the same command string.

EXAMPLE

PRINT#1,"CLEAR07"

‘ Clear the unit

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;*C"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-16,1 C17,2

C18-32,3"

‘ Clear the current channel configuration

‘ Send channel configuration

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;U4"

‘ Get HLL for the new channel configuration

‘ (ERROR light turns ON)

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;X"

‘ Instruct the unit to execute its command input buffer.

Now the unit has its new channel configuration

‘ Find out what caused the error

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;E?X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Retrieve Error response

‘ Screen shows E128- Conflict Error due to fact that no

channels were configured (Cis a deferred command)

when the U4was executed (U4is an immediate

command)

A-62

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix A

API Commands

Y - Set Counts, or Select Blocks

Acquisition

Deferred

Ypre,post,

stop

TYPE

EXECUTION

SYNTAX

When in Normal mode of data acquisition, set acquisition counts where pre

is the pre-trigger count, postis the post-trigger count and stopis the

post-stop count.

Y0,count,0

When in High-speed, single-channel mode (burst mode), set count; where

countis the number of 256 sample blocks to be collected

Query current acquisition count selections.

DESCRIPTION

Normal Mode

When in Normal mode for data acquisition, the Set Counts (Y) command can be used to select a pre-trigger,

post-trigger, and post-stop count to define the size of the acquisition. The pre-trigger count cannot exceed the

memory size, but the post-trigger count can. If the post-trigger count exceeds the memory size, it is the

responsibility of the IEEE 488 controller to deplete the FIFO buffer as the data is being collected, or a buffer

overrun error will occur. A Post Stop Event Count can also be associated with an acquisition to collect a counted

amount of samples after the Stop Event occurs.

If a trigger is encountered before the pre-trigger count is satisfied, the unit will trigger but have fewer than the

specified pre-trigger count in its buffer. The Buffer Status String (U6) command can be used to query the box for

the size of the pre-trigger. Although normal pre-trigger scans are acquired as soon as the acquisition is armed,

they are not available or valid until the start trigger event occurs.

Note: The unit can be configured to have different timebases for its pre-and post-trigger states. When the user-

specified trigger condition is satisfied, the unit goes from the pre-trigger to the post-trigger state, changing

its timebase, if configured to do so. Refer to the Continuous, Gap-Free Acquisition with Two Timebases

in Appendix B for more information.

High-Speed, Single-Channel Mode

When in High-speed, single-channel mode (burst mode); count(see syntax) is used to select the number of 256

sample blocks to collect. Valid values for countare as follows:

System Memory

256 Kbytes

Post-Trigger Count*

2to 512

1 Megabytes

4 Megabytes

8 Megabytes

2to 2048

2to 8192

2to 16384

*In each case, the number assigned for block count must be a power of 2.

EXAMPLE for Normal Mode

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;Q1,0,1,1,1X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;F0,0X”

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;C1-4,1X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;I00:00:01.0,

00:00:00.1”

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Y100,1000,50X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;N0 N2 X"

‘ Set the reading separator flag ON

‘ Data format is engineering units, degrees C

‘ Configure channels 1 - 4 as T/C type J

‘ Configure scan interval

‘ Configure acquisition counts

‘ Configure Event Status Register Bit (ESB) to be set when

pre-trigger count is satisfied

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X"

‘ Configure acquisition, start trigger is Trigger On (@)

command, stop trigger is Counts

S% = 0

‘ Wait for the pre-trigger count to become satisfied

WHILE (S% AND 32) = 0

PRINT#1,"SPOLL07"

INPUT#2,S%

WEND

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;N0 N1 X"

S% = 0

‘ Configure ESB to be set when acquisition is complete

‘ Wait for the acquisition to become complete

WHILE (S% AND 32) = 0

PRINT#1,"SPOLL07"

INPUT#2,S%

WEND

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;U6X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Get Buffer Status String

‘ Retrieve the response

‘ Screen shows 0000001,0001151,-0000100,

10:02:02.0,04/24/93,00001000,

10:23:30.0,04/24/93,00001050,01

‘ Indicates that 100 pre-trigger scans were acquired 1000

post-trigger scans were acquired and 50 post-stop

scans were acquired

ChartScan User’s Manual

A-63

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Reference Notes:

If you are not familiar with programming you will probably gain more understanding of the program-

related portions of this appendix by first reviewing Appendix A, API Commands and Appendix D,

ChartScan Program Examples.

Hardware configuration for RS-232 and IEEE 488 are discussed in Chapter 3.

Configuration for Net232 Ethernet/RS-232 Converter is discussed in the Net232 User’s Guide,

part number 1037-0921.

Contents

Memory Allocation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-2

Measuring Modes --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-3

Overview --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-3

Normal Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-4

High-Speed, Single-Channel Mode (Burst Mode)---------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-5

Configuration Requirements-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-6

Channel Configuration--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-7

CSN14/TC/P  Configuring Thermocouple Channels --------------------------------------------------------------------- B-8

CSN14/LV/ (T, B, or S)  Configuring Low Volts Channels ------------------------------------------------------------- B-8

CSN14/HV/S  Configuring High Volts Channels ------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-9

Scan Configuration ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-9

Configuring a Scan---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-9

Configuring the Scan Interval --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-9

Acquisition Configuration----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------B-10

Introduction

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-10

Pre-Trigger State -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-11

Continuous, Gap-Free Acquisition with Two Timebases------------------------------------------------------------------ B-11

Post-Trigger State --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-13

Post-Stop State ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ B-13

Trigger and Stop Events------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------B-13

Time Stamping (*T) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------B-15

Alarm Stamping (A#)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------B-15

Digital Input Stamping (I#) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------B-16

Acquisition Buffer, A Description ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------B-18

Trigger Block Organization--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------B-18

Multiple Trigger Blocks ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------B-20

Acquisition Buffer Interrogation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------B-21

Reading the Acquisition Buffer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------B-24

Configuring Alarms -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------B-26

Alarm Setpoints ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-26

Digital alarm Outputs----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-26

Setpoint Hysteresis-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B-27

Digital I/O Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------B-28

ChartScan User’s Manual, ^1-4-99

B-1

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

Memory Allocation

Each ChartScan comes equipped with 256 KB memory. There are three options for additional memory:

1 Mbyte, 4 Mbytes, and 8 Mbytes. The memory modules are located in SIMM sockets JP201 and/or JP202 on

the microprocessor board. Refer to Chapter 3 if you intend to add or remove memory modules.

Regardless of the memory option used, ChartScan will automatically allocate its memory for optimal use

according to its current configuration. ChartScan memory is broken into two main regions, as shown in the

following figure.

•

High/Low/Last Data Registers (only configured channels)

Acquisition Data Buffer

When channels are configured, ChartScan will calculate how

much memory will be needed for the High/Low/Last

Registers. The memory allocated to High/Low/Last is:

•

(Number of channels) x 20

The remaining memory is then allocated to the Acquisition

Buffer. For example, if the memory option used is the

standard 256K (262144 bytes) and the number of configured

channels is 128 (x 20) then the amount allocated to the

acquisition buffer would be:

262144 Total Memory Option Size (256K)

- 19840 High/Low/Last Data Size (128 x 20)

242304 Acquisition Data Buffer Allocation (236.6K)

ChartScan Memory Allocation

B-2

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Measuring Modes

Overview

You can select either of two scanning modes for ChartScan, 1) Normal mode, or 2) High-speed, single-channel

mode (Burst Mode).

ChartScan Measuring Modes

Mode

“Average weight”

Setting

Application

Normal

16, 32, 64, 128, or

256

Recommended for AC noise rejection.

1, 2, 4, or 8

Recommended for high-speed, multiple channel applications for thermocouples

and DC voltages where noise filtering is not an issue.

High-speed, single channel applications for AC and DC voltage post-acquisition

waveform analysis

High-speed,

single-channel

not selectable

In the Normal mode, ChartScan samples channel data at 1.92 kHz, or once every 520.83 µs. You can select the

average weight (number of samples to average) to provide noise filtering, as discussed later in this section.

In the High-speed, single channel mode, ChartScan collects data in user-defined multiples of 256 samples at a

sampling frequency within the range of 38.5 Hz to 20.0 kHz.

Aside from selecting ChartScan’s scanning mode, and setting the mode parameters from ChartView software

(see Chapter 4, ChartView and ChartView Plus), the following commands can be used. Note that Appendix A

contains more detailed information regarding these commands.

Mode-Related Parameter Commands

Command

Syntax

Function

M#mode

Set Measuring Mode.

Options for mode are:

0- Normal mode, and

1- High-speed, single channel mode.

W#wt

Set Averaging Weight.

Specify the number of samples to average in Normal mode, where wtis the

averaging weight. Options for wtare: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256, with 32

being the default.

F#freq

Set frequency for High-speed, single channel mode.

freqmust be a value for Hz such that 38.5 < freq< 2000. The default is 2000

Hz.

Ypre,post,stop

Set Counts or Select Blocks.

In Normal mode - This command is used to set acquisition counts where preis

the pre-trigger count, postis the post-trigger count, and stopis the post-stop

count.

In High-speed, single channel mode (burst mode) the postposition serves as

count. count is used to select the number of 256 sample blocks to be collected.

Options for block count are dependent upon system memory as follows:

Y0,count,0

256Kbytes, count value allowed is: 2 to 512

1 Mbyte, count value allowed is: 2 to 2048

4 Mbytes, count value allowed is: 2 to 8192

8 Mbytes, count value allowed is: 2 to 16384

Note: In each case the number assigned for block count must be a power of 2.

M#modeF#freqW#wt

U17

U16

U17

Query the Measuring Mode.

This command queries the following three parameters: M#, F#, and W#.

Return RMS.

This command computes and returns the root mean square (RMS) value of the

last completed high-speed, single-channel mode acquisition.

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-3

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

Normal Mode

ChartScan has the ability to reject noise resulting from AC line pick-up when an Average weight setting of 16 or

more measurements per line cycle is used. This noise rejection factor is important, as it allows for higher

accuracy. When an average weight setting of 32 or more is used, ChartScan is operating in a line cycle

integration manner and can provide readings for DC voltage, AC voltage, and thermocouple-based temperatures

at a rate of up to 44 channels per second. Noise filtering improves by selecting higher average weight settings;

but reduces the overall response time of the unit.

You can use the following formulas to compute the amount of time needed to acquire one scan.

For 60 Hz systems:

Scan time = #channels x (#samples/channel + 12) x 520.83 µs

For 50 Hz systems:

Scan time = #channels x (#samples/channel + 12) x 625.00 µs

To use the Normal scan mode, such that noise filtering (line cycle integration) is enabled, use the M#and W#

commands, or use ChartView (see Chapter 4).

Example:

M#0

‘Select normal mode

W#16

‘Select 16 samples over which to average

Note: The number of samples in the above example could also be one of the following: 64, 128, or

256. However, using the weight of 256 will limit the number of active channels in an

acquisition to 122 due to hardware constraints.

If noise resulting from AC voltage line pick-up is not a problem, you can set the system to average 1, 2, 4, or 8

line cycles per channel for faster scanning throughput (high-speed, multiple channel application). For example,

if the unit is configured to take 1 sample per channel, it will scan 147 channels per second.

Note: In regard to AC voltage measurements, ChartScan only supports AC voltages having an input signal

frequency which is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle. For this reason, sampling weights less than

32 can yield incorrect results.

To use the Normal scan mode for high-speed, multiple channel applications (when noise filtering is not needed)

use the M#and W#commands, or use ChartView (see Chapter 4).

Example:

M#0

W#1

‘Select normal mode

‘Select 1 sample over which to average

Note: The number of samples in the above example could also be one of the following: 2, 4, or 8.

Reading inaccuracies can result if common mode voltages on adjacent channels are widely dissimilar. This is

due to inadequate settling time at the instrumentation amplifier when the unit is scanning between channels.

Settling time is defined as the time measured to a point at which a transient voltage value is within a specified

percentage of the final voltage value. Settling time is usually measured in nanoseconds. To eliminate these

inaccuracies, the settling time can be increase with use of the D#command as described in Appendix A,

API Command Reference.

B-4

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

High-Speed, Single-Channel Mode (Burst Mode)

The High-speed, single-channel mode, also known as burst mode, is used for post-acquisition waveform

analysis of AC and DC voltages. In this mode, ChartScan can sample from 38.5 Hz to 20.0 kHz, and store the

data in memory. Note that ChartScan’s memory can be expanded up to 8 Mbytes.

When performing post-acquisition waveform analysis, such as Fast Fourier transforms, ChartScan can return

each data point in a waveform. In addition, ChartScan can provide the true RMS value of an AC voltage.

Because high sampling rates can be achieved in the High-speed, single-channel mode, the conditions indicated

in the following table apply.

High-Speed, Single-Channel Mode

Necessary Item Conditions Due to High Sampling Rates

Item

Condition

High/Low./Last registers

Alarms

Disabled

Trigger Start

Software trigger only (@ command)

Trigger Stop

By Count only

Pre-Trigger

Disabled

Post Stop Count

Time Stamping

Alarm Stamping

Digital Input Stamping

Averaging weight

Frequency

Disabled

256, forced default (can not be changed)

In regard to AC voltage, frequency must be such

that it results in a sufficient whole even number of

samples per line cycle.

ChartScan collects samples for the selected channel in blocks of 256 samples in one time increment. This

appears similar to a scan of 256 channels while in the normal (multiple-channel) mode since you must …

•

program the number of 256 sample blocks to acquire in the post trigger count parameter of the Ycommand,

and will

•

retrieve the data from ChartScan as “post trigger count” scans of 256 samples

Note: High-speed, single-channel mode is a “one-shot” operation. It permits ChartScan to collect the

specified number of samples, then stops. The mode is not continuous, nor does it allow for memory

overflow and wrap-around. The maximum number of samples is limited by the amount of memory

available. See the Ycommand reference (in Appendix A) for related information.

Note: In regard to AC voltage measurements, ChartScan only supports AC voltages having an input signal

frequency which is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle. In order to compute an accurate RMS

value you must program a frequency which will yield a sufficient “whole even number” of samples per

line cycle.

Note: In High-speed, single-channel mode, upon completion of the acquisition, AC voltage RMS values can

be retrieved with the U17query command.

To use the High-speed, single-channel mode use the following commands, or use ChartView (see Chapter 4).

Note that these commands (or ChartView equivalent) are all that is needed to initiate the High-speed, single-

channel mode data acquisition.

M#1

Cchan#,type

‘Select high-speed, single-channel mode

‘Select channel number and voltage-range

F#freq

Y0,count,0

‘Select sampling frequency where 38.5 < freq< 2000.0

‘Select count where count is the number of 256 sampling

blocks to be acquired

T1,8,0,0

‘Arm the system to start on @, stop on count

‘Start the acquisition

The remainder of this appendix and the next, pertaining to acquisition setup, refers to

normal mode acquisitions only.

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-5

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

Configuration Requirements

ChartScan does not scan channels on its initial power-up. Even though most user-set configuration states have

associated defaults, you must configure a few items before scanning begins.

For ChartScan to begin scanning, the controlling computer must perform two operations: (1) Configure each

channel, and (2) select the channels that are to be included in the scan. These operations are illustrated in the

following figure.

Channel Scan and Scan Interval Definition

After completing these two operations, the alarms and the High/Low/Last Registers are updated at the maximum

possible scan rate. However, the scans are not being placed in the Acquisition Buffer at this time.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; C1-16,1X"

‘ Configure master channels 1-4 with Type JTC

Inspecting the unit’s High/Low/Last Registers shows the temperature (or voltage) values of the configured

channels.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 U4X"

‘ Query HLL registers for the configured channels

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

‘ Get the response

INPUT A$

To begin storing scans in the unit’s Acquisition Buffer at a programmed scan rate, it is necessary to complete the

following four steps:

1. Configure each channel with the desired type.

2. Select the scan intervals.

3. Select the acquisition parameters.

4. Select the trigger parameters.

Once the steps have been completed, ChartScan is armed and waiting for the trigger. Once the trigger is

satisfied, ChartScan begins collecting scans and storing them in the Acquisition Buffer.

Reference Note: If you are not familiar with programming you will probably gain more

understanding of the program-related portions of this appendix by first reviewing

Appendix A, API Command and Appendix D, ChartScan Program Examples.

B-6

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; C1-4,1X"

‘ Configure master channels 1-4 with Type JTC

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;I00:01:00.0,00:00:01.0X"

‘ Configure normal timebase to 1 minute, acquisition timebase to 1 second

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;Y100,1100,0X"

‘ Set pre-trigger scan count to 100 and post-trigger to 1100 scans

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;T1,8,0,0X"

‘ Configure start event to trigger on command and stop event to stop post-

trigger count.(TRIGGER LED should pulse)

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;@X"

‘ Trigger the acquisition. Acquisition scans should now be collected until

1100 post-trigger scans have been collected. (TRIGGER LED should be on)

Channel Configuration

Configuring a channel is the process of describing the channel transducer to ChartScan. By doing so, the

configured channel becomes part of the channel scan.

ChartScan performs calculations on the raw voltage before supplying it to the controlling computer. To perform

such calculations, ChartScan must know the transducer type.

ChartScan and its optional expansion chassis can each accept from 1 to 4 signal-conditioning modules. With

eight modules possible (each with 16 channels) the system can scan up to 128 channels. Note that the eight

modules can be comprised of any combination of the following:

Signal-Conditioning Modules

Module

Type

Inputs

Connector

CSN14/TC/P

Thermocouple (T/C) and

Voltage

J, K, T, E, R, S, B, and N; or for

±100 mV, ±1 V, ±5 V, and ±10 V

Subminiature Plug

CSN/14/LV/T

CSN/14/LV/B

CSN/14/LV/S

CSN/14/HV/S

Voltage

±100 mV, ±1 V, ±5 V, and ±10 V

±2.5 V, ±25 V, and ±250 V

Screw Terminal

BNC

Voltage

Safety Jack

High Voltage

The modularity of ChartScan eliminates the need for synchronizing separate and possibly incompatible analog-

to-digital (A/D) measuring instruments or boards, which is an important consideration because many

temperature measurement systems require a combination of thermocouples and analog inputs.

ChartScan is capable of sensing the signal conditioning module types that are plugged into each of its four signal

conditioning module slots, as well as the four module slots of the expansion chassis.

If you attempt to configure a channel number that is of the wrong type or does not exist, a

channel configuration error will be logged in the Error Source Register.

Associated with each channel is the channel number and type and (optionally) the high and low

alarm setpoints and the setpoint hysteresis. The minimum channel configuration required is a

channel type assigned for a single channel or a range of channels.

The following text describes how to configure the possible channel types for each signal-conditioning card

accepted by ChartScan and the expansion chassis. Alarms are covered later in this appendix.

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-7

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

CSN14/TC/P  Configuring Thermocouple Channels

Begin configuring input channels by first specifying the channel type. When the CSN14/TC/P signal

conditioning module is used, 16 differential thermocouple inputs are provided. In configuring thermocouple

(T/C) channels, all that is required is to assign each channel to a particular T/C type. Support for B, E, J, K, R,

S, T and N (14 and 28 gauge) thermocouple types are standard. The 100 mV, ±1 V, ±5 V, ±10 V, volts types

with and without range-error detection are also supported. Channel type can be defined using the Configure

Channel (C) command for a single channel or a range of channels. Channels not included in the channel scan do

not have to be configured. The following table highlights channel types for normal use of the CSN14/TC/P

signal conditioning card.

Type

T/C

Type

T/C

Type

T/C

N (14 gage)

N (28 gage)

The type parameter is what distinguishes the channel as a thermocouple channel. The channel configuration

cannot be changed while the trigger is armed or an acquisition is taking place.

In addition to channel type, each channel in the scan channel can optionally have a high and low alarm level and

hysteresis associated with it. ChartScan alarms allow the unit to produce an internal event when the value of a

channel is outside of desired limits. These alarm events can be used as trigger or stop events, or as a stimulus

for TTL-level signals on ChartScan back panel.

The following example demonstrates how to assign a J type thermocouple to channels on a CSN14/TC/P signal

conditioning module plugged into ChartScan.

PRINT#1 “OUTPUT07; C 1-16, 1 X” ‘Continuous channels 1-16 with JTC

Note: Additional information can be found under the command reference for Cin Appendix A.

CSN14/LV/ (T, B, or S)  Configuring Low Volts Channels

When the CSN14/LV/ (T, B, or S) signal conditioning module is used, ChartScan measures voltages providing a

programmable range per channel. To configure the channels on a CSN14/LV/ (T, B, or S), use the Configure

Channel (C) command to assign a range to each channel on the signal conditioning module. Channels not

included in the channel scan do not have to be configured.

The following table highlights channel types for the CSN14/LV/ (T, B, and S) signal conditioning card.

Additional information can be found under the command reference for Cin Appendix A.

Type

Volts DC

±100 mv

±1 V

Type

Volts AC

100 mv

1 V

±5 V

5 V

±10 V

10 V

The type parameter is what distinguishes the channel as a low volts channel. The channel configuration cannot

be changed while the trigger is armed or an acquisition is taking place.

Note: Additional information can be found under the command reference for Cin Appendix A.

B-8

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

CSN14/HV/S Configuring High Volts Channels

When the CSN14/HV/S signal conditioning module is used, ChartScan measures high voltages providing a

programmable range per channel. To configure the channels on a CSN14/HV/S, use the Configure Channel (C)

command to assign a range to each channel on the signal conditioning module. Channels not included in the

channel scan do not have to be configured.

In addition to channel type, each channel in the scan can optionally have a high and low alarm level and

hysteresis associated with it. ChartScan’s alarms allow the unit to produce an internal event when the value of a

channel is outside of desired limits. These alarm events can be used as trigger or stop events, or as a stimulus

for TTL-level signals on ChartScan’s back panel. More information on using alarms appears later in this

appendix, in the section Configuring Alarms.

The CSN14/HV/S supports both DC and AC voltages. Simply select the desired channel type during

configuration.

Type

Volts DC

± 2.5 V

± 25 V

Type

Volts AC*

2.5 V

25 V

± 250 V

250 V

*Note: Above mentioned ranges are maximum peak-to-peak signals for AC volts.

Vrms values are accurate to 70.7% of peak value.

The type parameter is what distinguishes the channel as a high volts channel. The channel configuration

cannot be changed while the trigger is armed or an acquisition is taking place.

Note: Additional information can be found under the command reference for Cin Appendix A.

Scan Configuration

Configuring a Scan

Although 128 channels are available for scanning when an expansion chassis is added to the ChartScan unit,

only those channels configured in the channel scan are collected and available to the controlling computer.

Channels are always scanned in ascending order, regardless of the sequence you input. The same configuration

is used in reading channel data through the High/Low/Last Registers or the Acquisition Buffer.

Scan configuration is also accomplished using the Configure Channels, Ccommand. This command allows up

to 128 channels to be specified by either assigning individual channels or entering a range of channels. The 128

possible channels can be configured in any sequence, but the scan will be ordered sequentially by ChartScan.

Note: Channels cannot be accessed randomly as part of a channel scan.

Configuring the Scan Interval

The scan interval is the frequency at which the scans are acquired. It can be programmed via the Set Scan

Interval (I) command from a 99-hour period down to as fast as the unit can run under the current channel

configuration. The normal scan interval can be programmed in increments of 0.1 seconds.

ChartScan has two distinct scan intervals:

•

First, is the normal scan interval. This scan interval is used when ChartScan is collecting scans before the

start event has occurred or after stop event has occurred. These two regions are called the pre-trigger scan

and the post-stop scan, respectively.

•

Second, is the acquisition scan interval. This scan interval is used when ChartScan is acquiring scans after

the start event has occurred but before the stop event has occurred. This region is referred to as the post-

trigger scan.

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-9

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

The Icommand is used to set these two scan intervals. For example, the following command:

I00:00:10.0,00:00:00.1

would set the scan interval to once every 10 seconds and set the post-trigger scan interval to once every 0.1

seconds. As mentioned earlier, the scan interval can be set to run as fast as the current configuration will allow.

This is referred to as fast mode. Each of the two scan intervals can be configured as such by specifying

00:00:00.0as the argument for the Icommand for the desired timebase interval. For example, the following

command

I00:00:10.0,00:00:00.0

will set the normal scan interval to once every 10 seconds and the acquisition scan interval will be set to fast

mode. The two scan intervals may be queried any time via the I?software command.

Scans & Scan Intervals

Acquisition Configuration

Introduction

To collect and buffer scans, it is necessary to configure an acquisition. An acquisition can consist of the

following components:

Component Description

Required

Pre-Trigger

Post-Trigger

Post-Stop

Scans taken before the Trigger is satisfied

Scans taken between the Trigger and the Stop event

Scans taken after the Stop event

Yes*

* However, if the Post-Trigger is set to 0, the Trigger scan is collected (1 scan) but no

Post-Stop scans are collected.

Scans Composing a Single Acquisition Trigger Block

These components constitute a single Trigger Block in the internal memory. Every Trigger Block has one and

only one Trigger point. This figure describes a Trigger Block.

B-10

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Pre-Trigger State

The Pre-Trigger state is defined as the period after ChartScan has been configured to collect an acquisition (via

the Trigger Configuration Tcommand), and before the actual Trigger event occurs. While the unit is in this

state, the TRIGGER LED will flash. As in any other acquisition state, the alarms and their associated outputs

will be updated at the fastest rate possible under the current channel configuration.

Trigger With Synchronization Flag Off

Trigger With Synchronization Flag On

It is during this state in which ChartScan may be configured to collect Pre-Trigger data. This may be

accomplished by specifying a non-zero value for the Pre-Trigger countparameter of the Set Count Ycommand.

The Pre-Trigger countvalue coupled with the current channel configuration, however, cannot exceed the total

amount of available memory.

If the Pre-Trigger countis set to a non-zero value, ChartScan will begin sampling Pre-Trigger data at the rate

specified by the current normal scan interval (via the Set Scan Interval Icommand) immediately after the

Trigger Configuration Tcommand is issued. When the Trigger event occurs, the Pre-Trigger data portion of the

Trigger Block will contain the most recent Pre-Trigger scans. The number of Pre-Trigger scans collected will

depend upon when the Trigger event occurs. If the Trigger event occurs before the number of Pre-Trigger scans

collected at least equals the specified Pre-Trigger count, the number of Pre-Trigger scans will be the number of

scans collected to that point. Otherwise, the number of Pre-Trigger scans will be the number specified by the

Pre-Trigger countparameter of the Set Count Ycommand.

If it is not desired to collect any Pre-Trigger data while in the Pre-Trigger state, the Pre-Trigger count

parameter of the Set Count Ycommand may be set to zero.

Pre-Trigger data may not be accessed while ChartScan is in the Pre-Trigger state. The Pre-Trigger data for a

particular Trigger Block is not made available to be read until the specified Trigger event occurs.

There are two ways to determine if the unit is in the Pre-Trigger state:

1. Visually check the TRIGGER LED. If it is flashing then the unit is in the Pre-Trigger state.

2. Query the Status Byte (STB) register and check the Triggered Bit. If the Triggered Bit is not set and the

acquisition has been configured, then the unit is in the Pre-Trigger state. When the specified Trigger event

occurs, ChartScan exits the Pre-Trigger state and enters the Post-Trigger state.

The Trigger Configuration Tcommand has a synchronization parameter syncthat allows you to specify if the

Trigger point is to be synchronized to the Pre-Trigger (normal) scan interval. If syncis set, the Trigger point

will occur on the next “tick” of the Pre-Trigger (normal) scan interval. Otherwise, the Trigger point will occur

at the point at which it is detected. For example, assume a syncsetting with a Pre-Trigger of 10 scans and a

sample rate of 1 scan per minute. If a Trigger event takes place 20 seconds after a scan, a recorded Trigger

point will happen on the next scan, 40 seconds later.

Continuous, Gap-Free Acquisition with Two Timebases

ChartScan can be configured to have different timebases for its Pre-Trigger and Post-Trigger states.

The system can be configured such that, when the Trigger condition is met, ChartScan will switch from

the Pre-Trigger to the Post-Trigger state (changing its timebase). This feature, along with automatic

re-arm, can be used to collect continuous, gap-free data at two different timebases.

To ensure that the collected data is gap-free, the Pre-Trigger countmust be set to -1 (via the Set Count

Ycommand). If a value of 0 or higher is used as the Pre-Trigger count, only the number of Pre-

Trigger scans is placed in the buffer after the Trigger condition is satisfied. The following graphs show

an acquisition with the Pre-Trigger set to 100, and then an acquisition with the Pre-Trigger set to -1.

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-11

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

To enable this functionality you must perform the following steps:

1. Set the first parameter of the Counts (Y) command to -1. If more than one transition cycle is

desired, enable the Auto-Rearm flag of the Trigger Configuration command. If this is done, each

transition cycle will be stored in its own Trigger Block within the buffer.

2. Set the timebase intervals for each event using the Timebase Interval (I) command.

3. Specify the two trigger events via the Trigger Configuration (T) command.

The following graph shows how the above application would be organized within the buffer. Using this method,

continuous data may be collected as long as the application program can read data out of the buffer before the

buffer overruns. If the buffer overruns, the data read may not be continuous.

B-12

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Post-Trigger State

The Post-Trigger state is the period between the occurrence of the trigger event and the occurrence of the stop

event. While the unit is in this state the TRIGGER LED will be on and the alarms and their associated outputs

will be updated at the post-trigger scan rate.

During the Post-Trigger state the unit will collect Post-Trigger data at the rate specified by the acquisition scan

interval specified by the Scan Interval (I) command. Post-Trigger scans will be collected at this rate until the

stop event occurs. The number of scans collected during the Post-Trigger state is not restricted by the internal

buffer size. ChartScan can collect scans in the post-trigger state indefinitely if the controlling computer is

capable of reading data out of the acquisition buffer fast enough to prevent a buffer overrun.

The Post-Trigger state may be detected by querying the Triggered Bit of the Status Byte (STB) Register and the

Stopped Bit of the Event Status Register (ESR). ChartScan is in the Post-Trigger state if and only if the

Triggered Bit of the STB is set and the Stopped Bit of the ESR is not set. The unit will exit the Post-Trigger

state when the stop event occurs.

Post-Stop State

The Post-Stop state is the period between the occurrence of the stop event and the completion of the acquisition.

While the unit is in this state the TRIGGER LED will be on and the alarms and their associated outputs will be

updated at the post-stop scan rate.

ChartScan will only enter this state when a non-zero value of the post-stop count parameter of the Set Counts (Y)

command has been specified. If this is the case, upon the occurrence of the stop event the unit will enter the

Post-Stop state and collect the specified number of post-stop scans.

When the specified number of post-stop scans have been collected, the unit will terminate the current acquisition

and return to a non-acquiring state. If, however, the post-stop count parameter of the Set Counts (Y) command is

zero the unit will return immediately to a non-acquiring state upon the occurrence of the stop event (unless the

Auto-Rearm feature is used).

The Post-Stop state may be detected by querying the Stopped and the Acquisition Complete bits of the Event

Status Register (ESR). ChartScan is in the Post-Stop state if and only if the Stopped Bit of the ESR is set and

the Acquisition Complete Bit of the ESR is not set. The unit will exit the Post-Stop state when the specified

number of post-stop scans have been collected. When this occurs the Acquisition Complete Bit of the ESR will

be set and the unit will return to a non-acquiring state (unless the Auto-Rearm feature is used).

Trigger and Stop Events

The programmed system events are the driving force behind any acquisition. The trigger point (also referred to

trigger event) signals the end of the pre-trigger and the beginning of the post-trigger; the stop event signals the

end of the post-trigger and the beginning of the post-stop.

In addition to the pre-trigger (normal) scan interval, a secondary post-trigger (acquisition) scan interval can be

assigned. This would allow scans during the post-trigger and post-stop states to be collected faster or slower

than those in the pre-trigger. One application for this secondary scan interval is when events after the trigger

require faster sampling than those before the trigger, such as during alarm conditions.

ChartScan can be configured to start data acquisition on one of many trigger sources. The Trigger

Configuration (T) command is used to set: the source of the trigger (GET, Talk, etc.), the trigger start and stop

event, a pre-trigger count and/or post-stop count if used, the direction of the trigger source level if used (rising

or falling edge), and whether the Auto-Rearm flag is enabled.

If the Auto-Rearm feature is in use, the unit will immediately begin looking for another trigger event once a stop

event and post-stop event is detected. If the feature is not in use, a Tcommand must be issued after a stop event

before the unit can begin looking for a trigger. However, using Auto-Rearm does not allow the user to change

the trigger configuration between triggers; the initial configuration will be used until Auto-Rearm is disabled.

To disable Auto-Rearm, a Tcommand must be issued with the flag set to zero. Data will still be available after

the Tcommand is issued. Refer to the Command Reference section for details.

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-13

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

In order for an acquisition to take place, the unit must have a trigger event and can be assigned a Stop Event.

This allows different stimuli to begin and end an acquisition.

Note: If the trigger start event is level or alarm, at least one pre-trigger scan must be programmed to

initiate scanning in order for ChartScan to recognize the event.

External TTL (High or Low Level)

Start and/or Stop Event. When External TTL Level is specified as a trigger source (T6 or T7), a TTL level

signal on the external trigger connector (rear panel BNC) will generate a trigger. The external trigger is level

sensitive, and triggering on the high level or low level can be specified.

Selected Temperature Channel (High or Low Level)

Start and/or Stop Event. When a selected channel is specified, data collection starts when the level for the

selected channel has been crossed (either high level or low level) as the user defined with the Lcommand.

GET

Note: GETis not applicable to RS-232 applications.

Start and/or Stop Event. When GET is selected as the trigger source (T2), data collection starts whenever the

IEEE488 Group Execute Trigger (GET) command is sensed on the IEEE 488 bus and ChartScan is addressed to

LISTEN.

TALK

Note: TALKis not applicable to RS-232 applications.

Start and/or Stop Event. When TALK is selected as the trigger source (T3), data collection starts when

ChartScan is addressed to TALK.

‘@’ character

Start and/or Stop Event. When @ is selected as the trigger source, the command trigger (“@”) generates a

trigger when the Trigger Source is set for a command trigger (T1).

Alarm (on or off)

Start and/or Stop Event. When alarm is selected as a trigger source, the acquisition will start or stop when any

channel goes into or out of an alarm condition.

Absolute time

Start and/or Stop Event. When absolute time is specified, data collection starts when the real time clock time of

day equals the programmed time.

Count (post-trigger)

Start and/or Stop Even. When count is selected as the Stop Event, scans are collected until the specified number

of post-trigger scans (specified by the Y command) have been collected, at which time the post-trigger

Acquisition will stop and the post-stop Acquisition will begin, if configured.

B-14

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Time Stamping (*T)

As mentioned in the previous sections, the contents of each scan contains one reading for each defined channel.

Optionally, time stamping of each scan can be enabled with the *Tcommand. *T1enables absolute time

stamping, *T2 enables relative time stamping, while *T0disables time stamping. Refer to the *Tcommand

description for further details. An example of the *Tcommand is as follows:

Without time stamping (default):

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R3X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07"

‘Request all scan data in buffer

‘Retrieve it

INPUT A$

+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60....

With absolute time stamping:

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;*T1X” ‘Enable time stamping

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R3X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘Request all scan data in buffer

‘Retrieve it

07:35:22.400,08/29/94R+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60....

Note: The R (following the date 08/29/94 in the above code) is a reading separator which has been

assigned with Query Terminator Q.

With relative time stamping:

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;*T2X” ‘Enable time stamping

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R3X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘Request all scan data in buffer

‘Retrieve it

+00:01:05.5,0000001R+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60....

Note: The R in the above code is a reading separator which has been assigned with

Query Terminator Q.

Note: Time stamping is not valid in burst mode or when the output format is binary. Additionally,

relative time stamping is invalid when attempting to use it in conjunction with continuous,

gap-free acquisitions with two time bases.

Alarm Stamping (A#)

For further monitoring and analysis of alarm conditions, the states of the 32 alarm outputs can be stamped to

scan in real time. Alarm stamping can be enabled with the A#1command and disabled with the A#0 command.

Refer to the A#command description for further details. An example of the A#command follows.

Note: Alarm stamping is not valid in high-speed, single channel mode (burst mode).

Note: If Digital Input Stamping (I#) is also enabled, it will be appended after the Alarm Stamp (A#).

Without Alarm Stamping (default):

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;A#0X” ‘ Disable alarm stamping

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R1X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07”

INPUT A$

‘ Configure and start an acquisition

‘ Request the next scan in the buffer

‘ Retrieve it

‘

....+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-15

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

With Alarm Stamping:

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;A#1X” ‘ Enable alarm stamping

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R1X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07”

INPUT A$

‘ Configure and start an acquisition

‘ Request the next scan in the buffer

‘ Retrieve it

‘

....+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60 005 128 032 066

Digital Input Stamping (I#)

Digital Input Stamping (I#) allows you to see whether a digital input was “active” or “inactive” at the time of

the scan. This is accomplished by a digital input “ON” (1) or “OFF” (0) code appended to the scan in real time.

Digital Input Stamping can be enabled with the I#1command and disabled with the I#0command. Note that

there are 8 digital inputs.

Note: Digital Input Stamping is not valid in high-speed, single channel mode (burst mode).

Examples of I#command follow.

Without Digital Input Stamping (default):

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;I#0X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R1X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07”

INPUT A$

‘ Disable digital input stamping

‘ Configure and start an acquisition

‘ Request the next scan in the buffer

‘ Retrieve it

‘

....+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60

B-16

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

With Digital Input Stamping:

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;I#1X”

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07;R1X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07”

INPUT A$

‘ Enable digital input stamping

‘ Configure and start an acquisition

‘ Request the next scan in the buffer

‘ Retrieve it

....+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60 036 000

The last six digits are the digital input stamping; however, the last three digits are not used, and will always

appear as 000. The following explains how to interpret the stamping codes.

Also see Digital Input (I#) command in Appendix A.

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-17

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

Acquisition Buffer, A Description

Once scans are read from the buffer by the controlling computer, they are erased

from ChartScan’s buffer. The acquisition buffer is a FIFO (First-In First-Out)

buffer. In other words, the oldest data to be written into the buffer is the first data

to be read from the buffer when a read operation is performed. The buffer may be

broken up into one or more “trigger blocks.” A trigger block is comprised of pre-

trigger scans (optional), a trigger point, post-trigger scans, a stop event, and post-

stop scans (optional). These components constitute a trigger block in the internal

memory of the unit. Each trigger block defines an acquisition and each may be of

variable length.

Trigger blocks are allocated sequentially and the scans within the Trigger Blocks

are written and read sequentially. In other words, it is not possible to randomly

access a Trigger Block or a scan within a trigger block. When a read operation

is performed, the scan that is read is the oldest scan in the oldest trigger block

currently defined. The figure represents a sample acquisition buffer with 5 trigger

blocks, each having different amounts of scan data.

Trigger Block Organization

Each Trigger Block in the buffer has an associated trigger block descriptor used by internal processes for

Acquisition Buffer maintenance. Since the trigger block descriptor does take up memory it will have an indirect

affect on some user defined processes. For instance, the 75% limit condition and the buffer overrun condition

will occur on a fewer number of scans as the number of trigger blocks increases.

A trigger block becomes defined when the configured trigger start event occurs. Once the start event occurs the

data within the trigger block (including any pre-trigger data) is available to be read, even though the trigger

block may not yet be complete. Scan data is read and written to the trigger block in a FIFO fashion. As the

controller requests buffered scan data, ChartScan supplies the oldest available scan. Once the scan is supplied it

is no longer available. There is no mechanism which allows jumping around in the buffer or going back to a

scan that had already been read by the controller.

Reading the oldest scan automatically advances the read pointer in the current trigger block so that the next scan,

if acquired, is immediately available.

Since scans are written into the trigger block sequentially, the trigger scan may appear at any location within the

trigger block. ChartScan will automatically convert these physical scan locations to logical scan locations where

the trigger scan is always oriented at location 0. The placement of the trigger scan at the origin facilitates the

quick interpretation of the read pointer and gives a frame of reference for other locations within the trigger

block. All trigger block pointers are relative to the trigger scan. From this point on text discussions will assume

references to logical trigger blocks only.

The U6 command may be used to query the current read trigger block. For example, the U6 response for the

previous figure (assuming it was the only trigger block) would be as follows:

PRINT#1,”OUTPUT 07; U6X” ‘ Get status of current read trigger block

PRINT#1,”ENTER 07”

‘ Get the response

INPUT A$

‘ Screen shows…

0000001,0001234,-0000076,12:34:54.200, 03/23/97,00000767,12:54:12.900, 03/24/97,00001156,01

B-18

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

This response indicates that the first available scan is -0000076, which is a pre-trigger scan. This scan can be

retrieved as follows:

PRINT#1,”OUTPUT 07;R1X”

PRINT#1,”ENTER 07”

INPUT A$

‘ Get the -0000076 scan

‘ Get the scan

‘ Screen shows (4 channels configured) …

+1234.50-0234.20+0984.00+0323.30

PRINT#1,”OUTPUT 07; U6X” ‘ Now get status of current read trigger block

PRINT#1,”ENTER 07”

INPUT A$

‘ Get the response

‘ Screen shows…

000001,001233,-0000075,12:34:54.200,03/23/97,00000767,12:54:12.900,03/24/97,00001156,01

Notice that the current read pointer has now advanced to pre-trigger location -000075 and that the total scan

count has been decremented to 001233.

To retrieve data after a trigger event has occurred, ChartScan provides multiple query functions. The R

command can be used to read the last scan in the data buffer (R1), the last block in the data buffer (R2) or all the

data available (R3). The U6 command will query the current trigger block for a variety of information, such as

the trigger block number, current scan in block, the scan number that trigger occurred, etc. See the U command

description in the Command Reference section for details.

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-19

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

Multiple Trigger Blocks

Through the Auto-Rearm capability of ChartScan, it is possible to capture more than one trigger block in the

unit’s Acquisition Buffer. Each trigger block would contain one and only one trigger point.

These trigger blocks are stacked end-to-end in the buffer; as the last reading of the first trigger block is read by

the controller, the next scan to be read will be from the second trigger block. The trigger can only be re-armed

after a trigger block has been completed. If the Auto-Rearm feature is not in use, a T command must be issued

to re-arm ChartScan for acquisition.

It is important to note Auto-Rearm does not allow the user to change the configuration while armed. To stop

Auto-Rearm, the user must issue a Tcommand with the flag set to zero.

If Auto-Rearm is selected, another acquisition will take place on the next trigger without any controller

intervention. This allows ChartScan to store several acquisitions contiguously in its internal memory. The

buffer locations of the trigger points and their associated time tags can be found in the Buffer Status String. The

read pointer is always on the oldest unread trigger block, so requests for pointer status will always correspond to

the trigger block available to be read. The next trigger, however, must be initiated AFTER the previous

acquisition was completed. Otherwise, a trigger overrun will occur.

Additional information about triggering and trigger error conditions can be found in the sections “Trigger

Latency” and “Trigger Overrun” later in this appendix.

B-20

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Acquisition Buffer Interrogation

Note: In the following sections “current trigger block” always refers to the trigger block that is currently

being read.

The current status of the acquisition buffer may be interrogated at any time by issuing the Buffer Status String

(U6) command. As mentioned earlier, the U6 command is a user query command which will return information

regarding the current state of the acquisition buffer. The acquisition buffer holds scan data that has been

initiated by one or more trigger events. This data is held in trigger blocks within the buffer. Each trigger block

defines one acquisition that has taken place. An acquisition consists of the following:

•

pre-trigger scans (optional)

post-trigger scans

post-stop scans (optional)

The trigger blocks may be variable in length. The Buffer Status String command provides the interface in which

the current trigger block configuration may be queried.

The Buffer Status String is queried with the U6 command, returning 10 fields as indicated by the following

figure and corresponding list. The values in the figure represent a U6 response when the acquisition buffer is

empty.

1 - Number of Trigger Blocks Available This field represents the total number of trigger blocks currently

contained within the buffer. A block need not be complete to be included in this total, it only needs to be

triggered. If their are no trigger blocks available, Blocks Available will be 0000000.

2 - Number of Scans Available This field represents the total number of scans available at the time the U6

command was issued. It should be noted that pre-trigger data is not available to the user until the defined trigger

event has taken place. This total represents the total number of scans available across all trigger blocks in the

acquisition buffer. If their are no scans available in the buffer, Scans Available will be 0000000.

3 - Current Read Pointer This field represents the current position within the current trigger block. This

pointer is relative to the trigger point, which is always oriented at location 0. If, pre-trigger scans are being read,

the Current Pointer will be less than 0. Likewise, if post-trigger scans are being read, the Current Read Pointer

will be greater than 0. If the current scan to be read is the trigger scan, the Current Read Pointer will be

00000000. If the Current Read Pointer is undefined, its value will be -0999999.

4 - Trigger Time and Date Stamp This field represents the Time/Date that the trigger event occurred for the

current trigger block. This field takes on the same format as other time/date trigger stamp fields described

elsewhere in this manual. If the trigger event has not occurred, this field will have the value

00:00:00.00,00/00/00.

5 - Stop Event Pointer This field represents the location in the current trigger block that the stop event

occurred. This pointer will always be relative to the trigger point with the trigger point always oriented at

location 0. Since the stop event must always occur after the trigger event this pointer will always be greater than

0. If the stop event has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query, this field will have the value of -0999999.

6 - Stop Event Time and Date Stamp This field represents the Time/Date that the stop event occurred for the

current trigger block. This field takes on the same format as other time/date stamp fields described elsewhere in

this manual. If the stop event has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query, this field will have the value

00:00:00.00,00/00/00.

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-21

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

7 - End Scan Pointer This field represents the location in the current trigger block that the end scan occurred.

This pointer will always be relative to the trigger point. Since the end scan must always occur after the trigger

event this pointer will always be greater than 0. If the end scan has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query,

this field will have the value of -0999999. This field will always be the same as the Stop Scan Pointer unless a

post-stop count is specified (Ycommand) in which case the End Scan Pointer will be greater than the Stop Event

Pointer by the value of the post-stop count.

8 - Block Status This field represents the status of the current trigger block. If the current trigger block is still

being acquired, the value of this field will be 00. If the current trigger block has been completely acquired and

has terminated normally the value will be 01. If, however, the current trigger block has pre-maturely terminated

(because of user intervention) the value will be 02.

Trigger blocks are not assigned a trigger block number per se. Trigger block numbers are relative to the read

and write blocks respectively. The current trigger block always refers to the trigger block that is currently being

read. For example, the current read trigger block is always trigger block 1. Conversely, the current write trigger

block is always the value of Blocks Available in the Buffer Status String. With this in mind, look at the

following example a of Buffer Status String response.

The following table describes the fields for the U6response when the acquisition buffer is empty. For ease of

reference the previous figure has been repeated.

Example of Buffer String when the Acquisition Buffer is Empty

Field

Response

Implication

0000000 No trigger blocks available.

0000000 No scans are available.

-0999999 The current read pointer is undefined.

00:00:00.000, The trigger time stamp is undefined.

00/00/00

-0999999 The stop event pointer is undefined.

00:00:00.000, The stop event time is undefined.

00/00/00

-0999999 The end scan pointer is undefined.

00 The current trigger block is not complete.

B-22

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

The following figures and table illustrate a case in which an acquisition has been triggered, the stop event and

end scan have occurred, and the buffer contains several trigger blocks.

Field

Response

Implication

0000007 Seven trigger blocks are available.

0020567 20,567 scans are available.

-00000100 The current read pointer is at scan

number -100 (negative 100).

12:01:43.100, The trigger time stamp is defined as

03/01/97 indicated.

00000100 The stop event pointer is defined as

scan number 100.

12:25:01.300,

03/01/97

The stop event time is defined as

indicated.

The end scan pointer is defined as

scan number 250.

00000250

The current trigger block has been

completely acquired. The trigger

block has reached a normal

termination.

In this example, the trigger for the current trigger block has occurred and the Current Read Pointer is located at

the first available pre-trigger scan -00000100. An additional 50 post-trigger scans are available.

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-23

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

Reading the Acquisition Buffer

The three previous sections briefly discussed how the acquisition buffer may be accessed and read. In this

section the methods by which the acquisition buffer is read will be discussed in more detail.

As mentioned earlier, the Acquisition Buffer is organized as a FIFO (First In, First Out). As such all data read

from the Acquisition Buffer will be the oldest available data. Furthermore, once the data has been read from the

buffer it is no longer available. Upon completion of a read operation, the data associated with the read operation

will be deleted.

The Read Acquisition Buffer (R) command is the command by which Acquisition Buffer data is read. You can

use this command to read anywhere from one scan to all the scan data currently residing in the buffer. This

command has the following valid forms:

Read the oldest scan available.

Read the oldest trigger block available.

Read all available scan data.

When an Rcommand is issued, ChartScan checks to see if the request can be fulfilled. If s, the requested scan

data is moved from the Acquisition Buffer to the Output Queue where it waits until the controller initiates

transfer.

Note: The request may will not be fulfilled if either (1) no channels are configured, or (2) the

amount of scan data requested is not available. If either of these is true a Conflict Error will

be posted. The R1and R3commands require that at least one scan be available and the R2

command requires that at least one complete trigger block be available.

The Scan Available bit in the Status Byte (STB) Register can be used to determine whether or not the

Acquisition Buffer is empty. This bit is set when at least one scan is available in the buffer. The Buffer Status

String (U6) command may also be used to retrieve more detailed information about the state of the Acquisition

Buffer.

The following are simple examples to illustrate the uses and effects of all three Rcommand types.

Note: Although not mentioned prior to these examples, the responses to all queries (U6, R1, R2,

etc.) can be configured with specific field separators and response terminators. For detailed

instructions on setting query terminators, refer to the Qcommand description in Appendix D.

The R1command will read the oldest scan in the oldest trigger block. For instance:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; U6X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer

‘ Retrieve it.

‘ Screen shows...

PRINT A$

0000006,0020216,-00000100,12:51:43.100,03/24/97,00000100,01:53:01.300,03/24/97,00000250,01

The above response indicates that there are 6 trigger blocks currently defined in the Acquisition Buffer and there

are 20216 total scans in the buffer. Furthermore, it shows that the current read pointer is at scan # -100 in the

1st trigger block. To retrieve that scan perform the following:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R1X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Request the oldest scan

‘ Retrieve it.

‘ Screen shows (4 channels are configured)...

PRINT A$

+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; U6X"

‘ Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Retrieve it.

‘ Screen shows...

PRINT A$

0000006,0020215,-00000099,12:51:43.100,03/24/97,00000100,01:53:01.300,03/24/97,00000250,01

Notice that after reading the scan there are now 20,215 scans in the buffer and the current read pointer is now at

scan # -99.

B-24

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

The R2command will read the oldest available trigger block in the Acquisition Buffer. For instance, continuing

with the previous example:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; U6X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer

‘ Retrieve it.

‘ Screen shows...

PRINT A$

0000006,0020215,-00000099,12:51:43.100,03/24/97,00000100,01:53:01.300,03/24/97,00000250,01

The above response indicates that there are 6 trigger blocks currently defined in the Acquisition Buffer and there

are 20215 total scans in the buffer. Furthermore, it shows that the current read pointer is at scan # -99 in the 1st

trigger block and that there are 350 scans in this trigger block. To retrieve that trigger block, perform the

following:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R2X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘Request the oldest trigger block

‘ Retrieve it.

‘ Screen shows (4 channels x 350 scans) 1400 readings

PRINT A$

+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60....

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; U6X"

‘ Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Retrieve it.

‘ Screen shows...

PRINT A$

0000005,0019865,-00000100,02:15:34.100,03/24/97,00000100,04:51:10.300,03/24/97,00000250,01

Notice that there are now only 5 trigger blocks in the buffer and that there are only 19,865 scans in the buffer.

Also note that the current read pointer is at the beginning of what was the next trigger block. That trigger block

is now the current trigger block.

The R3command will read all available data within the Acquisition Buffer. For instance, continuing with the

previous example:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; U6X"

‘ Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Retrieve it.

‘ Screen shows...

PRINT A$

0000005,0019865,-00000100,02:15:34.100,03/24/97,00000100,04:51:10.300,03/24/97,00000250,01

The above response indicates that there are 5 trigger blocks currently defined in the Acquisition Buffer and there

are 19,865 total scans in the buffer. It also shows the current read pointer at the -100 scan in the 1st trigger

block and that their are 351 scans in this trigger block (101 + 250); i.e., 101 scans from -100 to 0, plus the 250

scans from 1 to 250. To retrieve all the scan data within the buffer:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;R3X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Request all scan data in the buffer.

‘ Retrieve it.

‘ Screen shows (4 channels x 19865 scans) 79460 readings

PRINT A$

+0234.20-0019.40+0001.40+0023.60....

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; U6X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer

‘ Retrieve it.

‘ Screen shows...

PRINT A$

0000000,0000000,-9999999,00:00:00.000,00/00/00,-0999999,00:00:00.000,00/00/00,-0999999,00

Notice that the Buffer Status String is null indicating that the Acquisition Buffer is completely empty.

For more information on using the Rcommand refer to Appendix A.

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-25

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

Configuring Alarms

ChartScan can produce an internal event when the value of a channel is outside of user-defined limits. These

“alarm events” can be used as trigger or stop events, or as a stimulus for TTL-level signals on ChartScan’s

rear panel.

To use alarms the channels in question must be part of the channel scan. The alarms will become active and

monitored only after an acquisition has been configured and armed, and only at the programmed scan rate.

Note: To enable alarm monitoring prior to the trigger event, or to have an alarm condition serve as a

trigger event, you must first configure the acquisition with at least one pre-trigger scan.

Alarm Set Points

Each channel has an associated high and low set point. Set points are defined as part of a channel configuration

using the Ccommand. These set points create the “envelope” that constitutes the channel’s normal operating

range.

If the channel value goes above the high set point or below the low set point, the channel is in the alarm state. If

any channel configured by the Ccommand is in the alarm state, a system alarm event is posted. For example, if

the trigger source is on Alarm, the alarm event would cause a trigger.

Digital Alarm Outputs

If desired, you can use an alarm event [for a specific channel] as a stimulus for a digital output signal (TTL) on

ChartScan’s rear panel. This signal can be used to set off an audible alarm (user-supplied) or to inform another

device of the alarm condition.

Thirty-two digital alarm outputs are available on ChartScan’s rear panel. Although analog input channels on the

expansion chassis can be used to stimulate alarms, no digital output signals are available on the expansion

chassis. Regardless of the number of expansion chassis connected, no more than 32 digital alarm outputs are

available.

The Assign Alarm Output (Acommand) may be used to assign alarm conditions of various channels to one of

the 32 digital TLL level outputs located on the back panel. You can tie as many of the alarm conditions as you

want to any digital output. Use the Cand Acommands to configure alarm conditions for driving the digital

output lines (to enable alarm monitoring).

• Ccommand - determines the high and low setpoints and hysteresis of the alarm condition.

• Acommand - assigns an input channel alarm to a digital output.

The following example indicates how to configure alarms and associate them with digital outputs for 24

channels on ChartScan.

PRINT #1 “OUTPUT07: C1-24, 1, -100.0, +100.0, 10.0X”

Setup channels 1-24, type J,low setpoint = -100.0°C

high setpoint = +100.0, hysteresis = 10.0°C

PRINT #1 “OUTPUT07: A1, 1X”

PRINT #1 “OUTPUT07: A2, 2X”

Assign alarm channel 1 to Digital Output 1

Assign alarm channel 2 to Digital Output 2

B-26

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix B

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

As mentioned before, more than one channel can be assigned to any given output bit. For example, if the

following statement were appended to the above example, then either channel 2 or channel 3 will set digital

output #2.

PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07:A3,2X” ‘Assign alarm channel 3 to digital output 2

To disable a channel from an alarm, assign the channel to the null or “0" output:

PRINT#1,“OUTPUT07:A3,0X” ‘Disable channel 3 from digital output 2

Alarms and Set Points

Set Point Hysteresis

To avoid threshold transition problems, a hysteresis value can also be programmed. After the alarm set point is

exceeded, the signal must drop below the high set point, or above the low set point by the hysteresis value

before the alarm is reset. For example, assume a channel has alarm set points of 100 and -100, and a hysteresis

of 10. In this case, ChartScan would remain in an alarm condition until the set point fell below 90 or rose above

-90 depending on which of the two set points triggered the alarm.

Relationship Between Alarm Set Point, Hysteresis, and Unwanted Transitions

ChartScan User’s Manual

B-27

Configuration Aspects for Programmers

Appendix B

Digital I/O Operation

As shown in the DB50 pinout in the Installation and Configuration section, ChartScan has digital I/O pins for

eight inputs and thirty-two outputs (see note). The digital outputs can be controlled either automatically via the

alarm settings or with programming using the Set Digital Outputs (O) command. To determine the digital

output state, use the O?command.

With the Set Digital Outputs (O) command you can output a byte for each output bank and specify which output

bits should be cleared (logic false) or set (logic true). The Ocommand will override the digital output states as

set by the alarm condition. Refer to the Command Reference section of this manual for details.

Each digital output line will drive five (5) standard TTL loads. Each digital input line is one-eighth (0.125) TTL

load. All inputs are protected against damage from high static voltages. Normal precautions should be taken to

limit the input voltages to 0.3 to 5.3 volts. All digital I/O lines are referenced to digital ground.

B-28

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix C

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Reference Note: If you are not familiar with programming you will probably gain more understanding of

the program-related portions of this appendix by first reviewing Appendix A, API Commands and

Appendix D, ChartScan Program Examples.

Contents

Using the High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers--------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-2

What is Contained in the HLL Registers--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-2

Accessing the HLL Registers---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-2

Data Format (F) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-5

Data Input Formats---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-5

Data Output Formats-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-6

Engineering Units Data Format ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-6

Binary Data Format --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-8

Counts Data Format--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-8

Configuring Power-Up State-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-9

Queries ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------C-10

Query (?) Commands ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-10

U Status Commands ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ C-11

Status, Event Reporting, and Mask Registers----------------------------------------------------------------------C-11

Theory of Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ C-12

Calibration Status Register----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-14

Error Source Register----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-14

Event Status Register ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-14

Event Status Enable Register-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-14

Status Byte Register ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ C-15

Service Request Enable Register---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- C-16

IEEE 488 Serial Poll Response ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------C-16

Using Status Reporting Registers -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------C-17

Trigger Latency ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------C-18

Trigger Overrun ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------C-18

Buffer Overrun-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------C-18

Buffer Overrun With One Trigger Block ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ C-19

Buffer Overrun With Multiple Trigger Blocks------------------------------------------------------------------------------ C-19

Real Time Clock----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------C-19

Open Thermocouple/Range Error Checking -----------------------------------------------------------------------C-19

ChartScan User’s Manual, ^1-14-99

C-1

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Appendix C

Using High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers

The High/Low/Last (HLL) registers are an alternative method of getting channel data from the ChartScan unit.

The HLL registers are updated during an acquisition at the current programmed scan rate. At any time, the HLL

registers can be queried for channel values without affecting the buffered data.

The returned data is in the engineering unit and format (ASCII or binary) defined by the user. Data formats are

described later in this appendix.

HLL Register Contents

The HLL Registers contain the following for each configured channel:

•

The High Reading for the channel since the beginning of the current acquisition or since the last HLL query

(U5).

•

The Time/Date Stamp of the High Reading.

The Low Reading for the channel since the beginning of the current acquisition or since the last HLL query

(U5).

•

The Time/Date Stamp for the Low Reading.

•

The Last or most recent Reading for the channel.

Note: HLL Registers will only be updated for configured channels. Furthermore, you can only access HLL

Registers for configured channels. You can not access HLL Registers of non-configured channels.

You can clear the High and Low readings for each actively configured channel in any of the following ways:

•

Power cycle ChartScan.

Create a new channel configuration.

Explicitly clear the readings by command. This is discussed in the next section.

Note: When the High and Low values are cleared, their associated Time/Date Stamps are cleared as well.

After being cleared, the new High and Low values (along with their associated Time/Date Stamp) will

be initialized on the next updating of the HLL Registers.

Accessing HLL Registers

You can access the HLL Registers by issuing commands from the controller. You can use the commands to

access any or all the HLL contents of configured channels, as well as clear the High and Low readings and

associated Time/Date Stamps. Briefly, the commands are as follows:

Read HLL Registers for all configured channels.

U13

Read HLL Registers for all configured channels and reset the High and Low values.

Read Last only for all configured channels.

Read Last only for channel(s) specified.

Note: The HLL registers contain the highest and lowest values of the channel since it was last cleared and the

last value read, for each channel in the channel scan.

Two queries are available to read the HLL registers: U4and U5. The U4 command requests the HLL data,

while U5requests the HLL data then clears and resets the high and low value to the last value. If not cleared,

the high and low will be maintained.

All HLL data will be sent to the controller in the order dictated by the scan configuration, and in the format

specified by the Data Format command (F). The HLL data is retrieved in the following sequence:

•

high - the high reading

ht - the high time/date stamp

low - the low reading)

lt - the low time stamp

last - the last reading

C-2

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix C

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

You can use the Query Terminator (Q) command to specify a response terminator between each channel of the

HLL response. Use the Format (F) command to specify the output format of the HLL Registers.

The following examples show how to use these commands to configure and query the HLL Registers.

Example 1:

Example 1 shows how to configure and query all the HLL registers and how the HLL terminator can be used to

control the flow of the HLL response output.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 F0,0 Q1,1,0,0, 0X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 C1-2,1C10,1C15,1X"

‘ Set format to ASCII degrees C with

‘ HLL terminator of CR LF/ EOI

‘ Configure four channels (1,2,10 and 15) ‘ After an

indiscriminate amount of time....

...

‘ Configure and start the acquisition

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 U4X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Query the current HLL settings

‘ Get HLL for channel 1

‘ Screen shows....

PRINT A$

+1450.20S12:23:21.700,03/24/97+0850.20S12:35:09.300,03/24/97, +0950.30

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Get HLL for channel 2

‘ Screen shows....

PRINT A$

+0450.20S02:00:29.500,03/24/97+0057.60S10:35:00.400,03/24/97, +0250.60

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Get HLL for channel 10

‘ Screen shows....

-0045.50S11:03:51.7,03/24/97- 0110.10S12:55:09.1,03/24/97, -0050.80

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Get HLL for channel 15

‘ Screen shows....

PRINT A$

+0150.70S03:39:01.200,03/24/97- 0085.20S05:25:17.300,03/24/97, +0010.90

In example 1, notice that only those channels configured (1,2,10 and 15) where returned in the response.

Example 2:

This example shows how to reset the High and Low values along with their associated Time/Date Stamps. It

also shows the effect of specifying no HLL response terminator.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 F0,0 Q1,0,0,0, 0X"

‘ Set format to ASCII degrees C with HLL

‘ terminator of None

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 C1-4,1X"

‘ After an indiscriminate amount of time....

‘ Configure and start the acquisition

‘ Query and reset the current HLL settings

‘ Get the response

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 U5X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Screen shows....

PRINT A$

+1450.20S12:23:21.700,03/24/97+0850.20S12:35:09.300,03/24/97, +0950.30

+0450.20S02:00:29.500,03/24/97+0057.60S10:35:00.400,03/24/97, +0250.60

+0045.50S11:03:51.700,03/24/97-0110.10S12:55:09.100,03/24/97, -0050.80

+0150.70S03:39:01.200,03/24/97-0085.20S05:25:17.300,03/24/97, +0010.90

‘ Notice that only one ENTER returned the ALL HLL data

‘ Now Get the current time

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 S?X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Screen shows S13:20:00.1,03/24/97

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 U4X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

‘ Now, again query the HLL settings

‘ Get the response

INPUT

‘ Screen shows....

+0980.20S13:20:01.700,03/24/97+0959.20S13:20:09.300,03/24/97, +0975.80

+0260.70S13:20:29.500,03/24/97+0245.60S13:20:00.400,03/24/97, +0257.60

-0047.50S13:20:51.700,03/24/97- 0051.10S13:20:09.100,03/24/97,-0049.80

-0047.50S13:20:51.700,03/24/97- 0051.10S13:20:09.100,03/24/97, - 0049.80

+0015.70S13:20:01.200,03/24/97+0008.20S13:20:17.300,03/24/97, +0010.40

In example 2, notice that issuing the U5command caused the High and Low values and their associated

Time/Date Stamps to be reset.

ChartScan User’s Manual

C-3

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Appendix C

Example 3:

Example shows how to read only the Last readings.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 F0,0 Q1,1,0,0, 0X" ‘ Set format to ASCII degrees C with

‘ HLL terminator of CR LF/ EOI

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 C1-4,1X"

‘ Configure four channel (no setpoints)

‘ Configure and start the acquisition

‘ Just get the Last channel readings

‘ Get Last reading for channel 1

‘ Screen shows....

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; U13X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT

+0950.30

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Get Last reading for channel 2

‘ Screen shows....

PRINT A$

+0250.60

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Get Last reading for channel 3

‘ Screen shows....

PRINT A$

-0050.80

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Get Last reading for channel 4

‘ Screen shows....

PRINT A$

+0010.90

Notice that since a HLL response terminator was specified that each channel’s Last reading had to be ENTERed

separately.

Example 4:

This example is the same as the previous, except no HLL response terminators are specified and the format has

been changed to °F.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 F1,0 Q1,0,0,0, 0X" ‘ Set format to ASCII degrees F with

‘ HLL terminator of None

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 C1-4,1X"

‘ Configure four channel (no setpoints)

‘ Configure and start the acquisition

‘ Just get the Last channel readings

‘ Get Last readings for channels 1-4 INPUT A$

‘ Screen shows....

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; U13X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

PRINT A$

+1743.08+0483.08- 0059.44+0051.62

Notice that there are no HLL channel terminators and that the readings are now in °F.

Example 5:

Example 5 shows how changing the channel type can effect the output of HLL queries.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 F0,0 Q1,0,0,0, 0X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 C1-4,11X"

‘ Set format to ASCII degrees C with HLL terminator of None.

‘ Configure four channel

(no setpoints) to VOLTS

‘ Configure and start the acquisition

‘ Just get the Last channel readings

‘ Get Last reading for channels 1-4 INPUT A$

‘ Screen shows....

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; U13X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

PRINT A$

+000.0045603+000.0000895- 000.00800870+000.0090865

Notice that even though the format was degrees C since the channels have been configured to be VOLTS

channels, the response is in VOLTS.

C-4

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix C

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Example 6:

Example 6 shows how to retrieve the Last readings for a subset of the configured channels.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 F0,0 Q1,1,0,0,0X"

‘ Set format to ASCII degrees C with

‘ HLL terminator ‘ of CR LF/EOI

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07 C1-4,1X"

‘ Configure four channel (no setpoints)

‘ Configure and start the acquisition

‘ Just get the Last reading for channels 2 and 3

‘ Get Last reading for channel 2

‘ Screen shows....

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; R#2-3X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

PRINT A$

+0250.60

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Get Last reading for channel 3

‘ Screen shows....

PRINT A$

-0049.50

Data Format (F)

Readings from ChartScan are output in the format configured by the user. The Data Format (F) command

determines the engineering unit and whether an ASCII format, binary format or a raw data count is to be used.

Options for the engineering units and data formats are shown in the following table:

Data Format (F)

Engineering Unit

Code

Data Format

Code

Celsius [default]

Fahrenheit

Rankine

°C

°F

°R

°K

Engineering Units [default]

Binary (Low Byte/High Byte)

Binary (High Byte/Low Byte)

Counts (ASCII)

Kelvin

Volts

If a data format of 1 or 2 (binary), or 3 (counts) is specified as the data

format, the Engineering Units of the F command is ignored.

Note:

Data Input Formats

The Data Format (F) command determines the format of only some of the data input from the controller. Input

data comes in the form of command parameters from the controller. (All commands and data sent to ChartScan

are in ASCII, although the engineering unit may vary.)

The command parameters over which the Fcommand determines their format are the high, low setpoints and the

hysteresis parameters for the Channel Configuration (C) command and the Set Trigger Level (L) command.

These are the only command parameters over which the Data Format (F) command has control. These

command parameters cannot be issued in binary format. If binary format is specified by the Fcommand these

parameters will be interpreted as Engineering Units.

These parameters will always be interpreted as Engineering Units as currently defined by the Engineering Units

argument of the Fcommand except when the Counts format is specified. When the Counts format is specified,

these parameters are interpreted as Counts. For additional information see the command reference section.

Note: If Counts or Binary format is specified as the format, the Engineering Units parameter of

the Fcommand is ignored.

ChartScan User’s Manual

C-5

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Appendix C

Examples:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; F0,0X"

‘ Interpret C and L command parameters as

‘ Engineering Units — Degrees C

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;F1,1X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;F3,3X"

‘ Interpret C and L command parameters as

‘ Engineering Units (Even though binary is specified)

‘ Degrees F.

‘ Interpret C and L command parameters as Counts

‘ (Counts format is specified)

‘ (Note that Engr. Units parameter is ignored)

Data Output Formats

Data Output formats differ slightly from data input formats in that binary formats may be used for Channel Data.

Channel Data is the only output data which may use the binary format (if it is specified). Channel Data is

defined as data originating from the High/Low/Last (HLL) Registers or the Acquisition Buffer. The commands

that initiate Channel Data output are the R, R#, U4, U5and U13commands. However, Channel Data may

also be output as Engineering Units and Counts.

As in the case of Data Input Formats, all other types of output will be in Engineering Units unless Counts is

specified. However, there are only 3 command queries which need to follow the Fcommand format in this

fashion. They are C?, L? and U8command queries.

Note: If Counts or Binary format is specified as the format, the Engineering Units parameter of the

F command is ignored.

Examples:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; F0,0X" ‘ Output C?, L?,U8 as well as R,R#,U4,U5 and U13 in ‘ Engineering Units

— Degrees C

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;F1,1X" ‘ Output R,R#,U4,U5 and U13 as binary

‘ Output C?,L? and U8 as Engineering Units —

‘ Degrees F.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; F3,3X" ‘ Output C?, L?,U8 as well as R,R#,U4,U5 and U13 in Counts (Note that

Engineering Units parameter is ignored)

All commands and data sent to ChartScan are in ASCII (although the engineering unit may vary).

Note: Only data supplied by ChartScan, such as time/date stamps for High/Low/Last registers, can

be in binary format.

Both the IEEE 488 and RS-232 interfaces support data retrieval in ASCII and, for high speed applications, in

binary format. End of Reading and End of Scan terminators are not used with binary data transfers. For the

IEEE 488 interface, EOI is asserted on the last byte.

Engineering Units Data Format

If the engineering units data format is selected, ChartScan supplies data in a format appropriate for the

configured channel type. The selected unit affects the number of decimal places used by either the ASCII or

binary format. This section describes engineering units in relation to thermocouples, volts, time/date stamps,

and scan intervals.

Thermocouples

ChartScan uses a default system unit of degrees Centigrade. Therefore, the resolution of returned data,

independent of configured temperature units, is 0.1°C. The binary format also returns data in degrees

Centigrade. The default binary format returns two bytes of 2’s complement binary data with user selecting

low/high byte or high/low byte.

If the ASCII data format is selected, the controller can select temperature units. This requires the conversion of

degrees Centigrade to configured temperature unit. Conversion to degrees Fahrenheit, degrees Rankine, and

degrees Kelvin are via the following formulas:

C-6

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix C

Centigrade:

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

-3276.7 < C < +3276.7

F = (9/5)C + 32

R = (9/5)C + 491.69

K = C + 273.16

Fahrenheit :

Rankine:

Kelvin :

Note: R = F + 459.69

For channels configured as thermocouples, all ASCII readings will be returned in the format which corresponds

with the engineering unit selected. The formats are as follows, where X is an ASCII digit.

Centigrade :

Fahrenheit :

Rankine :

Kelvin :

XXXX.XX

Volts

The default units and resolution are dependent on the low or high volts range:

Low Range Resolution

High Range

±2.5 V

Resolution

78.75 µV/bit

787.46 µV/bit

7.87 mV/bit

±100 mV

±1 V

3.12 µV/bit

31.21 µV/bit

156.06 µV/bit

312.12 µV/bit

±25 V

±5 V

±250 V

±10 V

The default binary format returns 2 bytes of 2’s complement binary data with the user selecting low/high byte or

high/low byte.

For Volts channels all ASCII readings will be of the form:

XXX.XXXXXXX where Xis an ASCII digit

Time/Date Stamp

Time/Date values have the following ASCII format:

hh:mn:ss.t,mm,dd,yy

Value

Description

hour

Value

Description

month

day

hh (00< hh <23)

mn (00< mn < 59)

ss (00< ss < 59)

t (00< t < 9)

mm (01< mm< 12)

dd (valid by month)

yy (00 < yy < 99)

minute

seconds

year

tenth of

seconds

Time/Date stamp output values occur within HLL and acquisition buffer output queries. Time/Date stamp

output values have the same ASCII format as Time/Date with exception of the fourth value. For Time/Date

stamp the value is mss (milli-seconds) where: (000< mss < 999).

An example:

01:25:20.600,2/28/99 = 20.6 seconds after 1:25 AM, on Feb. 28^th, 1999

ChartScan User’s Manual

C-7

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Appendix C

Scan Interval

Scan Interval formats have the following ASCII format:

hh:mm:ss.t

An example:

01:02:03.5

Scan interval of 1 hour, 2 minutes and 3.5 seconds

Binary Data Format

Only High/Low/Last (HLL) register and acquisition output data, may be in binary format. Binary formatted data

can be output in either highbyte/lowbyte or lowbyte/highbyte format.

Time/Date Stamp

If binary format is selected, the High/Low/Last register values will also include time/date stamps. When

outputting the High/Low/Last registers for either highbyte/lowbyte or lowbyte/highbyte, the time/date stamp will

have the following format:

hmstMDY

where each letter is a byte represented as follows:

hours

months

days

minutes

seconds

tenths

years

A typical High/Low/Last will have the following binary format (each letter is a byte of data):

HHhmstMDYLLhmstMDYll where: HHis high, LLis low, and llis last

Counts Data Format

The Counts data format is a format that is characterized by an ASCII integer number from -32676 to +32676

that represents a compensated or raw value as it would be interpreted from the A/D converter. This value would

be dependent upon the channel type that has been specified for the channel in question.

Note: The Counts format closely follows the channel type that has been specified.

Example 1.

If channel 16 was type 1: (Type J TC with cold junction compensation and linearization) then the

Counts format output value for this channel would also be cold junction compensated and linearized.

Example 2:

If channel 16 was type 31: (Raw A/D data), then the Counts format output value for channel 16 would

also be raw.

Both temperature and volts readings will be represented by a bipolar 16-bit value of the form: +xxxxx.

Time/Date stamp format is hmstMDY, which is the same as that specified for the binary data format.

The Counts format is both a valid input (Cand Lcommand) format and a valid output format (R, R#, U4, U5,

U8, U13, C?and L?command queries).

C-8

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix C

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Configuring Power-Up State

ChartScan has an internally stored factory default configuration that can be recalled at any time. You can

program the ChartScan to power-up in a “user-defined” state, or if desired, can configure the unit to power-up

with the default configuration.

During normal operations the factory defaults may be recalled by issuing the Restore Factory Defaults (*F)

command. When this command is processed, ChartScan loads the factory default configuration and operates

accordingly. This command, however, may not be issued while an acquisition is currently configured.

ChartScan is usually configured to power-up with the last known configuration (from when the unit was

powered-down). Last-configuration power-ups will also occur when a Power-On Reset (*R) command is used.

You can configure the unit such that it will always power-up with the factory default configuration by issuing the

Power-up Settings (*S1) command. Note that issuing an *S0(power-up under last-known configuration)

command causes the unit to power up under the last known configuration.

Note: Configuring ChartScan to power-up under the factory defaults or recalling the factory default

settings will not affect pre-existing calibration factors of the ChartScan or its slave units.

The following table lists the execution steps and effects when the ChartScan is configured to power-up under the

factory default configuration.

Step

Command

Effect

Q7,0,0,0,0

Set general response Term. to CR-LF/EOI. All others to None

Set the User Term. to ASCII code 00 (Hex) NUL

Set the data format to Engr. Units — Degrees C

Set SRQ (SRE) Mask to 000

F0,0

Set Event Status Enable (ESE) to 000

Un-configure all channels

Y0,0,0

Set acquisition counts to all 0

I00:00:00.1,00:

00:00.1

Set both timebase intervals to 0.1 seconds

L1, 0,0

T0,0,0,0

M#0

Un-configure level

Un-configure acquisition triggering

Set measuring mode to line cycle integration/high speed multi-channel

mode

F#20000.0

W#32

Set burst mode frequency to 20kHz

Set sampling weight to 32

ChartScan User’s Manual

C-9

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Appendix C

Queries

ChartScan provides many ways to query the unit for specific information. Most commands have a

corresponding query command which responds with the configuration or mode of a previously executed

command. In addition, the UStatus commands can be used at any time (without interfering with normal

operation) to return information about various ChartScan conditions.

Query (?) Commands

Most commands have a corresponding query command formed by appending a question mark (?) to the

command letter. Query commands place their responses into the output queue until the controller retrieves

them. They respond with the present configuration or mode of a previously executed command. When

appropriate, the response from a query command is in the form of a command string which, if it were executed,

would put the unit into the configuration it was in when the query was executed. For instance, the response to

the User Terminator query command V?Xis in the form:

Vuser (where 0< user <255)

This response is in the form of the User Terminator (V) command and, if it is sent to the ChartScan, it would set

the User Terminator to the same value that it had when the query was issued. Query responses are always fixed-

length strings in a pre-defined format.

Any number of query commands can be combined into one string to create a specialized status command that

responds with only the information of interest for a given application. Query commands are immediate; in other

words, their command responses are generated as soon as they are interpreted and before any other commands,

including the Execute (X) command. For example:

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; V1 X V? X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Get the response of current User Terminator

‘ Retrieve response..

‘ Screen shows V1

PRINT A$

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; V0 X V? X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Change User Terminator and get response.

‘ Retrieve response.

‘ Screen shows V0

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; V4 V? X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Change User Terminator and Get response - No intermediate X command.

‘ Retrieve response...

‘ Screen shows V0 User Terminator. Response is still V0 because V? was

executed before V4 since V? is an immediate and V4 is a deferred

command.

PRINT A$

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; V? X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07"

INPUT A$

‘ Get User Terminator response

‘ Retrieve response..

‘ Screen shows new User Terminator — V4.

Note: Although query commands generate their response as soon as they are interpreted, they must still be

followed by an Execute (X) command for proper termination. For more information on command

execution, refer to the Xcommand in Appendix A.

U Status Commands

Status commands are used to return information about various ChartScan conditions. The unit’s status may be

read at any time with no interference to normal operation. Any error conditions, except Calibration Errors, are

cleared after the status string is read by the controller. The Calibration Errors are cleared when the unit is

calibrated.

Status strings are returned when ChartScan is next addressed to Talk. The terminators used and the use of the

End or Identify (EOI) line can be changed with the Qcommands.

If ChartScan is configured to trigger on Talk, requesting a status report (Ucommand) will not cause the unit to

trigger.

The following table outlines information available through Ucommands. See the Command Reference section

for details and examples.

C-10

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix C

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

U Commands and Descriptions

Causes ChartScan to return a fixed-length status message string. The status message shows the current options in use for

each command.

Causes ChartScan to return a decimal number from 000 to 255. This number is the decimal equivalent of the binary

information on the digital input lines (on the rear panel, card edge digital I/O connector).

Returns information in the Calibration Status Register.

Returns system settings similar to invoking a combination of the following query commands: F?I?L?P?Q?S?T?Y?

Returns high/low/last register data in the current data format for each channel defined by the (C) command, such as the high

reading, the high time stamp, the low reading, the low time stamp, and the last reading.

Returns the same information as U4 but resets the current high/low for all channels.

Returns the following current trigger block information: the trigger block #, current read scan in block, current write scan in

block, trigger time/date stamp, scan # that stop occurred, scan number that end of acquisition occurred, and block completed

flag.

Returns the channels that have been assigned alarm output in the form of: Achan,output where 744 < chan > 1, and 32 <

output > 1.

Returns the channel settings for each configured channel.

Returns the digital input values corresponding to each of the eight digital inputs.

U10 Returns memory size in the form: mmmmm, where m is each digit in the memory size (Kbytes).

U11 Returns the channel number followed by “0” for “not in an alarm state,” or “1” for “in an alarm state. Queried channels are

those having programmed valid alarm set points.

U12 Returns the last date the unit was calibrated in the form: 12:54:00.9,01/28/99

U13 Returns the last scan read.

U14 Returns card ID’s.

U15 Returns the IOtech product information in the form: IOtech, ChartScan, 0, v.r, where v is the version and r is the revision.

U16 Returns measurement parameters.

U17 Returns the RMS value of the last burst mode operation.

U18 Returns the contents of the system register.

Status, Event Reporting, and Mask Registers

ChartScan has several internal, eight-bit registers. Each bit represents a certain condition, event or error. The

contents and operation of each of these registers is described in subsequent sections. You can access the

registers via a command issued from the controller.

Status and Event Reporting Registers. The following four registers cover a wide range of internal error and

event conditions, and each covers a particular aspect of event reporting responsibility.

Calibration Status Register (CSR)

Error Source Register (ESC)

Event Status Register (ESR)

Status Byte Register (STB)

Indicates error conditions during calibration.

Indicates general error conditions with the unit.

Indicates special ‘events’ that have occurred in the unit.

Indicates critical operation events.

Mask Registers. You can use the following two mask registers to configure the status and event reporting

registers. The mask registers are:

Event Status Enable (ESE)

A mask for the Event Status Register (ESR)

A mask for the Status Byte Register (STB)

Service Request Enable (SRE)

The status registers CSR, ESC and ESR are Read/Clear-Only registers (they may only be read and cleared by

the controller). The read operations on these registers is a destructive read. This is because it clears the

The STB status register is a Read-Only register (it can only be read by controller). The STB register can only

be cleared or written to by the internal processes of ChartScan.

The mask registers ESE and SRE are Read/Write/Clear registers (they can be written and cleared, as well as

read by the controller).

ChartScan User’s Manual

C-11

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Appendix C

Status and Event Reporting

Registers

Command Type

CSR

Calibration Status

ESC

Error Source

ESR

Access

Read

Write

N/A

Clear

Read/Clear

Read

N/A

Event Status

STB

N/A

(SPOLL)

Status Byte

Mask Registers

Command Type

Write

Read

Clear

Read/Write/

Clear

Nmmm

(See

Note)

ESE

Event Status

Enable

Read/Write/

Clear

Mmmm

(See

Note)

SRE

Service Request

Enable

Note: The mmm defines the contents of the register to be written.

Theory of Operation

The following figure shows the general operation and relationship between the status reporting and mask

registers. Each register is part of a hierarchy of registers where operations on higher registers will affect the

contents of lower registers in the chain. This hierarchical approach provides the ability to have varying levels of

status reporting. The lowest levels give general status information while the higher levels give more details of

the particular events in question.

At the lowest level in this chain is the Status Byte Register. This register may be accessed real-time by the

controller via a SPOLL (IEEE-488 only) command. This allows quick response of certain critical operational

status conditions contained in the Status Byte Register (STB). However, since this register is the lowest register

in the chain, every other status register in the system, either directly or indirectly, has access to the STB register

via the Event Status Register Bit (ESB) in the STB register. This gives these other status registers the ability

(although not detailed) to quickly report their status to the controller.

The Event Status Enable (ESE) Register may be used to define which bits in the Event Status Register will be

mapped into the Event Status Register Bit (ESB) in the STB. The bits in the ESE represent an exact image of

the bits in the ESR. When a condition is set in the ESR its image bit is checked in the ESE. If enabled the ESB

bit in the STB is set.

The Service Request Enable (SRE) register may be used to define those conditions in the STB which will

generate a Service Request (SRQ). The bits in the SRE represent an exact image of the bits in the STB accept

for Service Request Bit. When a condition is set in the STB its image bit is checked in the SRE. If enabled,

ChartScan will generate a Service Request (SRQ).

In the same fashion that the setting of events (or conditions) affects the lower levels of registers in the chain, the

clearing of events (or conditions) in the higher level registers, will cause the clearing conditions in the lower

level registers.

The following sections describe in detail the contents and operation of these registers. More information on

these registers can also be found in the Command Reference section under the M,N,U and E? commands

relating to these registers.

C-12

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix C

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

ChartScan User’s Manual

C-13

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Appendix C

Calibration Status Register (U2 Command)

The calibration status register indicates which calibration errors, if any have occurred. The individual errors are

described in the U2command. Any calibration error will be mapped into the Calibration Status which maps to

the Calibration Error bit in the Error Source Register.

Error Source Register (E? Command)

The error source register indicates which errors, if any, have occurred. The individual errors are described in

the E?command.

When an error occurs, it sets the appropriate bit in the error source register. This in turn sets a bit in the event

status register as shown in the previous figure.

Event Status Register

The event status register is read with the U0command. The contents of the register are cleared after the U0

command is satisfied. The event status register indicates which events, if any, have occurred. Its bits, and the

event that set them, are as follows:

Bit No. Event

Set/Clear Information

Set when acquisition operation has been completed. An acquisition is

complete when the acquisition device has finished the current

acquisition. The bit will be cleared when a new acquisition is configured

through the T command.

Acquisition

Complete?

Set when the pre-trigger count specified in the trigger configuration (by

the T command) has been satisfied. This bit is cleared when a new

acquisition is configured either through the Trigger Configuration (T)

command or when the unit is rearmed via the auto-rearm mode.

Stop Event

Set when the controller has attempted to read from the acquisition

device when:

Query Error

(a) no response is present or pending, or

(b) a response has been lost because the controller has sent a new

query before reading the response to a prior query.

Set when a conflict error has occurred. A conflict error is generated

when a command cannot execute correctly because it would interfere

with other commands or settings.

Device

Dependent

Error

Set when one of several errors has occurred during the execution of a

command.

Execution Error

Set when a command syntax error is detected.

Command

Error

Set when the Acquisition Buffer has been filled to at least 75% of its

capacity. The bit is cleared when the amount of data in the Acquisition

Buffer falls below 75% of its capacity.

75% Limit

Exceeded

Set on power-on or system reset (*R).

Power On

Event Status Enable Register

The event status enable register controls which events, if any, are to be reflected in the status byte register. As

shown in the following figure, the bits of the event status register are logically ANDed with the corresponding

bits of the event status enable register. The resulting bits are logically ORed together in the status byte register.

Note that the event status enable register does not affect the event status register; it only affects the ESB bit of

the status byte register. The event status enable register is set and interrogated with the Nn command.

C-14

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix C

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Status Byte Register

The acquisition device sets the Message Available bit (MAV) in the Status Byte Register to determine if data

can be read by the controller. This is the only status reporting register which requires RS-232 interface users to

use a different read command than IEEE 488 interface users.

The status byte register contains the following active bits:

Bit Location

Value Description

Alarm

DIO1 (LSBit)

DIO2

Trigger Detected

Ready

DIO3

Scan Available

Message Available

Event Status Register Bit (ESB)

Service Request Bit

Buffer Overrun

DIO4

128

DIO5

DIO6

DIO7

DIO8 (MSBit)

All bits in the serial poll status byte register are cleared by either a *Rcommand, that returns ChartScan to its

power-up default conditions, or a read of the serial poll status byte register via the Status command U1. The

ESB in the Serial Poll Status Register is also cleared by these operations. The Command Error, Execution Error

and Device Dependent Error are also cleared with an Error Query (E?) command.

ChartScan User’s Manual

C-15

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Appendix C

Bit Location

Description

Set, Clear and Descriptive Information

Alarm

Set when the scanning device has sensed a valid alarm condition. The alarm is

cleared when the alarm condition no longer exists.

DI01

Trigger

Detected

Ready

Set when ChartScan has detected the trigger condition and will be cleared when the

acquisition is complete or the trigger has been reconfigured.

DI02

DI03

Set when ChartScan is ready to process another command. It is cleared when the

unit is processing a command line. This bit should be examined with a serial poll

prior to issuing a new command line. This allows any detected errors to be traced

to the specific command line containing the error. If all the setup information for a

specific ChartScan operation is included in one line, this bit also indicates when all

processing is done and the X command is completed. This ensures the unit has

completely processed all state changes before initiating any further activity.

Scan

Set when at least 1 acquisition scan is available in the acquisition buffer to be read.

Cleared when there are no scans available in the buffer to be read.

DI04

DI05

Available

Message

Available

(MAV)

Set when the output queue is not empty. It is cleared when the output queue is

empty. This bit reflects whether any command responses are still in the output

queue.

Event Status

(ESB)

Reflects the logical OR of all the bits in the Event Status Register (ESR) ANDed

with their equivalent enable bits in the Event Status Enable (ESE) register. If this bit

is set, at least one bit in the ESR is set and has its corresponding enable bit in the

ESE set. The status command U0 can be issued to read the ESR. See the

following for more information on ESR and ESE.

DI06

Service

Request Bit

(SRQ)

Set when ChartScan requests service. It is cleared when a SPOLL is performed.

DI07

DI08

Buffer

Overrun

Set if a buffer overrun occurs. It is cleared when the buffer becomes empty by

either reading out the contents of the buffer or performing a Reset (*B) of the buffer.

Service Request Enable Register

The service request enable register controls which bits of the status byte register are to be reflected in the

Request for Service and Master Summary Status bits of the status byte register. As shown in the figure on page

C-14, the bits of the status byte register are logically ANDed with the corresponding bits of the service request

enable register. The resulting bits are logically ORed together to form the master summary event status bit

(MSS) in the status byte register and to control the request for service (RQS) bit in that register. The service

request enable register does not affect the status byte register; it only affects the MSS and RQS bits of the status

byte register. The event status enable register is set and interrogated with the Mn command.

IEEE 488 Serial Poll Response

The Serial Poll Status Byte is sent when a serial poll (SPoll) command is received over the IEEE488 bus from

the active controller. Although these bits are always set to indicate ChartScan’s status, they do not generate an

SRQ on the IEEE488 bus unless the corresponding enable bit in the Service Request Enable (SRE) register has

been set with the Mn command. Below is a description of each bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte Register.

Bit Location

Value Description

Bit

Alarm

Trigger Detected

DIO1 (LSBit)

DIO2

Ready

DIO3

Scan Available

DIO4

128

Message Available(MAV)

Event Status Register Bit (ESB)

Service Request Bit (SRQ)

Buffer Overrun

DIO5

DIO6

DIO7

DIO8 (MSBit)

All bits in the serial poll status byte register are cleared by either a *R command, which returns the ChartScan to

its power-up default conditions, or a read of the serial poll status byte register via the Status command U1.

C-16

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix C

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

The ESB in the Serial Poll Status Register is also cleared by these operations. The Command Error, Execution

Error and Device Dependent Error are also cleared with an Error Query (E?) command.

Bit Location

Description

Set, Clear and Descriptive Information

Alarm

Set when the acquisition system has sensed a valid alarm condition. The alarm is cleared when

the alarm condition no longer exists.

DI01

Set when the acquisition system has detected the trigger condition and will be cleared when the

acquisition is complete or the trigger has been reconfigured.

Trigger

Detected

DI02

DI03

Set when the acquisition system is ready to process another command. It is cleared when the

system is processing a command line. This bit should be examined with a serial poll prior to

issuing a new command line. This allows any detected errors to be traced to the specific

command line containing the error. If all the setup information for the operation of a specific

acquisition system is included in one line, this bit also indicates when all processing is done and

the X command is completed. This ensures that the acquisition system is done processing all

state changes before initiating any further activity.

Ready

Set when at least 1 acquisition scan is available in the acquisition buffer to be read. Cleared

when there are no scans available in the buffer to be read.

Scan

Available

DI04

DI05

Set when the output queue is not empty. It is cleared when the output queue is empty. This bit

reflects whether any command responses are still in the output queue.

Message

Available

(MAV)

Reflects the logical OR of all the bits in the Event Status Register (ESR) ANDed with their

equivalent enable bits in the Event Status Enable (ESE) register. If this bit is set, at least one bit

in the ESR is set and has its corresponding enable bit in the ESE set. The status command U0

can be issued to read the ESR. See the following for more information on ESR and ESE.

Set when the acquisition system is requesting service. It is cleared when an SPOLL is performed.

Event Status

(ESB)

DI06

Service

Request Bit

(SRQ)

DI07

DI08

Set if a buffer overrun occurs. It is cleared when the buffer becomes empty by either reading out

the contents of the buffer or performing a Reset (*B) of the buffer.

Buffer

Overrun

Using Status Reporting Registers

As mentioned earlier the status reporting registers are organized in a hierarchical structure with the lower level

registers containing more general information and the higher level registers containing more detailed

information about particular events. In general, the lowest level register, the Status Byte Register (STB)

contains information that may require more immediate action from the controller in that events contained in this

However, as mentioned earlier, other registers may access the STB via the ESB bit. This allows any condition

within the status reporting register hierarchy to have access to the STB and therefore Serial Poll and Service

Request functionality. The following is an example to show, in brief, how the status reporting register hierarchy

works. Notice that the clearing of the higher level registers cleared the bits in the lower level registers that were

associated with the root cause of the condition.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; N0 X N16 X"

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07; M0 X M32 X"

‘ Configure ESB in the STB to be set when a Device

Dependent Error occurs.

‘ Configure SRQ when the ESB in the STB occurs.

A Device Dependent Error will now cause ChartScan to issue a Service Request (SRQ) to the controller. When

the SRQ occurs, the controller may perform the following sequence to determine the exact cause of the Service

Request.

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;E?X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07;

INPUT A$

‘ Query the ESC to determine the cause of the error

‘ Get the response

‘ Screen shows E016.This is a calibration error

PRINT A$

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;U2X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07;

INPUT A$

PRINT#1,"OUTPUT07;U0X"

PRINT#1,"ENTER07;

INPUT A$

‘ Query the CSR to determine the cause of the ‘ calibration error

‘ Get the response

‘ Screen shows E002. This is a calibration Gain error

‘ Now query the ESR (reading ESC should have cleared it)

‘ Get the response

‘ Screen shows 000 — Device Dependent Error no longer there

PRINT A$

PRINT#1,"SPOLL07

‘ Screen shows 4 — ESB bit no longer set (only Ready is set).

ChartScan User’s Manual

C-17

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Appendix C

Trigger Latency

Each trigger source has an associated latency. This is the time between the actual trigger and its recognition by

the acquisition device.

The following latency times are only representative of the time between when the trigger is detected and when

the trigger has been processed. Hardware latency times and ISR servicing of other tasks at the time of the

trigger event but before the trigger is detected are not accounted for. In other words, these times may be offset

as much as the hardware latency times, in addition to the amount of time that the longest uninterrupted ISR takes

to process.

TRIGGER SOURCE

LATENCY

(avg)

OBSERVED

VARIATION

External Triggers ( TTL Rising, TTL Falling)

Selected Temperature Range

GET (IEEE only)

610.95 µs

N/A⁽¹⁾

2.10 µs

N/A⁽¹⁾

645.6 µs

780.53 µs

2.255 µs

N/A⁽¹⁾

3.10 µs

12.00 µs

620.00 µs

N/A⁽¹⁾

TALK (IEEE only)

“@" character

Alarm

Absolute Time

44.5 µs

45.9 µs

27.0 µs

28.5 µs

Count (post-trigger)

(1) When using a channel level or alarm as the trigger source, the trigger latency is

dependent on the number of channels being scanned and the programmed timebase.

If the scan time is less than or equal to the programmed scan rate, then the maximum

trigger latency is equal to the programmed scan rate. If the scan time is greater than the

programmed scan rate, the maximum trigger latency is equal to the scan time.

Trigger Overrun

A trigger overrun condition exists if more than one trigger start event or more than one trigger stop event occurs

during one trigger acquisition. This is flagged and notification is given, but no other action is taken. The trigger

overrun bit in the Error Source Register (ESE) is set. The user may query (with the E? command) the Error

Source Register to determine if a trigger overrun has occurred.

Buffer Overrun

ChartScan’s internal buffer will wrap-around if the controlling computer cannot read the data out of the buffer

before it is completely full. This situation is called “buffer overrun.” It prevents new data from being lost and

keeps the scan rate consistent, but it also overwrites the oldest data.

Although registered as an error, depending on the application, a buffer overrun may be a part of normal

operation.

For example, if a ChartScan unit with 256 Kbytes of memory was configured to scan 16 channels at a

one-minute interval, the buffer would fill and an overrun would occur in about 5.6 days. Regardless of how long

ChartScan is left unattended after that point, it will always maintain the newest 5.6 days of scans.

There are two cases of buffer overrun. One when only one trigger block is in the buffer, and secondly, when

multiple trigger blocks are in the buffer.

If a buffer-overrun occurs, it may be detected by querying the Status Byte (STB) by either a SPOLL (IEEE 488

only) or a U1X command (IEEE 488 or RS-232).

C-18

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix C

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

IEEE 488

PRINT#1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

IF (S% and 128 = 128) THEN

PRINT “Buffer Overrun Occurred”

ENDIF

IEEE 488 and RS-232

PRINT#1, “OUTPUT07; U1X”

PRINT#1, “ENTER07"

INPUT #2, S%

IF (S% and 128 = 128) THEN

PRINT “Buffer Overrun Occurred”

ENDIF

Buffer Overrun With One Trigger Block

When only one trigger block is in the buffer, a buffer overrun will erase the entire pre-trigger. If the controller

was reading pre-trigger data from the buffer, the next scan read will be the trigger point.

If no pre-trigger was configured or the pre-trigger has already been read, a buffer overrun will only erase the

oldest scan in the buffer. If the scan being erased is currently being read, the contents of the read scan will be in

error. If an overrun condition is detected by the controller during a read operation, any further reading must be

considered corrupt until a buffer reset is issued. This can be done by either resetting the buffer with a *B

command and/or reading the remaining data out of the buffer until it is clear.

Buffer Overrun With Multiple Trigger Blocks

When more than one trigger block is in the buffer, a buffer overrun will erase the oldest trigger block. If the

block being erased is currently being read, the block read will be terminated and the read pointer will be

advanced to the start of the next block. If an overrun condition is detected by the controller during a read

operation, any further reading must be considered corrupt until a buffer reset is issued. This can be done by

either resetting the buffer with a *B command and/or reading the remaining data out of the buffer until it is clear.

Real Time Clock

ChartScan has a programmable battery-backed, real-time clock with a resolution of 1mS. The clock is initially

set to Eastern Standard time (U.S.). The time and date are used to tag the trigger point in each trigger block and

HLL register. This data is incorporated into the Acquisition Buffer.

Open Thermocouple/Range Error Checking

ChartScan has built-in facilities for detecting open thermocouple and range errors, one in hardware and two in

software:

•

In hardware, the thermocouple cards contain circuitry to detect open thermocouples.

In software, software detection routines exist to sense if the input a/d maximizes and to detect if an

input exceeds the linearization limits.

If an open thermocouple/range error is detected, the Error Status Register will be set denoting that this particular

error condition exists. The offending channel(s) can be determined by reading their values. If a channel is in

error, its value will be:

3276.70

if temperature channel (assuming units of °C)

005.7670000 if Volts channel

Note: Open thermocouple/range error checking is only performed on channels previously activated by

the CCommand.

ChartScan User’s Manual

C-19

Registers, Data Formats, & Queries

Appendix C

−

Notes

C-20

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix D

ChartScan Program Examples

Reference Note: You may find Appendix A useful while reading through these examples. Appendix A

contains descriptions and examples of the Application Program Interface (API) Commands.

Contents

Overview ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------D-1

Reading HLL Status using HLL16.BAS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------D-2

Reading HLL Data from T/C and Volts Cards using HLL32.BAS------------------------------------------------D-2

Acquiring Pre-& Post-Trigger Data at Data at Different Rates using SLOW_ACQ.BAS-------------------D-3

Acquiring Pre-& Post-Trigger Data at the Same Rate using FAST_ACQ.BAS ------------------------------D-5

Operating Alarms using ALARM2.BAS---------------------------------------------------------------------------------D-6

Using the IEEE 488 SRQ with Alarms using ALAR2SRQ.BAS --------------------------------------------------D-8

Collecting Data in Binary Format using BIN_ACQ.BAS------------------------------------------------------------D-9

Collecting Binary-Formatted High/Low/Last Data using BIN_HLL.BAS ---------------------------------------D-11

Using Auto-Rearm to Capture Multiple Trigger Blocks using BLK_ACQ.BAS-------------------------------D-13

Configure for 12 Channels with Continuous Binary Upload using CONTIN_D.BAS------------------------D-14

Configure for High-Speed, Single-Channel Burst Mode using BURST.BAS ---------------------------------D-17

Overview

This chapter walks through the example programs that are supplied on the release disk in the EXAMPLES

subdirectory of the CHARTVIEW directory. This directory has additional examples for serial users.

Although written in QuickBASIC, the program logic and the ChartScan device-dependent commands apply

to all languages and computers.

The first group of examples uses the IEEE 488 bus through the Personal488 interface to communicate with

the ChartScan. Each one of these programs begins with a short preamble that opens the driver and

substantiates communications.

After the driver is opened, commands are issued to the driver through character strings in quotes.

QuickBASIC’s PRINTand INPUTcommands are used to communicate with the driver. The driver

commands used most commonly are ENTER, OUTPUT, and SPOLL.

• ENTERgets data from the selected device. The syntax of the ENTERcommand is “ENTERaddr”,

where addris the IEEE 488 address of the instrument. To bring the data into a language variable, the

QuickBASIC INPUTfunction must be used right after the ENTERcommand.

• OUTPUTsends data to the selected device, The syntax of the OUTPUTcommand is “OUTPUTaddr;out

data”, where addr is the IEEE 488 address of the instrument, and out data the string of characters to

send to the device.

• SPOLLis an abbreviation for a Serial Poll that retrieves an 8-bit status response from the selected

instrument. The syntax of the SPOLLcommand is “SPOLLaddr”, where addris the IEEE 488 address

of the instrument. Right after the SPOLLcommand, the QuickBASIC INPUTfunction must be used to

bring the data into a language variable.

Note: The ChartScan is at IEEE 488 address 07 for all IEEE 488 examples.

ChartScan User’s Manual, ^1-14-99

D-1

ChartScan Program Examples

Appendix D

Reading HLL Status using HLL16.BAS

The following program is HLL16.BAS in the EXAMPLES directory. It will configure 16 channels, collect

the HLL (high/low/last) data, and post it on the screen.

Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by

sending it the “*R” command then waiting a few seconds.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”

SLEEP 4

To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, serial poll the device until the proper

status is returned.

WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

The Ccommand will be used to configure a range of channels from 1 to 16 as T-type thermocouples.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-16,3X”

The next three lines tell you to hit a key to start the acquisition. The program will not proceed until a key is

pressed.

PRINT “The ChartScan is collecting High/Low/Last for all 16 channels”

PRINT “Hit a key to start or stop retrieving HLL data..”

WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND

Until another key is pressed to exit the loop, the U4command is issued and the high/low/last data is

collected. The OUTPUT command sends U4to the device, the ENTER command requests the data, then

QuickBASIC’s LINE INPUT gets the data from the IEEE 488 driver and places it in the variable U$. The

FOR loop extracts the data for the individual channels from the string U$and places them on the screen.

WHILE INKEY$ = “”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U4X”

PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"

LINE INPUT #2, U$

FOR i = 1 TO 16

PRINT “High, Low and Last readings of Channel”; i

PRINT MID$(U$, (i * 66) - 65, 66)

NEXT i

WEND

Time and date information is also available in the high/low/last data.

Reading HLL Data from T/C & Volts Cards using HLL32.BAS

The following program is HLL32.BAS in the EXAMPLES directory. It will configure 16 Temperature

and 16 volts channels then collect the high/low/last data and post it on the screen.

Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by

sending it the “*R” command and then waiting a few seconds.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”

SLEEP 4

To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, serial poll the device until the proper

status is returned.

WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

The Ccommand will be used twice to configure a range of channels from 1 to 16 as T-type thermocouples

and a range of channels from 17 to 32 as +/- 10 volt inputs.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-16,3X”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C17-32,14X”

The next three lines tell you to hit a key to start the acquisition. The program will not proceed until a key is

pressed.

PRINT “The ChartScan is collecting High/Low/Last for all 32 channels..”

PRINT “Hit a key to start or stop collecting HLL data..”

WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND

D-2

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix D

ChartScan Program Examples

Until another key is pressed to exit the loop, the U4command is issued and the high/low/last data is

collected. The OUTPUT command sends U4to the device, the ENTER command requests the data, then

the QuickBASIC’s LINE INPUT gets the data from the IEEE 488 driver and places it in the variable U$.

The FOR loop extracts the data for the individual channels from the string U$and places them on the

screen. Since format of the volts data is subtly different than that of the temperature data, two different

FOR loops must be used to extract the channels data.

WHILE INKEY$ = “”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U4X”

PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"

LINE INPUT #2, U$

FOR i = 1 TO 16

PRINT “High, Low and Last readings of Channel”; i

PRINT MID$(U$, (i * 66) - 65, 66)‘Extract temp. data

NEXT i

FOR i = 1 TO 16

PRINT “High, Low and Last readings of Channel”; i + 16

PRINT MID$(U$, (32 * 66) + (i * 78) - 77, 78)

‘Extract volts data

NEXT i

WEND

Acquiring Pre- & Post-Trigger Data at Different Rates using SLOW_ACQ.BAS

The following program is SLOW_ACQ.BAS in the EXAMPLES directory. It will configure 32

temperature channels and then collect data as soon as it becomes available and post it on screen.

Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by

sending it the “*R” command and then waiting a few seconds.

CLS : PRINT “The ChartScan is resetting..”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”

SLEEP 4

To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, serial poll the device until the proper

status is returned.

WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

The Ccommand will be used twice to configure a range of channels from 1 to 16 as Type J thermocouples

and a range of channels from 17 to 32 as Type K thermocouples.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-16,1X”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C17-32,2X”

The Ycommand is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the different acquisition states. In

this example, 30 scans are taken while in the pre-trigger state, 1 while in the post-trigger state, and 200

while in the post-stop state. The post-trigger count is only valid when the stop event, set by the Tcommand

is set to Counted. This application does not use Counted, so this parameter is ignored.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y30,1,200X”

The Icommand sets the time between scans in hours-minutes-seconds format. The ChartScan can have

two separate scan intervals, one that is used in the post-trigger state, and one that is used in all other states.

This example sets up the post-trigger scan interval to 0.3 seconds (3.33 Hz), and the pre-trigger and post-

stop scan intervals to 1 second (1 Hz).

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;I00:00:01.0,00:00:0.3X”

ChartScan User’s Manual

D-3

ChartScan Program Examples

Appendix D

The Tcommand sets up the trigger parameters for the acquisition. In this example, the start event is an ‘@’

character sent by the controller, and the stop event is also an ‘@’ character. The auto-rearm flag is set to 0

(off), so that the ChartScan will not re-arm itself for another acquisition after this acquisition is complete.

The synchronization flag is also off, so the ChartScan will not re-synchronize itself to the trigger point when

the start event begins. When the ChartScan encounters the Xcommand, it will be armed and start the

collection of the pre-trigger data.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T1,1,0,0X”

The next four lines, prompt you to hit a key to trigger the ChartScan. When a key is hit, the ‘@’ character is

sent, which is the system’s start event.

PRINT“The ChartScan is collecting pre-triggered data and is

ready for a trigger..”

PRINT“Press a key to trigger the start of Acquisition..”

WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;@X”

While in the post-trigger state, our application will first check for a scan to be available by serial polling the

device and comparing the response with an 8. If a scan is available, the R1command tells the ChartScan to

send the oldest scan to the controller. ENTER requests the response data from the device. QuickBASIC’s

INPUT command places the retrieved data into the variable READINGS$.

Note that the program can go to other “foreground” tasks while ChartScan is acquiring data, and only

occasionally query the unit and collect its data. This is possible since the acquisition is slow, and

ChartScan’s buffer can be relatively large.

‘Upload data as it becomes available

PRINT “The program is currently collecting data as it becomes available..”

PRINT “Hit a key to stop Acquisition ..”

i = 0

WHILE INKEY$ = ‘’

i = i + 1

S% = 0

WHILE ((s% and 8) <>8)

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

‘Is scan available?

WEND

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;R1X” ‘Ask for one scan

PRINT#1, “ENTER 07"

INPUT#2, READING$

LOCATE7, 1: PRINT “The scan”; i; “was::”; READING$

WEND

After a key has been pressed, the program proceeds to the next block where the ‘@’ character is issued

again, ending the post-trigger state and entering the post-stop state.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;@X”

Now the collection of the post-stop data begins by querying for new scans and requesting the data. The

program is done when the acquisition is complete.

i=0

WHILE INKEY$=""

i=i+1

s%=0

WHILE ((S% AND 8) <> 8)

PRINT #1, “SPOLL07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;R1X”

PRINT #1, ENTER 07"

INPUT #2, READING$

LOCATE 7, 1:PRINT “The scan ”;i:was:’; READING$

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT07;UOX:

PRINT #1, :ENTER07"

OUTPUT #2, U%

if U%=1 then END

WEND

D-4

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix D

ChartScan Program Examples

Acquiring Pre- & Post-Trigger Data at the Same Rate using FAST_ACQ.BAS

The following program, FAST_ACQ.BAS, in the EXAMPLES directory will set up the ChartScan for fast

acquisition then bring the values into the controller after the acquisition is complete. From a logic

standpoint, the difference between this and SLOW_ACQ.BASis that this program reads blocks of data

instead of one scan at a time. This method is usually more efficient in case of fast scan intervals.

Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by

sending it the “*R” command and then waiting a few seconds.

CLS : PRINT “The ChartScan is resetting..”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”

SLEEP 10

To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, serial poll the device until the proper

status is returned.

S% = 0

WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

The Ccommand will be used twice to configure a range of channels from 1 to 16 as Type T thermocouples

and a range of channels from 17 to 32 as Type K thermocouples.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-16,3X”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C17-32,2X”

The Ycommand is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the different acquisition states. In

this example, 50 scans are taken while in the pre-trigger state, 100 while in the post-trigger state, and 200

while in the post-stop state. The post-trigger count is only valid when the stop event, set by the Tcommand

is set to Counted. This application does not use Counted, so this parameter of 100 is ignored.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y50,100,200X”

The Icommand sets the time between scans in hours-minutes-seconds format. The ChartScan can have

two separate scan rates, one that is used in the post-trigger state, and one that is used in all other states.

This example sets up both scan intervals to 0.1 seconds (10 Hz).

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;I00:00:00.1,00:00:00.1X”

The Tcommand sets up the trigger parameters for the acquisition. In this example, the start event is a rising

level of an input channel as specified by the Lcommand. The stop event is a falling level of an input

channel as it passes through the level specified by the Lcommand. The auto-rearm flag is set to 0 (off), so

that the ChartScan will not re-arm itself for another acquisition after this acquisition is complete. The

synchronization flag is also off, so the ChartScan will not re-synchronize itself to the trigger point when the

start event begins. When the ChartScan encounters the Xcommand, it will be armed and start the collection

of the pre-trigger data.

The L command in this example specifies the trigger channel as channel 1 at a level of 20 degrees with a

hysteresis of 0 degrees. The L command is relevant only when the start or stop event is a channel level.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;L1,20.0,0X T4,5,0,0X”

After the Xcommand has been received, the ChartScan arms itself and, in this case, waits for the start event

of channel 1 rising above 20°C. The IEEE 488 Serial Poll command is used to query the ChartScan as to

the status of the acquisition. An SPOLL value of 2 signifies that channel 1 has reached 20°C.

PRINT “The ChartScan has not been triggered..”

PRINT “Waiting for Channel 1 to reach the trigger level..”

WHILE (S% AND 2) <> 2

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

PRINT “A Start Trigger event has been detected..”

PRINT “Waiting for a stop Trigger event..”

ChartScan User’s Manual

D-5

ChartScan Program Examples

Appendix D

Using the event status register command “UOX”, we now wait until the acquisition complete event which

includes the stop event.

WHILE (U% AND 1) <> 1

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U0X”

PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"

INPUT #2, U%

WEND

PRINT “The Acquisition is now complete”

During or after the acquisition has been completed, the internal buffer can be queried for the amount of data

available for transfer. The U6command will return the trigger block number, the current scan number, the

current read pointer, the trigger time/date stamp, the scan number where the stop event occurred, the stop

time/date stamp, the scan number of the end of the trigger block, and the block complete flag.

This example uses the last parameter in the return string as an indicator of how much data is available to

transfer to the controller. QuickBASIC’s MID$ function extracts 6 characters from the string U$starting at

character 8.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U6X”‘Ask for trigger block info

PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"

LINE INPUT #2, U$

PRINT U$

UA$ = MID$(U$, 8, 6)

UA% = VAL(UA$)

PRINT UA%

PRINT #1, “The ChartScan collected ”; UA%; “ scans of data”

The R1command is used to request one scan from the unit. Using the variable UA%calculated from the

previous step, all of the data is transferred to the controller.

FOR i = 1 TO UA%

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;R1X”

PRINT #1, “ENTER 14"

INPUT #2, SCAN$

PRINT “Scan ”; i; “ is :”

PRINT SCAN$

NEXT I

Operating Alarms using ALARM2.BAS

The following program, ALARM2.BAS, in the EXAMPLES directory will set up the alarm system of the

ChartScan.

Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by

sending it the “*R” command then waiting a few seconds.

CLS : PRINT “The ChartScan is resetting..”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”

SLEEP 10

To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, serial poll the device until the proper

status is returned.

S% = 0

WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

The Ccommand is used to configure multiple channels as part of the scan group and to assign them a type.

Additionally, the alarm parameters are used to activate the alarms for those channels.

D-6

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix D

ChartScan Program Examples

After the Ccommand is issued, the ChartScan is now completely armed for alarming. In our example,

levels above 18 or below 1 will cause a system alarm.

If the intent of the application was to use alarm levels to trigger an acquisition, only the following line

would be required to arm the alarms to satisfy the trigger and/or stop events.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-16,3,1,18,0X”

In addition to causing an internal system alarm state, the alarm conditions can also be attached to any one of

the 16 digital output lines. The A command is used to assign the input channels to the digital alarm bit.

The following line attaches channels 1 and 2 to digital output line number 1 in an OR’d fashion.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;A1-2,1X” ‘Assign channels 1 & 2 to alarm 1

S% = 0

WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

Using the string returned by the O?query, which gets the status of the digital output lines, the alarm state

can be detected since bit 1 of the digital output was mapped into alarm channel 1 and 2. This example

shows alarm detection handling when 2 or more channels have to be muxed into one single digital output

bit. The “U11X” command shows each individual channel alarm status.

WHILE INKEY$ = “”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;O?X”

PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"

LINE INPUT #2, O$

IF MID$(O$, 2, 3) = “001" THEN

PRINT “Channel 1 OR 2 is in Alarm condition.”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U11X”

PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"

LINE INPUT #2, A$

PRINT A$

IF MID$(A$, 5, 1) = “1" THEN

PRINT “The ChartScan’s CH 1 is now in an Alarm

condition..”:

ELSE

PRINT “The ChartScan’s CH 1 is not in an Alarm

condition..”

END IF

IF MID$(A$, 11, 1) = “1" THEN

PRINT “The ChartScan’s CH 2 is now in an Alarm

condition..”:

ELSE

PRINT “The ChartScan’s CH 2 is not in an Alarm

condition..”

END IF

WEND

ChartScan User’s Manual

D-7

ChartScan Program Examples

Appendix D

Using the IEEE 488 SRQ with Alarms using ALAR2SRQ.BAS

The following program, ALAR2SRQ.BAS, in the EXAMPLES directory will set up the alarm system of the

ChartScan and then use the IEEE 488 Service Request signal to asynchronously service the event.

Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by

sending it the “*R” command and then waiting a few seconds.

CLS : PRINT “The ChartScan is resetting..”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”

SLEEP 4

To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, serial poll the device until the proper

status is returned.

WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

‘Wait for Ready

WEND

The Personal488 IEEE 488 driver and interface card provides a means for QuickBASIC to asynchronously

service the IEEE 488 SRQ interrupt through its ON PEN GOSUB command. When an SRQ is detected by

the Personal488 interface, program control is automatically vectored to the subroutine named in the ON

PEN GOSUB command. To activate this feature in the Personal488 driver, the command ARM SRQ must

be sent to the driver.

ON PEN GOSUB AlarmHandler

PEN ON

PRINT #1, “ARM SRQ”

The M1command instructs the unit to assert the SRQ signal when it is in an alarm state.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;M1X”

The Ccommand is used twice to configure multiple channels as part of the scan group and to assign them a

type. Additionally, the alarm parameters for channels one and two are used to activate the alarms for those

channels. Although 16 channels are included in the scan group, only 2 are armed for alarming.

After the Ccommand is issued, the ChartScan is now completely armed for alarming. In our example,

levels above 25 or below 1 for channels 1 or 2 will cause a system alarm. Since the M1command has

already been issued, this will also result in an IEEE 488 SRQ assertion.

If the intent of the application was to use alarm levels to trigger an acquisition, only the following 2 lines

would be required to arm the alarms to satisfy the trigger and/or stop events.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-16,3X”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-2,3,1,25,0X”

In addition to causing an internal system alarm state, the alarm conditions can also be attached to any one of

the 16 digital output lines. The A command is used to assign the temperature input channel to the digital

alarm bit.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;A1,1X”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;A2,2X”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;A3,3X”

‘Assign channel 1 to alarm 1

‘Assign channel 2 to alarm 2

‘Assign channel 3 to alarm 3

The example now processes a loop waiting for a key press to exit. If an SRQ is detected by the IEEE 488

driver, program control will be automatically vectored to the AlarmHandlersubroutine, then returned to

the wait loop again.

PRINT “The program is continuously detecting Alarms ..”

PRINT “Hit a key to Quit..”

WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND

END

In the alarm service routine, the unit is first SPOLL’d to clear the SRQ signal. Using the string returned by

the O?query, which gets the status of the digital output lines, the channel number that is in the alarm state

can be identified.

D-8

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix D

ChartScan Program Examples

The O?query command returns the following string representing all 4 ports digital output status.

Oxxx, xxx, xxx, xxx

AlarmHandler:

LOCATE 5, 1

PRINT “An Alarm condition has been detected..”

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;O?X”

PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"

LINE INPUT #2, A$

PRINT A$

A% = VAL(MID$(A$, 2, 3))

IF A% = 1 THEN PRINT “Alarm on CH1 only”

IF A% = 2 THEN PRINT “Alarm on CH2 only”

IF A% = 3 THEN PRINT “Alarm on CH1 & 2 ”

RETURN

Collecting Data in Binary Format using BIN_ACQ.BAS

The following program, BIN_ACQ.BAS, in the EXAMPLES directory will set up the ChartScan then

collect the channel readings in a binary format rather than the default ASCII format. This is inherently

faster than ASCII format, but the data must be deciphered after it is collected to yield temperature values.

Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by

sending it the “*R” command and then waiting a few seconds.

CLS : PRINT “The ChartScan is resetting..”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”

SLEEP 4

To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, serial poll the device until the proper

status is returned.

WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

The Ccommand will be used twice to configure a range of channels from 1 to 16 as Type J thermocouples

and a range of channels from 17 to 32 as Type K thermocouples.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-16,3X”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C17-32,2X”

The Ycommand is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the different acquisition states. In

this example, 400 scans are taken while in the pre-trigger state, 100 while in the post-trigger state, and 200

while in the post-stop state. The post-trigger count is valid since the stop event, set by the Tcommand will

be set to Counted later in the program.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y400,100,200X”

The Icommand sets the time between scans in hours-minutes-seconds format. The ChartScan can have

two separate scan rates, one that is used in the post-trigger state, and one that is used in all other states.

This example sets up both scan intervals to 0.0 seconds, which is interpreted a “go as fast as possible”.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;I00:00:00.0,00:00:00.0X”

The Tcommand is used to set the trigger, or start event, to the ‘@’ character sent by the controller. The stop

event is set to Counted. The auto-rearm flag is set to 0 (off), so that the ChartScan will not re-arm itself for

another acquisition after this acquisition is complete. The synchronization flag is also off, so the ChartScan

will not re-synchronize itself to the trigger point when the start event begins. When the ChartScan

encounters the Xcommand, it will be armed and start the collection of the pre-trigger data.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T1,8,0,0X”

After the ‘@’ character is sent, the IEEE 488 Serial Poll command is used to query the ChartScan as to the

status of the acquisition. A SPOLL value of 2 signifies that the ChartScan has encountered the start event.

ChartScan User’s Manual

D-9

ChartScan Program Examples

Appendix D

PRINT “The ChartScan is currently collecting pre-trigger data..”

PRINT “The ChartScan has not been triggered..”

PRINT “Hit a key to start a trigger event ..”:

WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND

PRINT #1, “output07;@X”

WHILE (S% AND 2) <> 2

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

PRINT “A Start Trigger has been detected..”

PRINT “Waiting for acquisition complete..including Post and

Scans”

Post-Stop

Using the event status register command “U0X”, we now wait until the acquisition complete event which

includes the stop event.

WHILE (E% AND 1) <> 1

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U0X”

PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"

INPUT #2, E%

WEND

PRINT “The Acquisition is now complete”

Before reading the data, the Fcommand is sent, instructing the ChartScan to return the data in a binary

format where every value will be 2 bytes in length. This command could have been issued anytime after the

initial reset and stays in effect until the unit is reset again or another Fcommand is issued.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;F0,1X”

During or after the acquisition has been completed, the internal buffer can be queried for the amount of data

available for transfer. The U6 command will return the trigger block number, the current scan number, the

current read pointer, the trigger time/date stamp, the scan number where the stop event occurred, the stop

time/date stamp, the scan number of the end of the trigger block, and the block complete flag.

This example uses the last parameter in the return string as an indicator of how much data is available to

transfer to the controller. QuickBASIC’s MID$ function extracts 6 characters from the string U$ starting at

character 8.

‘Query the ChartScan for the # of scans available in the Buffer

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U6X”

PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"

LINE INPUT #2, U$

PRINT U$

UA$ = MID$(U$, 9, 7)

UA% = VAL(UA$)

PRINT UA%

PRINT “The ChartScan collected ”; UA%; “ scans of data”

After calculating the number of scans, an integer-type buffer is then prepared for the data. The offset and

segment pointers are supplied to the IEEE 488 driver so that the data can be transferred using DMA (direct

memory access).

The R2command instructs the ChartScan to supply the entire block of data that is presently available.

CHANNELS = 16

DIM CBUFFER%(UA% * CHANNELS)

SE% = VARSEG(BUFFER%(0))

OF% = VARPTR(BUFFER%(0))

B& = UA% * CHANNELS * 2

PRINT “Total number of Bytes available : ”; B&

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;R2X”

PRINT “Uploading data..”

WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND

PRINT #1, “ENTER 07 #”; B&; “BUFFER ”; SE%; “:”; OF%; “ DMA”

At the completion of the DMA transfer, the integer data is now in the buffer BUFFER%. To convert the

integer data into temperatures, a simple calculation is performed.

BINARY DATA%/10 = °C

D-10

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix D

ChartScan Program Examples

Collecting Binary-Formatted HLL Data using BIN_HLL.BAS

The following program, BIN_HLL.BAS, in the EXAMPLES directory will set up the ChartScan to collect

High/Low/Last channel readings in a binary format rather than the default ASCII format. This is inherently

faster than ASCII format, but the data must be deciphered after it is collected to yield temperature values.

This program configures the channels, uploads HLL data in High speed binary mode, decodes this data and

displays it on the screen.

Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by

sending it the “*R” command and then waiting a few seconds.

'Establish communication with the DRIVER488

OPEN "\DEV\IEEEOUT" FOR OUTPUT AS #1

IOCTL #1, "BREAK"

PRINT #1, "RESET"

OPEN "\DEV\IEEEIN" FOR INPUT AS #2

PRINT #1, "TIMEOUT 5"

PRINT #1, "ERROR ON"

PRINT #1, "FILL ERROR"

PRINT #1, "TERM IN LF EOI"

'Program the ChartScan to power on with Factory default

PRINT #1, "CLEAR 07"

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;*S1X"

'Reset ChartScan and make sure it is ready

CLS : PRINT "The ChartScan is resetting.."

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;*RX"

SLEEP 3

WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0

PRINT #1, "SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

'Setup the ChartScan for line cycle integration mode

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;M#0X"

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;W#32X"

'Setup ChartScan for 16 channels TC type J and 16 Volts channels

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;C1-16,1X"

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;C17-32,14X"

'Program the ChartScan for binary format

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;F0,1X"

'Start an acquisition with 1 pretrigger scan to enable the ChartScan

'to start scanning

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;Y1,0,0X"

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;T1,1,0,0X"

'Pause for key press

PRINT "The ChartScan is collecting High/Low/Last for all 32 channels.."

PRINT "Hit a key to start or stop reading HLL data.."

WHILE INKEY$ = "": WEND

CONST CHANNELS% = 32, BYTES = CHANNELS% * 20

DIM READS AS STRING * BYTES

S% = VARSEG(READS)

O% = VARPTR(READS)

ChartScan User’s Manual

D-11

ChartScan Program Examples

Appendix D

WHILE INKEY$ = ""

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;U4X"

PRINT #1, "ENTER 07 #"; CHANNELS% * 20; " BUFFER "; S%; ":"; O%; " DMA"

PRINT "High, Low and Last readings of all 32 channels :"

'Decode received data and print on screen in ASCII

FOR i = 1 TO BYTES STEP 20

HIGH$ = STR$(CVI(MID$(READS, i, 2)))

HOURh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 2, 1)))

MINh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 3, 1)))

SECh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 4, 1)))

TENTHh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 5, 1)))

MONh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 6, 1)))

DAYh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 7, 1)))

YEARh$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 8, 1)))

LOW$ = STR$(CVI(MID$(READS, i + 9, 2)))

HOURl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 11, 1)))

MINl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 12, 1)))

SECl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 13, 1)))

TENTHl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 14, 1)))

MONl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 15, 1)))

DAYl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 16, 1)))

YEARl$ = STR$(ASC(MID$(READS, i + 17, 1)))

LAST$ = STR$(CVI(MID$(READS, i + 18, 2)))

'Convert counts to Degree C or Voltage readings

IF i < 640 THEN

PRINT STR$(VAL(HIGH$) / 10) + HOURh$ + MINh$ + SECh$ + TENTHh$ + MONh$ +

DAYh$ + YEARh$

PRINT STR$(VAL(LOW$) / 10) + HOURl$ + MINl$ + SECl$ + TENTHl$ + MONl$ +

DAYl$ + YEARl$

PRINT STR$(VAL(LAST$) / 10)

ELSE

PRINT MID$(STR$(VAL(HIGH$) * 4.5 / (32767 * .44)), 1, 8) + HOURh$ + MINh$ +

SECh$ + TENTHh$ + MONh$ + DAYh$ + YEARh$

PRINT MID$(STR$(VAL(LOW$) * 4.5 / (32767 * .44)), 1, 8) + HOURl$ + MINl$ +

SECl$ + TENTHl$ + MONl$ + DAYl$ + YEARl$

PRINT MID$(STR$(VAL(LAST$) * 4.5 / (32767 * .44)), 1, 8)

END IF

NEXT i

WEND

D-12

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix D

ChartScan Program Examples

Using Auto-Rearm to Capture Multiple Trigger Blocks using BLK_ACQ.BAS

The following program, BLK_ACQ.BAS, in the EXAMPLES directory will set up the ChartScan for auto-

rearm, which rearms the unit for another trigger event as soon as the present acquisition has been

completed.

Although not necessary, it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by

sending it the “*R” command and then waiting a few seconds.

CLS : PRINT “The ChartScan is resetting..”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;*RX”

SLEEP 4

To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready, serial poll the device until the proper

status is returned.

WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0

PRINT #1, “SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

The Ccommand will be used twice to configure a range of channels from 1 to 16 as Type J thermocouples

and a range of channels from 17 to 32 as Type K thermocouples.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C1-16,1X”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;C17-32,2X”

The Ycommand is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the different acquisition states. In

this example, 1000 scans are taken while in the pre-trigger state, 20 while in the post-trigger state, and 10

while in the post-stop state. The post-trigger count is valid since the stop event, set by the T command, is

set to Counted.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Y1000,20,10X”

The Icommand sets the time between scans in hours-minutes-seconds format. The ChartScan can have

two separate scan rates, one that is used in the post-trigger state, and one that is used in all other states.

This example sets up the pre-trigger and post-stop scan intervals to 0.3 seconds (3 Hz), and the post-trigger

interval to 0.0, which makes the units sample as fast as possible during the post-trigger period.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;I00:00:00.3,00:00:00.0X”

The Tcommand sets up the trigger parameters for the acquisition. In this example, the start event is the ‘@’

character issued by the controller. The stop event is Counted. The auto-rearm flag is set to 1 (on), so that

the ChartScan will re-arm itself for another acquisition after this acquisition is complete. The

synchronization flag is also off, so the ChartScan will not re-synchronize itself to the trigger point when the

start event begins. When the ChartScan encounters the Xcommand, it will be armed and start the collection

of the pre-trigger data.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T1,8,1,0X”

The Qcommand is used to set the buffer terminators for the data that is transferred to the controller. Both

the scan and trigger block terminators are set to LF(linefeed).

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;Q,0,0,8,8,0X”

The FORloop will read 5 trigger blocks, each consisting of a trigger point.

FOR i = 1 TO 5

The first lines of code within the FORloop ask you to trigger the unit, then the last line sends an ‘@’

character to the unit.

PRINT : PRINT “The ChartScan’s Block ”; i; “ has not been

triggered.. ”

PRINT “It is currently collecting the Pre-trigger data

specified..”

PRINT “Press any key to send a start trigger event.”

WHILE INKEY$ = “”: WEND

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;@X”

ChartScan User’s Manual

D-13

ChartScan Program Examples

Appendix D

Using the U6query, the controller gets the trigger block string, which, among other things, supplies the

block complete flag, indicating the state of the present trigger block. The block is marked complete when

the last post-stop scan is recorded into the buffer.

PRINT “Waiting for completion of Block ”; i; “..”

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;U6X”

PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"

LINE INPUT #2, U$

UA$ = MID$(U$, 86, 2)

LOOP UNTIL UA$= “1"

PRINT “The ChartScan is done with Block”; i; “and has re-armed itself”

Using the U$string which still contains the trigger block status string, the number of scans available in the

buffer is calculated. The R2command is then used to retrieve the data in the ChartScan’s internal buffer.

‘Query the ChartScan for the # of scans available in the Buffer

UAT$ = MID$(U$, 9, 7)

PRINT UAT$

PRINT “The ChartScan collected a total of ”; VAL(UAT$); “ scans”

UA$ = MID$(U$, 18, 7)

PRINT UA$

PRINT “Pre-Triggered scans :”; VAL(UA$)

UA$ = MID$(U$, 47, 8)

PRINT “Post-Triggered scans :”; VAL(UA$)

UAS$ = MID$(U$, 77, 8)

PRINT “Post-stop-Triggered scans :”; VAL(UAS$) - VAL(UA$)

‘Upload Block

PRINT “Uploading trigger block”; i

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;R2X”

FOR c = 1 TO VAL(UAT$)

PRINT #1, “ENTER 07"

LINE INPUT #2, SCAN$

NEXT c

PRINT “Block ”; i; “ is read.”

NEXT i

After all 5 trigger blocks have been collected, the unit is disarmed by sending the Tcommand.

PRINT #1, “OUTPUT 07;T0,0,0,0X”

Configure for 12 Channels with Continuous Binary Upload using

CONTIN_D.BAS

This program configures the ChartScan for 12 Channels and allows the system to continuously upload

binary data to disk when the buffer is 75% full.

'Establish communication with the DRIVER488

OPEN "\DEV\IEEEOUT" FOR OUTPUT AS #1

IOCTL #1, "BREAK"

PRINT #1, "RESET"

OPEN "\DEV\IEEEIN" FOR INPUT AS #2

PRINT #1, "TIMEOUT 5"

PRINT #1, "ERROR ON"

PRINT #1, "FILL ERROR"

PRINT #1, "TERM IN LF EOI"

OPEN "Chrtscan.DAT" FOR OUTPUT AS #3 'output data file Dimensions

s! = 4096

'number of bytes to be transferred at a time

DataBuffer$ = SPACE$(s!)

DIM DataBuffer$(s!)

DEF FNPEEKW (addr) = PEEK(addr) + 256 * PEEK(addr + 1)

D-14

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix D

ChartScan Program Examples

'find the pointer to DataBuffer$ for DMA transfer

buffseg% = VARSEG(DataBuffer$)

DX% = VARPTR(DataBuffer$)

buffoff% = FNPEEKW(DX% + 2)

'Program the ChartScan to power on with Factory default

PRINT #1, "CLEAR 07"

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;*S1X"

'Reset ChartScan and make sure it is ready

CLS : PRINT "The ChartScan is resetting.."

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;*RX"

SLEEP 3

WHILE (sp% AND 4) = 0

PRINT #1, "SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, sp%

WEND

'Setup SRQ handling

ON PEN GOSUB UploadHandler

PEN ON

PRINT #1, "ARM SRQ"

'Program ChartScan to assert an SRQ on a Buffer 75% Full condition

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;N64XM32X"

'Setup the ChartScan for line cycle integration mode

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;M#0X"

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;W#32X"

'Setup ChartScan for 12 channels TC type T

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;C1-12,14X"

'Program Scan Counts and a fast timebase

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;Y0,1,0X"

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;I00:00:00.0,00:00:00.0X"

'Program a trigger start on @ and stop on @

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;Q7,0,0,0,0X T1,1,0,0X"

'Wait for trigger event and Acquisition complete

PRINT "Hit a key to start a trigger event ..": WHILE INKEY$ = "": WEND

PRINT #1, "output07;@X"

WHILE (s% AND 2) <> 2

PRINT #1, "SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, s%

WEND

PRINT "A Start Trigger has been detected.."

'Set data format to Binary

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;F0,1X"

PRINT "Waiting for 75% Full..": PRINT

c = CSRLIN

WHILE INKEY$ = ""

LOCATE c - 1, 1: PRINT TIME$

WEND

END

UploadHandler:

PRINT #1, "DISARM SRQ"

ChartScan User’s Manual

D-15

ChartScan Program Examples

Appendix D

'Query the ChartScan for the # of scans available in the Buffer

PRINT "An SRQ has been detected.."

PRINT #1, "SPOLL07"

INPUT #2, sp%

PRINT "spoll response before :"; sp%

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;U0X"

PRINT #1, "ENTER 07"

INPUT #2, EVENT%

PRINT "EVent Status before :"; EVENT%

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;U6X"

PRINT #1, "ENTER 07"

LINE INPUT #2, U$

PRINT U$

UA$ = MID$(U$, 9, 7)

UA& = VAL(UA$)

PRINT UA&

PRINT "The ChartScan collected "; UA&; " scans of data"

'Upload available data

B& = UA& * 24

PRINT "Total number of Bytes available : "; B&

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;R3X"

PRINT "Uploading data.."

PRINT #1, "ENTER 07 #8"

a$ = INPUT$(8, 2)

PRINT "The preamble is :"; a$

pre& = VAL(MID$(a$, 2, 7))

loops = INT(pre& / s!)

PRINT "loops "; loops

FOR i = 1 TO loops

PRINT #1, "ENTER 07 #"; s!; " BUFFER "; buffseg%; ":"; buffoff%; " DMA"

PRINT #3, DataBuffer$;

NEXT i

rema! = pre& - (s! * loops)

PRINT "remainder of preamble"; rema!

PRINT #1, "ENTER 07 #"; rema!; " BUFFER "; buffseg%; ":"; buffoff%; " DMA"

PRINT #3, MID$(DataBuffer$, 1, rema!);

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;U0X"

PRINT #1, "ENTER 07"

INPUT #2, EVENT%

PRINT "EVent Status after :"; EVENT%

PRINT #1, "SPOLL07"

INPUT #2, sp%

PRINT "Spoll response after uploading :"; sp%

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;U6X"

PRINT #1, "ENTER 07"

LINE INPUT #2, U$

PRINT U$

PRINT "Waiting for 75% Full..": PRINT

c = CSRLIN

SLEEP 1

PRINT #1, "ARM SRQ"

RETURN

D-16

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix D

ChartScan Program Examples

Configure for High-Speed, Single-Channel Burst Mode using BURST.BAS

BURST.BASconfigures ChartScan for the High-Speed, Single-Channel (Burst) measuring mode, sets up an

acquisition, waits for its completion and uploads the data in ASCII, as well as posts it on the screen. This

program also stops in the event of a buffer overrun.

'Establish communication with the DRIVER488

OPEN "\DEV\IEEEOUT" FOR OUTPUT AS #1

IOCTL #1, "BREAK"

PRINT #1, "RESET"

OPEN "\DEV\IEEEIN" FOR INPUT AS #2

PRINT #1, "TIMEOUT 5"

PRINT #1, "ERROR ON"

PRINT #1, "FILL ERROR"

PRINT #1, "TERM IN LF EOI"

'Program the ChartScan to power on with Factory default

PRINT #1, "CLEAR 07"

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;*S1X"

'Reset ChartScan and make sure it is ready

CLS : PRINT "The ChartScan is resetting.."

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;*RX"

SLEEP 3

S% = 0

WHILE (S% AND 4) = 0

PRINT #1, "SPOLL 07"

INPUT #2, S%

WEND

'Setup the ChartScan for burst mode and a sampling frequency of 20kHz.

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;M#1X"

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;F#20000.0X"

'Setup ChartScan to do a burst scan on channel 1

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;C1,14x"

SLEEP 1

'Program for 8 blocks of 256 samples

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;Y0,8,0X"

'Program a trigger start on @ and a stop on count

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;T1,8,0,0X"

'Start the burst acquisition

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;@X"

PRINT "Waiting for acquisition to complete.."

U% = 0

WHILE (U% AND 1) <> 1

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;U0X"

PRINT #1, "ENTER 07"

INPUT #2, U%

WEND

PRINT "The Acquisition is now complete"

ChartScan User’s Manual

D-17

ChartScan Program Examples

Appendix D

'Query the ChartScan for the # of 256 sample scans available in the Buffer

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;U6X"

PRINT #1, "ENTER 07"

LINE INPUT #2, U$

UA$ = MID$(U$, 9, 7)

UA% = VAL(UA$)

PRINT "The ChartScan collected "; UA%; " scans of data"

'Program terminators for LF EOI and a space between channels

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;V32X Q7,0,7,7,1X"

'Upload data one scan at a time from the ChartScan

PRINT #1, "OUTPUT 07;R2X"

FOR i = 1 TO UA%

PRINT #1, "ENTER 07"

INPUT #2, SCAN$

LOCATE 14, 1: PRINT "Scan "; i; " is :"

PRINT SCAN$

NEXT i

END

D-18

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix E

Bus States, Bus Lines, and Data Transfer Aspects

Bus State

Bus Line

Data Transfer (DIO) Lines

Bus Management Lines

IFC

REN

Interface Clear

Remote Enable

IEEE 488 Interface: Bus Management Lines

ATN

EOI

SRQ

Attention (&H04)

End-Or-Identify (&H80)

Service Request (&H40)

IEEE 488 Interface: Handshake Lines

DAV

NDAC

NRFD

Data Valid (&H08)

Not Data Accepted (&H10)

Not Ready For Data (&H20)

Serial Interface: Bus Management Lines

DTR

Data Terminal Ready (&H02)

Ring Indicator (&H10)

RTS

Request To Send (&H01)

Serial Interface: Handshake Lines

CTS

DCD

DSR

Clear To Send (&H04)

Data Carrier Detect (&H08)

Data Set Ready (&H20)

Hexadecimal & Decimal Values

Hex Value (QuickBASIC)

&H80

128

&H40

&H20

&H10

&H08

&H04

&H02

&H01

Decimal Value

Bus State

IEEE 488 Bus Command

(ATN is asserted “1”)

Device Clear

Data Transfer (DIO) Lines

DCL

GET

GTL

LAG

LLO

MLA

MTA

PPC

PPD

PPU

SCG

SDC

SPD

SPE

TAG

TCT

UNL

UNT

Group Execute Trigger (&H08)

Go To Local (&H01)

Listen Address Group (&H20-3F)

Local Lock Out (&H11)

My Listen Address

My Talk Address

Parallel Poll Config

Parallel Poll Disable (&H07)

Parallel Poll Unconfig (&H15)

Second. Cmd. Group (&H60-7F)

Selected Device Clear (&H04)

Serial Poll Disable (&H19)

Serial Poll Enable (&H18)

Talker Address Group (&H40-5F)

Take Control (&H09)

Unlisten (&H3F)

Untalk (&H5F)

Hexadecimal & Decimal Values

Hex Value (QuickBASIC)

Decimal Value

&H80

128

&H40

&H20

&H10

&H08

&H04

&H02

&H01

ChartScan User’s Manual, ^11-97

E-1

−

Notes

E-2

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix F

ASCII Code Summary

Decimal Values 00 to 63 – ACG, UCG & LAG

Box Items

Hexadecimal Value

Bus Message

Decimal Value

$41

(in center) ASCII Character

Addressed Command Group (ACG)

02 $03 03 $04 04 $05

$00

00 $01

01 $02

05 $06

06 $07

NUL SOH

STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL

GTL

SDC

PPD

$08

08 $09

09 $0A

10 $0B

11 $0C

12 $0D

13 $0E

14 $0F

GET

TCT

Universal Command Group (UCG)

18 $13 19 $14 20 $15

$10

16 $11

17 $12

21 $16

22 $17

DLE DC1

DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB

LLO

DCL

PPU

$18

24 $19

25 $1A

26 $1B

27 $1C

28 $1D

29 $1E

30 $1F

CAN

SPE

SPD

SUB ESC

Listen Address Group (LAG)

$20

32 $21

33 $22

34 $23

35 $24

36 $25

37 $26

38 $27

(

)

”

;

’

$28

40 $29

41 $2A

42 $2B

43 $2C

44 $2D

45 $2E

46 $2F

$30

48 $31

49 $32

50 $33

51 $34

52 $35

53 $36

54 $37

$38

56 $39

57 $3A

58 $3B

59 $3C

60 $3D

61 $3E

62 $3F

UNL

ChartScan User’s Manual, ^11-97

F-1

ASCII Code Summary

Appendix F

Decimal Values 64 to 127 – TAG & SCG

Box Items

Hexadecimal Value

Bus Message

Decimal Value

$41

(in center) ASCII Character

Talk Address Group (TAG)

$40

64 $41

65 $42

66 $43

67 $44

68 $45

69 $46

70 $47

[

]

$48

72 $49

73 $4A

74 $4B

75 $4C

76 $4D

77 $4E

78 $4F

$50

80 $51

81 $52

82 $53

83 $54

84 $55

85 $56

86 $57

$58

88 $59

89 $5A

90 $5B

91 $5C

92 $5D

93 $5E

94 $5F

UNT

Secondary Command Group (SCG)

$60

96 $61

97 $62

98 $63

99 $64

100 $65

101 $66

102 $67

103

111

119

127

‘

{

}

$68

104 $69

105 $6A

106 $6B

107 $6C

108 $6D

109 $6E

110 $6F

$70

112 $71

113 $72

114 $73

115 $74

116 $75

117 $76

118 $77

$78

120 $79

121 $7A

122 $7B

123 $7C

124 $7D

125 $7E

126 $7F

DEL

F-2

ChartScan User’s Manual

ASCII Code Summary

Appendix F

ASCII Code Details

Decimal Values 00 to 31 – ACG & UCG Characteristics

ASCII Control Codes (Decimal 00 to 31)

Character

Dec

Hex

Value

and

Name

Bus Message

($ or &H)

Abbreviation

Addressed Command Group (ACG)

None / NUL Null

None

^A / SOH

^B / STX

^C / ETX

^D / EOT

^E / ENQ

^F / ACK

^G / BEL

^H / BS

^I / HT

^J / LF

^K / VT

^L / FF

^M / CR

^N / SO

^O / SI

Start of Header

Start of Text

End of Text

End of Transmission

Inquiry

Go To Local (GTL)

None

Selected Device Clear (SDC)

None

Acknowledgement

Bell

None

Parallel Poll Disable (PPD)

Backspace

Horizontal Tab

Line Feed

Group Execute Trigger (GET)

Take Control (TCT)

None

Vertical Tab

Form Feed

Carriage Return

Shift Out

Shift In

Universal Command Group (UCG)

^P / DLE

^Q / DC1

^R / DC2

^S / DC3

^T / DC4

^U / NAK

^V / SYN

^W / ETB

^X / CAN

^Y / EM

^Z / SUB

^[ / ESC

^\ / FS

^] / GS

^^ / RS

^_ / US

Data Link Escape

Device Control 1

Device Control 2

Device Control 3

Device Control 4

Negative Acknowledgement

Synchronous Idle

End of Transmission Block

Cancel

None

Local Lockout (LLO)

None

Device Clear (DCL)

Parallel Poll Unconfig (PPU)

None

Serial Poll Enable (SPE)

End of Medium

Substitute

Serial Poll Disable (SPD)

None

Escape

File Separator

Group Separator

Record Separator

Unit Separator

Notes:

•

ASCII control codes are sometimes used to “formalize” a communications session between

communication devices.

• DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4, FS, GS, RS,and USall have user-defined meanings, and may vary in

use between sessions or devices.

• DC4is often used as a general “stop transmission character.”

•

Codes used to control cursor position may be used to control print devices, and move the print

head accordingly. However, not all devices support the full set of positioning codes.

ChartScan User’s Manual

F-3

ASCII Code Summary

Appendix F

Decimal Values 00 to 31 – ACG & UCG Descriptions

ASCII Control Codes (00 to 31)

Description

Dec

Name

Addressed Command Group (ACG)

Null (NUL)

Space filler character. Used in output timing for some device

drivers.

Start of Header (SOH)

Start of Text (STX)

End of Text (ETX)

Marks beginning of message header.

Marks beginning of data block (text).

Marks end of data block (text).

End of Transmission (EOT)

Inquiry (ENQ)

Marks end of transmission session.

Request for identification or information.

Acknowledgement (ACK)

“Yes” answer to questions or “ready for next transmission.” Used in

asynchronous protocols for timing.

Bell (BEL)

Rings bell or audible alarm on terminal.

Moves cursor position back one character.

Moves cursor position to next tab stop on line.

Moves cursor position down one line.

Backspace (BS)

Horizontal Tab (HT)

Line Feed (LF)

Vertical Tab (VT)

Form Feed (FF)

Carriage Return (CR)

Shift Out (SO)

Moves cursor position down to next “tab line.”

Moves cursor position to top of next page.

Moves cursor to left margin.

Next characters do not follow ASCII definitions.

Next characters revert to ASCII meaning.

Shift In (SI)

Universal Command Group (UCG)

Data Link Escape (DLE)

Device Control 1 (DC1)

Device Control 2 (DC2)

Device Control 3 (DC3)

Device Control 4 (DC4)

Used to control transmissions using “escape sequences.”

Not defined. Normally used for ON controls.

Usually user-defined.

Not defined. Normally used for OFF controls.

Usually user-defined.

Negative Acknowledgement (NAK) “No” answer to questions or “errors found, re-transmit.” Used in

asynchronous protocols for timing.

Synchronous Idle (SYN)

End of Transmission Block (ETB)

Cancel (CAN)

Sent by asynchronous devices when idle to insure sync.

Marks block boundaries in transmission.

Indicates previous transmission should be disregarded.

Marks end of physical media, as in paper tape.

Used to replace a character known to be wrong.

Marks beginning of an Escape control sequence.

Marker for major portion of transmission.

End of Medium (EM)

Substitute (SUB)

Escape (ESC)

File Separator (FS)

Group Separator (GS)

Record Separator (RS)

Unit Separator (US)

Marker for submajor portion of transmission.

Marker for minor portion of transmission.

Marker for most minor portion of transmission.

F-4

ChartScan User’s Manual

ASCII Code Summary

Appendix F

Decimal Values 32 to 63 – LAG

ASCII Character Set (Decimal 32 to 63)

Dec

Hex

Character

Name

Bus Message

Listen Address Group (LAG)

<space>

Space

Bus address 00

Bus address 01

Bus address 02

Bus address 03

Bus address 04

Bus address 05

Bus address 06

Bus address 07

Bus address 08

Bus address 09

Bus address 10

Bus address 11

Bus address 12

Bus address 13

Bus address 14

Bus address 15

“

‘

(

)

Exclamation Point

Quotation Mark

Number Sign

Dollar Sign

Percent Sign

Ampersand

Apostrophe

Opening Parenthesis

Closing Parenthesis

Asterisk

Plus Sign

Comma

Hyphen or Minus Sign

Period

Slash

Listen Address Group (LAG)

;

Zero

Bus address 16

Bus address 17

Bus address 18

Bus address 19

Bus address 20

Bus address 21

Bus address 22

Bus address 23

Bus address 24

Bus address 25

Bus address 26

Bus address 27

Bus address 28

Bus address 29

Bus address 30

Unlisten (UNL)

One

Two

Three

Four

Five

Six

Seven

Eight

Nine

Colon

Semicolon

Less Than Sign

Equal Sign

Greater Than Sign

Question Mark

ChartScan User’s Manual

F-5

ASCII Code Summary

Appendix F

Decimal Values 64 to 95 – TAG

ASCII Character Set (Decimal 64 to 95)

Dec

Hex

Character

Name

Bus Message

Talk Address Group (TAG)

At Sign

Bus address 00

Bus address 01

Bus address 02

Bus address 03

Bus address 04

Bus address 05

Bus address 06

Bus address 07

Bus address 08

Bus address 09

Bus address 10

Bus address 11

Bus address 12

Bus address 13

Bus address 14

Bus address 15

Capital A

Capital B

Capital C

Capital D

Capital E

Capital F

Capital G

Capital H

Capital I

Capital J

Capital K

Capital L

Capital M

Capital N

Capital O

Talk Address Group (TAG)

[

]

Capital P

Bus address 16

Bus address 17

Bus address 18

Bus address 19

Bus address 20

Bus address 21

Bus address 22

Bus address 23

Bus address 24

Bus address 25

Bus address 26

Bus address 27

Bus address 28

Bus address 29

Bus address 30

Untalk (UNT)

Capital Q

Capital R

Capital S

Capital T

Capital U

Capital V

Capital W

Capital X

Capital Y

Capital Z

Opening Bracket

Backward Slash

Closing Bracket

Caret

Underscore

F-6

ChartScan User’s Manual

ASCII Code Summary

Appendix F

Decimal Values 96 to 127 – SCG

ASCII Character Set (96 to 127)

Character Name

Secondary Command Group (SCG)

Dec

Hex

Bus Message

’

Grave

Command 00

Command 01

Command 02

Command 03

Command 04

Command 05

Command 06

Command 07

Command 08

Command 09

Command 10

Command 11

Command 12

Command 13

Command 14

Command 15

Lowercase A

Lowercase B

Lowercase C

Lowercase D

Lowercase E

Lowercase F

Lowercase G

Lowercase H

Lowercase I

Lowercase J

Lowercase K

Lowercase L

Lowercase M

Lowercase N

Lowercase O

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

Secondary Command Group (SCG)

Lowercase P

Lowercase Q

Lowercase R

Lowercase S

Lowercase T

Lowercase U

Lowercase V

Lowercase W

Lowercase X

Lowercase Y

Lowercase Z

Opening Brace

Vertical Line

Closing Brace

Tilde

Command 16

Command 17

Command 18

Command 19

Command 20

Command 21

Command 22

Command 23

Command 24

Command 25

Command 26

Command 27

Command 28

Command 29

Command 30

Command 31

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

{

}

DEL

Delete

ChartScan User’s Manual

F-7

ASCII Code Summary

Appendix F

−

Notes

F-8

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix G

ChartScan Error Messages

At initial power-up, ChartScan performs automatic self-tests to ensure it is fully functional. Rear-panel LEDs

indicate errors, if they occur. Possible error conditions and their corresponding indicator light patterns are

shown in the following table. Any pattern not shown indicates an internal error that is not field-serviceable; in

this case, contact the factory.

When only the POWER and ERROR LEDs are on, a configuration error exists as a

result of the setup information in NV-RAM.

If you observe a configuration error, refer to E? in Appendix A; then perform an

error status query. If you observe any other type of error condition, make note of

the error and contact your service representative.

If no problems are found, ChartScan will begin its power-up initialization. This self-test is performed each

time the unit is powered up, regardless of whether power-up is initiated by the power switch, or the Power-On Reset (*R)

command.

LED Indications of Error Conditions

Error Condition

LED Indicators

ALARM

TRIGGER

SCAN

ERROR

POWER

General Hardware Failure

ROM Invalid for

-Flash-

U22, COMM2

ROM Checksum Error for

U21, COMM1

ROM Checksum Error for

U22, COMM2

Non-Volatile RAM Error

Dynamic RAM Error

Interprocessor COM Error

Configuration Error

-Flash-

Error Status Query (E?) is used to determine the present error condition. After execution of the E?

command, ChartScan will respond with one of several possible error codes, as indicated below.

E000: No error has occurred.

E001: Invalid device dependent command (IDDC) due to a command syntax error.

E002: Invalid device dependent command option (IDDCO). A command parameter was out of range

or missing.

E004: A Channel Configuration Error indicates that a channel has been inappropriately configured,

either because the channel is not present or because the specified channel type is not compatible with

the card type installed.

E008: A Calibration Error occurs when the card calibration has failed or has been inappropriately

calibrated.

E016: A Trigger Overrun Error occurs when more than one trigger event occurs for a given trigger

state or when a non-expectant trigger event occurs.

E032: An Open T/C Error or Range Error, occurs when the hardware circuitry detects an open

thermocouple, or when the software detects the A/D input has reached or exceeded its linearization.

E064: Custom Table Error indicates that a Custom Table has been inappropriately defined or has not

been loaded properly. This error usually occurs because Custom Table is out of memory or the

inappropriate specification of the Set Table Entry Pointer (W) command.

E128: A Command Conflict Error indicates the issuance of a command that is in conflict with other

commands that have been issued or the current configuration. This error usually occurs when a

command is issued that cannot be performed because of the current state of the unit. For instance, if

ChartScan User’s Manual, ^1-4-99

G-1

ChartScan Error Messages

Appendix G

the Set Scan Interval (I) command is issued during an acquisition (tstart 0).

After execution of the Error Status Query, most error conditions are cleared. Error

conditions may also be cleared by issuing a Clear Event Status (U0) command to the

unit. The ERROR light will remain on until an E? (or U0) command is executed to

clear the error condition.

Reference Note: If needed, refer to Appendix A, API Commands, for additional

information regarding E? (Error Status Query) and U (User Status) commands.

G-2

ChartScan User’s Manual

Appendix H

Abbreviations

Horizontal Tab (ASCII Control Code)

Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers

Interface Clear line

(bullet symbol) “and” (e.g. *SCyCA)

(asterisk symbol) “unasserted” (e.g. *SC)

Not Controller Active mode

Not System Controller mode

Analog-to-Digital

IEEE

IFC

IOCTL

ist

LAG

LED

LLO

LSB

MLA

MSB

MTA

N/U

NAK

NDAC

NRFD

NUL

NV-RAM

PPC

PPD

PPU

REN

*CA

*SC

A/D

ACG

ACK

ADC

API

ASCII

ATN

BEL

Input/Output Control

Bus Device Individual Status

Listen Address Group bus command

Light-Emitting Diode

Addressed Command Group

Acknowledgement (ASCII Control Code)

Analog-to-Digital Converter

Application Program Interface

American Standard Code for Info. Interchange

Attention line

Line Feed (ASCII Control Code)

Local Lock Out bus command

Least Significant Bit

My Listen Address

Bell (ASCII Control Code)

Most Significant Bit

Backspace (ASCII Control Code)

Controller Active mode

My Talk Address

Not Used

CAN

CCL

CJC

CMD

Cancel (ASCII Control Code)

Character Command Language

Cold Junction Compensation

Bus Command interpretation

Carriage Return (ASCII Control Code)

Clear To Send line

Negative Acknowledgement (ASCII Control Code)

Not Data Accepted line

Not Ready For Data line

Null (ASCII Control Code)

Non-Volatile Random Access Memory

Parallel Poll Configure bus command

Parallel Poll Disable bus command

Parallel Poll Unconfig bus command

Remote Enable line

CTS

DAV

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DCD

DCL

DDE

DEL

DIO

DLE

DLL

DMA

DMM

DSR

DTR

ENQ

EOI

EOL

EOT

ESC

ETB

ETX

FCC

Data Valid line

Device Control 1 (ASCII Control Code)

Device Control 2 (ASCII Control Code)

Device Control 3 (ASCII Control Code)

Device Control 4 (ASCII Control Code)

Data Carrier Detect line

Ring Indicator line

Record Separator (ASCII Control Code)

Revised Standard (e.g. RS-232, RS-422, RS-422/485)

Request for Service bit

RS-

rsv

RTD

RTS

SCG

SCPI

SCSI

SDC

Device Clear bus command

Dynamic Data Exchange

Resistance Temperature Device

Request To Send line

Delete (ASCII Control Code)

Data Transfer (I/O) line

System Controller mode

Data Link Escape (ASCII Control Code)

Dynamic Link Library

Secondary Command Group

Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments

Small Computer System Interface

Selected Device Clear bus command

Shift In (ASCII Control Code)

Shift Out (ASCII Control Code)

Start of Header (ASCII Control Code)

Serial Poll Disable bus command

Serial Poll Enable bus command

Service Request line

Direct Memory Access

Digital Multimeter

Data Set Ready line

Data Terminal Ready line

End of Medium (ASCII Control Code)

Inquiry (ASCII Control Code)

End-Or-Identify line

SOH

SPD

SPE

SRQ

STX

SUB

SYN

T/C

TAG

TCT

TTL

UCG

UNL

UNT

End-Of-Line terminator

End of Transmission (ASCII Control Code)

Escape (ASCII Control Code)

End of Transmission Block (ASCII Control Code)

End of Text (ASCII Control Code)

Federal Communications Commission

Form Feed (ASCII Control Code)

File Separator (ASCII Control Code)

Group Execute Trigger bus command

General Purpose Interface Bus

Group Separator (ASCII Control Code)

Go To Local bus command

Start of Text (ASCII Control Code)

Substitute (ASCII Control Code)

Synchronous Idle (ASCII Control Code)

Thermocouple

Talk Address Group bus command

Take Control bus command

Transistor-Transistor Logic

Universal Command Group

Unlisten bus command

GET

GPIB

GTL

GUI

H/W

Untalk bus command

Unit Separator (ASCII Control Code)

Virtual DOS Machine

Graphical User Interface

VDM

Hardware

Vertical Tab (ASCII Control Code)

ChartScan User’s Manual, ^11-97

H-1

Abbreviations

Appendix H

−

Notes

H-2

ChartScan User’s Manual

Index

-A-

-F-

Abbreviations, Appendix H

AC Voltage, Measuring of, 4-40

AC RMS Voltage, Measuring of, 4-40, 4-41

Alarms, 4-24, 4-33, 4-34, B-26

API Commands, see Appendix A

ASCII Code Summary, see Appendix F

Auto Re-arm, 4-42, 4-43

-B-

Front Panel, ChartScan, 3-2

Fuse, Replacement of, 3-4

-H-

Hardware, Installation of, 1-3

High-Speed, Single-Channel (Burst Mode), 4-37, 4-39

Hysteresis, B-27

-I-

Interface Communications Card (IEEE 488), Option, 3-10

IEEE 488, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12

-M-

Burst Mode, 4-37, 4-39

Bus Lines, see Appendix E

Bus States, see Appendix E

-C-

Memory

Configuration of, 3-4

Expansion of, 3-4, 3-5

Write Enable/Disable, 3-6

-N-

Net232 Ethernet/RS-232 Converter (Option), 3-9

-P-

Program Examples, see Appendix D

Programming Information, see Appendices

-Q-

Quick Start, for ChartScan, 1-3

-R-

Rear Panel, ChartScan, 3-2

Registers, see Appendix C

Relay Card, 3-19, 3-20

RS-232/422 Interface, 3-6 thru 3-9

-S-

Signal Conditioning Cards

Calibration of, see Calibration

Installation of, 1-3, 1-4

CSN14/HV/S, 3-18

Calibration

Calibration Mode Indicator, 6-5

Command Active Indicators, 6-5

Main Unit, 6-6 thru 6-8

Password, 6-5

ScanCal, 6-3

Setup, 6-2

Signal Conditioning Cards, 6-10 thru 6-18

Chart Setup Wizard, 1-12, 4-44, 5-7

ChartView and ChartView Plus

Alarms, 4-24, 4-33, 4-34

Analog Meters, 4-29

Arm acquisition, 4-36

Basic Concepts, 1-10

Bar Graph Meters, 4-28

Chart Setup Wizard, 4-44

Configuration Files, 1-10

Configure acquisition, 1-14, 1-15, 4-36

Digital Meters, 4-30

Displays, creating & editing of 4-9, 4-44

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE), 4-20

Main Window, general, 4-4

Main Window Pull-down Menus, 4-16

Main Window Toolbar, 4-8

Parameter setups, 4-33

Save data to disk, 4-16, 4-42

Setup Window, 4-33

CSN14/LV/ (T, B, & S), 3-17

CSN14/TC/P, 3-15

Software, Installation of, 1-2

Specifications

ChartScan, Main Unit, 2-3

CSN14/HV/S, 3-18

CSN14/LV/ (T, B, & S), 3-17

CSN14/TC/P, 3-15, 3-16

CSN/Relay Card, 3-20

Expansion Chassis, 3-23

IEEE 488, 3-10

Transmit data, 4-21

Tutorial, 1-11

Configuration Aspects for Programmers, see Appendix B

CSN14/HV/S, 3-18

-T-

CSN14/LV/ (T, B, & S), 3-17

CSN14/TC/P, 3-15

TTL BNC Connectors, 3-14

CSN/Relay Card, 3-19

-V-

-D-

ViewXL, 5-2

Voltage Setting, 1-3, 3-3

Data Formats, for programmers, see Appendix C

Data Transfer Aspects, see Appendix E

Digital I/O Lines, 3-13

DIP Switch, 1-3, 3-7, 3-12, 6-4

-E-

Ethernet, 3-9

Error Conditions, 1-5, Appendix G

Expansion Chassis, 3-20, 3-21, 3-22

External TTL BNC Connectors, 3-14

eZ-PostView, 5-1

ChartScan User’s Manual

08-09-02

Index-1

ChartScan User’s Manual

WARRANTY/DISCLAIMER

OMEGA ENGINEERING, INC. warrants this unit to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a

period of 13 months from date of purchase. OMEGA Warranty adds an additional one (1) month grace

period to the normal one (1) year product warranty to cover handling and shipping time.

ensures that OMEGA's customers receive maximum coverage on each product.

This

If the unit should malfunction, it must be returned to the factory for evaluation. OMEGA's Customer

Service Department will issue an Authorized Return (AR) number immediately upon phone or written

request. Upon examination by OMEGA, if the unit is found to be defective it will be repaired or replaced at

no charge. OMEGA's WARRANTY does not apply to defects resulting from any action of the purchaser,

including but not limited to mishandling, improper interfacing, operation outside of design limits,

improper repair, or unauthorized modification. This WARRANTY is VOID if the unit shows evidence of

having been tampered with or shows evidence of being damaged as a result of excessive corrosion; or

current, heat, moisture or vibration; improper specification; misapplication; misuse or other operating

conditions outside of OMEGA's control. Components which wear are not warranted, including but not

limited to contact points, fuses, and triacs.

OMEGA is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various products.

However,

OMEGA neither assumes responsibility for any omissions or errors nor assumes liability for any

damages that result from the use of its products in accordance with information provided by

OMEGA, either verbal or written.

as specified and free of

OMEGA warrants only that the parts manufactured by it will be

defects. OMEGA MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OR

REPRESENTATIONS OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT THAT OF

TITLE, AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR

LIABILITY: The remedies of purchaser set forth herein are exclusive and the total liability of

OMEGA with respect to this order, whether based on contract, warranty, negligence,

indemnification, strict liability or otherwise, shall not exceed the purchase price of the

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED.

LIMITATION OF

component upon which liability is based.

consequential, incidental or special damages.

In no event shall OMEGA be liable for

CONDITIONS: Equipment sold by OMEGA is not intended to be used, nor shall it be used: (1) as a "Basic

Component" under 10 CFR 21 (NRC), used in or with any nuclear installation or activity; or (2) in medical

applications or used on humans. Should any Product(s) be used in or with any nuclear installation or

activity, medical application, used on humans, or misused in any way, OMEGA assumes no responsibility

as set forth in our basic WARRANTY/DISCLAIMER language, and additionally, purchaser will indemnify

OMEGA and hold OMEGA harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of the use of the

Product(s) in such a manner.

RETURN REQUESTS/INQUIRIES

Direct all warranty and repair requests/inquiries to the OMEGA Customer Service Department. BEFORE

RETURNING ANY PRODUCT(S) TO OMEGA, PURCHASER MUST OBTAIN AN AUTHORIZED RETURN

(AR) NUMBER FROM OMEGA'S CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT (IN ORDER TO AVOID

PROCESSING DELAYS). The assigned AR number should then be marked on the outside of the return

package and on any correspondence.

The purchaser is responsible for shipping charges, freight, insurance and proper packaging to prevent

breakage in transit.

FOR WARRANTY RETURNS, please have the

following information available BEFORE

contacting OMEGA:

FOR NON-WARRANTY REPAIRS, consult OMEGA

for current repair charges. Have the following

information available BEFORE contacting OMEGA:

1. P.O. number under which the product was

PURCHASED,

1. P.O. number to cover the COST

of the repair,

2. Model and serial number of the product under

warranty, and

3. Repair instructions and/or specific problems

relative to the product.

2. Model and serial number of the product, and

3. Repair instructions and/or specific problems

relative to the product.

OMEGA's policy is to make running changes, not model changes, whenever an improvement is possible. This affords

our customers the latest in technology and engineering.

OMEGA is a registered trademark of OMEGA ENGINEERING, INC.

reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form, in whole or in part, without prior

written consent of OMEGA ENGINEERING, INC.

TEMPERATURE

Thermocouple, RTD & Thermistor Probes, Connectors, Panels & Assemblies

Wire: Thermocouple, RTD & Thermistor

Calibrators & Ice Point References

Recorders, Controllers & Process Monitors

Infrared Pyrometers

;

PRESSURE, STRAIN AND FORCE

Transducers & Strain Gauges

Load Cells & Pressure Gauges

Displacement Transducers

;

Instrumentation & Accessories

FLOW/LEVEL

Rotameters, Gas Mass Flowmeters & Flow Computers

Air Velocity Indicators

Turbine/Paddlewheel Systems

;

Totalizers & Batch Controllers

pH/CONDUCTIVITY

pH Electrodes, Testers & Accessories

Benchtop/Laboratory Meters

Controllers, Calibrators, Simulators & Pumps

Industrial pH & Conductivity Equipment

;

DATA ACQUISITION

Data Acquisition & Engineering Software

Communications-Based Acquisition Systems

Plug-in Cards for Apple, IBM & Compatibles

Datalogging Systems

;

Recorders, Printers & Plotters

HEATERS

Heating Cable

;

Cartridge & Strip Heaters

Immersion & Band Heaters

Flexible Heaters

Laboratory Heaters

ENVIRONMENTAL

MONITORING AND CONTROL

Metering & Control Instrumentation

Refractometers

Pumps & Tubing

Air, Soil & Water Monitors

Industrial Water & Wastewater Treatment

pH, Conductivity & Dissolved Oxygen Instruments

;

Telular 900 1800 1900 User Manual
Sony Ericsson Cell Phone Z300 User Manual
Sony D FJ405 User Manual
Seagate ST32107WC User Manual
Seagate MARATHON ST9420A User Manual
Pioneer DEH 3900MP User Manual
Pioneer DEH 200MP User Manual
Philips HD7538 User Manual
Oregon Scientific RRA320PN User Manual
Nokia 6155i User Manual